The URL can be used to link to this page

31B-248 A*� : AN -AN A lot IW• AIN lt*f '1 Ol.. F � r N t � k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AW Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural .� Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION low 1W ELECTRICAL 266100 - 42 .W Aft Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Aft Northampton, MA with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1 /4" back of finished surface. 4w E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.6 TESTING A. Balancing Loads: 1 . Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load w is distributed equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if requested by the Public Works Department. 3.7 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. " ` ELECTRICAL 266100 - 41 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 lo Smith College AW Northampton, MA AM I^ C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and Aw grounding conductors with approved termination where required, conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards. Im D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in AW each length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive .W ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, , lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. I 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS am . A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run 4W with not more than the equivalent of three 90o bends in a single run. AM Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. Am B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall . be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during .ft construction. Am C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Alk Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using .* insulated bushings on conduit 1-1 /4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections. ''" lift D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures. _ 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES MW A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" low above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting • height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check ELECTRICAL 266100 - 40 ''" Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA k. Suspension systems for lighting fixtures that are free to swing a minimum of 450 from the vertical in all directions are Aft acceptable if a passing shaking table test approved by the using agency is conducted and will withstand without failure a force of not less than four times its own weight. PART 3 - INSTALLATION Aft 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in ,,, such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades. A" B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be Aft responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans. C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical 4► Code and local inspection authorities. E. Electrical equipment, such as j unction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified. m 3.2 GROUNDING A—% A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, „k grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be '"'" made at the main service equipment. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under this Contract. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 39 w� Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 *» Smith College , Northampton, MA .M Ak 16. Housekeeping pad anchors shall consist of a ductile iron casting Im that is tapered and hexagonal, smaller at its base than at its top. The upper portion shall have holes for rebar to pass through. The *" anchor shall be continuously threaded from top to bottom for the AW attachment of soleplates. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be attached to the structural slab using a stud wedge anchor. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be type HPA and stud wedge anchor shall be type SAS both as manufactured by Mason Industries or equal. AW Lighting Fixtures: .* a. Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the Standard 10 for Safety UL-57. b. Provide a lateral bracing system. ' c. Fixture supports will employ materials, which are suitable for .k the purpose. A d. Loop and hook or swivel hanger assemblies for pendant fixtures shall be filled with a restraining device to hold the "" stem in the support position during earthquake motions. e. Pendant supported fluorescent fixtures shall also be provided , with a flexible hanger device at the attachment to the fixture channel to preclude breaking of the support. The motion of swivels or hinged joints shall not cause sharp bends in AW conductors or damage to insulation. `K f. Each recessed fluorescent individual or continuous row of fixtures shall be supported by a seismic resistant suspended '" ceiling support system, and shall be fastened thereto at each AW corner of the fixture; or shall be provided with fixture support wired attached to the building structural members using two wires for individual fixtures and one wire per unit of .M continuous row fixtures. These support wires (min. No. 12 ga wire) will be capable of supporting four times the support load. g. A supporting assembly, which is intended to be mounted on an outlet box, will be designed to accommodate mounting low features on four-inch boxes, three inch plaster rings, and fixture studs. h. Each surface mounted fluorescent individual or continuous row of fixtures shall be attached to a seismic resistant ceiling support system. Fixture support devices shall be locking type „W scissor clamp, or a full loop band, which will securely attach to the ceiling support. i. Fixtures attached to the underside of a structural slab shall be AW properly anchored to the slab at each corner of the fixture. j. Each wall mounted emergency light unit shall be secured in a manner to hold the unit in place during a seismic disturbance. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 38 Aft ... lak 4 Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA „W elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason ' Industries, Inc. 12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable Ak end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage w► Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a *w► beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage A"" pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California Ak verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic brace A assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Ak 14. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter *k wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety shoulder, which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall Ak have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud wedge anchors shall be type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries or equal. 15. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries or equal. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 37 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" ..� Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the "' maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings 1W shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. low 8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple ,. bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either the building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3)- levelirg valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1 /8 in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall , be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. ""W 9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and •.. operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 .2 in. shall .� be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all ,... seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1- 1 /4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting ** through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be , articulated as clevis hangers nor the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole AM sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing AW through a 300 arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 300 capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 11 . Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be precompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed ELECTRICAL 266100 - 36 "'" 4W Im AMR w, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Aft Industries, Inc. 3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be ,f„ Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The "' bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1 /4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 /2 in. shall ** be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all �w seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum if 1 /4 '" ELECTRICAL 266100 - 35 „ , Ae Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 •• Smith College Aft Northampton, MA Alk ..k Flexibility Mounted Zon Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. A., e U BC BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2 ..k SBCCI Aft I. Product Intent: Q.W. 1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this low section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason * Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section D. 2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1 /8 in. .. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1 /4 in. j. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints: A 1 . Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. . square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as AW required. Pads shall be Type Super "W” as manufactured by Mason Aw Industries, Inc. 2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static Aft deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock .r^ absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge- bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre- approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California "` verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load *o ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason „w ELECTRICAL 266100 - 34 I . AW Ow 4W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified. C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of un-insolated equipment. d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure proper installation and performance. 4' G. Related Work: 1 . Housekeeping Pads: a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad Oft attachment to the structure details and design shall be Oft prepared by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings. Ak b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment. 2. Supplementary Support Steel: Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified. 3. Attachments:Contractor shall supply restraint attachments plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration aw vendor's calculations. H. Seismic Force Levels: 1 . The following force levels will be used on this project. AW Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in Ak E. Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For 4ft Code for all pipes, Duct for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety & Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either ""' Equipment E ui ment Rigidity or ELECTRICAL 266100 - 33 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Aft Northampton, MA D. Seismic Certification and Analysis: .�► 1 . Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five (5) years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job AW location. Awl 2. All restraining devices shall have a pre-approval number form California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Pre-approvals based on AM independent testing are preferred pre-approvals based on calculations. Where pre-approved devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. 4W Calculations (including the combing of tensile and shear loading) •.W to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five (5) years of seismic design experience and licensed in the state of the job location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and ,W tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode. 3. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads AW and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment Aft and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting through the equipment center of ,, gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. Aft E. Code and Standards Requirement: Aft 1 . Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced code: a. Massachusetts State Building Code. M b. BOCA Massachusetts Electrical Code. C. NFPA-13, 14, 20, and 90A. Aft d. Massachusetts State Plumbing and Gas Code. Im e. Massachusetts Electrical Code. AM F. Manufacture's Responsibility: '"" A 1 . Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment low shall have the following responsibilities: AW A ELECTRICAL 266100 - 32 Am AID Aft m Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 4ft Smith College Ak Northampton, MA 2. Positive Attachment: A positive attachment is defined as a '�► cast-in-anchor, a drill-in wedge anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded "C" type beam clamps for support rods of electrical conduit, bus duct, or cable trays, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. �► 3. Transverse Bracing: Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. 4. Longitudinal Bracing: Restraint (s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe. C. Manufacturer's Data: 1 . The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows: a. Descriptive Data: 1 . Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing compliance with the Specification. 2. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive Drawings. b. Shop Drawings: 1 . Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. 2. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. 3. Where walls, floors, slabs, or supplementary steelwork are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, Oft conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacture's submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points. 4. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and locations for each piece of equipment. +w. "ft ELECTRICAL 266100 - 31 ab Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA AM 7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as detailed in Section H. A. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1 . Vibration isolation for equipment. 2. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. A. 3. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment. low 4. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. S. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads. 6. All electrical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not listed is Aw still included in this Specification.) .W Batters Packs Generators " Bus Ducts AM Light Fixtures Aft Cable Trays Comp. Room Units Switching Gear .. Conduit Transformers AW Electrical Panels Unit Substitutions ..i B. Definitions Im 1 . Life Safety Systems: All a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler low piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, low service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and „p, smoke exhaust systems. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency Im power supply including all generators, transfer switches, .k transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or „ft emergency lighting systems. C. All medical and life support systems. d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence ,M including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc. „W e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule. "* ELECTRICAL 266100 - 30 low ,.. Im Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Aft R. System Documentation: *% 1 . Prepare and submit four (4) copies of operation and maintenance 4"k manuals, neatly bound as outlined in this Specification. Oft 2. Manual to include: Ah a. A system block diagram with all input/output terminations Ak and patch points identified. b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed. Ak C. A record of the test results. A. d. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable Ask plant, component and node locations. e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Ak Owner's reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the original design. 2.13 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL w 1 . It is the intent of the seismic portion of this Specification to keep all electrical building system components in place during a seismic event. 2. All electrical equipment and conduit, as noted on the equipment schedule or in the Specification, shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. 3. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. 4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component manufactures and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufactures or construction standards, the most stringent shall apply. 5. The Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other " requirements). 6. Any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements shall be corrected by the Contractor in an approved manner. "* ELECTRICAL 266100 - 29 .R Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 .M Smith College Northampton, MA Im I P. Wiring ,.k 1 . Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard ,w broadcast practices. Do not exceed 30% fill in conduit. A 2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment. 3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits exposed to physical abuse shall be run in RSC, 3/4" minimum. 4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper. . a. Pulling tensions. b. Quantities. C. Types. d. Lengths. e. Routing. f. Wire group separation. g. Identification. h. Bend radius 5. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment. 6. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes, wireways and wiring troughs, providing circuit and . , conductor identification. Tie as required using T&B "Ty-Raps" of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing between ties to 6", and provide circuit and conductor identification at least once in each enclosure. 7. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and equipment can be unmounted for service and inspection. AW 8. Wiring to the 2nd and 3rd floor data outlets shall be required to route A through the attic and be fed down through the walls. Q. Acceptance Testing 1 . Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner during a period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for acceptance testing is two (2) working days. • Contractor shall furnish a minimum of one (1) technician for the Aw acceptance testing period. This area shall be completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy. 2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the work and which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of the acceptance tests. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 28 4 .w oft w.► Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Aft Smith College Northampton, MA «� ► 1 . Labeling shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A standards. 2. Label each cable with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum, 1 /8 in. high characters, in the following locations: Oft a. Inside receptacle box at the work area. . � b. Behind the communication closet patch panel or punch block. 'A11i 3. Use labels on face of data patch panels. Provide facility assignment records in a protective cover at each telecommunications closet location that is specific to the facilities terminated therein. 4. Use color-coded labels for each termination field that conforms to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A standard color codes for termination blocks. ► 5. Labels shall be machine-printed. Hand-lettered labels shall not be acceptable. 6. Label cables, outlets, patch panels, and punch blocks with room number in which outlet is located, followed by a single letter suffix ft to indicate particular outlet within room, i.e., 52107A, S2107B. 4ft Indicate riser cables by an R then pair or cable number. N. Field Quality Control ate, 1 . Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the installation to provide co-ordination of the work of the Division and of other trades and to provide technical information when requested by other trades. This person shall be responsible for all quality control during installation, equipment set-up and testing. O. General Co-ordination (Date and Telephone Wiring) 1 . Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances, regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited to, structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all items. Such conformity .► shall have precedence over this Specification. * 2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and 4ft cables. Provide fastenings and supports adequate to support loads. 3. Install work neatly, with boxes, equipment, etc., plumb and square. A k Adjust layout as necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Oft Install equipment to provide maximum safety to future operators. ,�► 4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable terminations. ter► ELECTRICAL 266100 - 27 4% .R 4M Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 .ft Smith College A Northampton, MA AW a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published .M specifications for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and Ak sidewall pressure when installing all cables. AM 2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner M acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner. 3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines: Im a. Use of approved wire, cable, and wiring devices. Aft b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination. Ift 4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and other partitions of building construction. .1W 5. Where existing cables (outlets) are being relocated to an adjacent AW wall, Contractor shall cut off connector and pull cable to new outlet box location. Pull and label as specified. Am K. Testing of Data Cables AM .. 1 . Every cabling link in the installation shall be tested in accordance with the field test specifications defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 'M "Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 1000 Category AW 6 Cabling". 2. The installed twisted-pair horizontal links shall be tested from the IDF in the telecommunications room to the telecommunication wall "" outlet in the work area against the "Permanent Link" performance limits specification as defined in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 standard. 3. Any failing link must be diagnosed and corrected. The corrective AW action shall be followed with a new test to prove that the corrected ,.,, link meets the performance requirements. �, L. Grounding A .w 1 . All equipment racks, housings, and raceways shall be grounded. 2. Data system shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be connected to a single point ground which, in turn, will AW be connected to the grounding systems conductors in that area. 1,m 3. Grounding shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-607(A) - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for A Teleccmmunications, National Electrical Code®, ANSI/NECA/BICSI- 568 and manufacturer's grounding requirements as minimum. .� M. Labeling .d ELECTRICAL 266100 - 26 A Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one (1) data and one (1) voice drop, run from each outlet location to the Telephone Room. G. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel terminations in Telephone Room. H. Voice runs may be cross connected on 110 blocks. I. Data cabling shall be Category 6, unshielded twisted pair, (UTP), with a blue sheath as described in ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A 1 . Solid copper, 24 AWG, 100 ohm balanced twisted-pair (UTP) Category 6 cables with four individually twisted-pairs, which meet 4ft or exceed the mechanical and transmission performance Oft specifications in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 up to 250 MHz. 2. Wall Plates and Connectors sk a. Single-gang faceplate with two openings containing the following devices: 1 . Data Outlet - 8-pin modular, category 6, unkeyed, black, pinned to either T568 (A or B) standards. .n 2. Voice Outlet - 8-pin modular, category 3, unkeyed, ivory, pinned to either T568 (A or B) standards. 3. DataJack Modules a. Eight position modules shall be used in all work areas and modular patch panels and shall meet the TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 standard. Modules shall be tested and approved for Category 6 ETL component compliance. The module termination to 4 pair 24 - 22 AWG 100 ohm solid unshielded twisted pair cable shall be accomplished by use of a forward Aft motion termination cap and shall not require the use of a punchdown tool. All modules shall be 100% tested for NEXT performance. The termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and T568B wiring schemes. ,.► J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling ,. 1 . Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to comply with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. " ° ELECTRICAL 266100 - 25 4W .M Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA low Aw D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral to shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. AW E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in sequence down the left-hand side and even 4W numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand side. .W F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be AW provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1 /4" high by 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit. Hand written directories will not be acceptable. G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the rating shown on the panelboard schedule on the plans. Aw H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL „ label. Panelboards shall be Square D, Type NQOD for 208Y/120 volts, or equal by General Electric, Westinghouse, or ITE. 2.12 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AW A. The building's internal telephone/data system is existing, and will be '" modified to accommodate the new building layout as shown on the AW Drawings and directed by the Owner. AW B. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone Aft equipment mounted on existing backboard in basement, shall remain and .y, be sealed off with plastic covering during construction to avoid dust intrusion as much as practicable. "" ,Ww C. New outlet locations, as shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size A* outlet box, and cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1) for data, (1) for telephone, and (1) for future expansion. AM 4W D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been ,ow pre-qualified by the College. E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Basement Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings. AM, Im ELECTRICAL 266100 - 24 A Awk low AWk Aft 4W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and "OFF". Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. �w. D. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to 42,000 amps. E. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock on door of trim. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. End walls shall be removable. Front trim shall be hinged. „ F. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to be fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be barriered. G. Panelboards shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. Panelboard shall be Square D I-LINE. H. Panelboards shall have provisions within for accommodation of the campus standard Square-D Power-Logic meterset. Current transformers provisions shall also be required for this equipment. 2.11 PANELBOARDS * A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as indicated on the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between "ON" and "OFF" when the breaker is tripped. Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on. C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Main ratings shall be as shown on the panelboard schedule. ""'�'� ELECTRICAL 266100 - 23 Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 M Smith College Ak Northampton, MA dft without removing the starter from the panel. 3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece 'M construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative .�k&, if the thermal unit is removed. low a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off- .m Auto" selector switch, Square D, Class 8536, Form C, three- Awl pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A " switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general purpose enclosure, Square D, Class 8502. C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused, with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt. d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others for interlocking purposes. ,� 4. Starters for two speed motors shall be for single winding or two low winding as required for the service. AM Aw E. Equivalent equipment by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, or Westinghouse will be considered. look .b 2.10 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS I A. Furnish and install distribution/power panelboards where shown on the A plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case „ circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as required. B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as required. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum ho7t spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50oC above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in Aft accordance w€th Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of I conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. „W Buses shall be copper. .W C. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush lak with each other. Large permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position. Tripped indication shall be Am ELECTRICAL 266100 - 22 A low Im Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the fixture schedule and by Aft corresponding letter on Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the 4M Architect. Ak 2.9 MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES M, .A A. Furnish and `nstall motor starting, protecting, and controlling devices for motors where shown on the Drawings. B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as indicated on plans and specifications. 1 . All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. ' ' 2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during .► normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, with positive pad-locking provisions in the "OFF" position. 3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R (rainproof) is specified on the plans. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-deposited on cleaned u phosphatized steel. 4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC, as shown. 5. Fuses shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Switches shall be Square D Heavy Duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosures, or equal. C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or .�, double pole toggle switches as specified, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the plans. ,w► 1 . Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. 2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front ELECTRICAL 266100 - 21 s AW Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 .0^ Smith College Aft Northampton, MA O 4W certified technicians in accordance with UL guidelines and NFPA standards. Each and every device shall be tested. Awl b. A copy of the final test report shall be submitted indicating proper functioning of the system and conformance to the specifications. The test shall be performed by factory- trained qualified technicians. Each and every device shall be tested, and standalone operation of remote panels shall be verified. Final testing shall be performed by the same low company that will hold and execute the Test and Inspection contract. C. The manufacturer shall guarantee all system equipment for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. d. The contractor shall guarantee all raceways and wiring to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. 4. Training A a. The contractor shall provide the services of the AW manufacturer's representative for a period of 4 hours, during normal business hours, to instruct the owner's designated " personnel and fire department response teams on the low operation of the system. , 2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURES I"& A A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All „W lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all required glassware and lamps. All " lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. AM Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced. B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state low harmonic electronic type, .W approvable for use on their system by Massachusetts Electric Co. 4. Department. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, "W complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM AW certified. C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and Im size; T8 lamps shall be 3500 K. 00.. D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. A` Aft ELECTRICAL 266100 - 20 .W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4% g. Initiation & Control Modules 1 . Relay Module Provide addressable control relay circuit modules at the locations shown on the drawings. The module shall provide one (1) form C dry relay contacts rated at 24Vdc @ 2 amps (pilot duty) to control external appliances or equipment. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. 2. Monitor Module AW 4., Provide addressable single input monitor modules as Ok shown on plans for monitoring of all waterflow, tamper, and supervisory devices. Addressable Ok modules shall mount to single gang electrical boxes. AW E. Installation 1 . Installation shall be performed b Licensed installers in a workmanlike manner. The work shall be performed by skilled technicians under the direction of experienced engineers, all of whom are properly trained and qualified. 2. Wiring a. All wiring for the system shall be in accordance with Articles 760, 725, and 800 of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local electrical codes. b. Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. All devices shall be mounted upon and splices made in UL listed boxes. Wiring splices and transposing or changing of .� colors will not be permitted. C. All junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled as 'Fire Alarm System' with decal or approved markings d. Fire Alarm control systems and equipment shall be connected to separate dedicated branch circuits, sized as required for proper service. Circuits shall be labeled 'FIRE ALARM'. .w� 3. Final Tests / Warranty a. The system shall be fully tested by the contractor and NICET "*� ELECTRICAL 266100 - 19 Am AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Aft Smith College AM Northampton, MA A. environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental .W compensation value and alert the system operator when the AW detector approaches 75% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value. C. Heat Detectors - Fixed Temperature - ROR Heat Detector 10► AW Provide analog/addressable combination fixed temperature / rate-of- rise detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The heat detector shall have a nominal fixed .m temperature alarm point rating of 135°F (57°C) and a rate of rise alarm point of 15°F (9°C) per minute. The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 70 ft A (21 .3m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications. .M d. Detector Base - Standard 1 Provide standard detector mounting bases suitable for mounting on either North American 1 -gang, 3 %z or 4 inch octagon box and 4 inch square box, or European BESA or 1- gang box. The base shall, contain no electronics and AW support all series detector types. low e. Manual Station - Double Action Single Stage AM AW Provide analog/addressable double action, single stage fire ,W alarm stations at the locations shown on the drawings. The fire alarm station shall be of polycarbonate construction and AW. incorporate an internal toggle switch. A locked test feature AW shall be provided. The station shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 %2 (64mm) deep 1 -gang boxes and 1 %z (38mm) deep 4 square boxes with 1-gang covers. Manual station shall be keyed alike 'with Control Panel Im f. Notification Appliances A dw Provide low profile wall mount horn/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. The low profile horn/strobe shall produce a high level db output an offer a full line of A.D.A. low compliant strobes. The horn/strobe shall mount to a Ift standard one-gang electrical box and with an optional trim plate accommodate two-gang, octagonal or four inch square `ft electrical boxes. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 18 fs Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Ift Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Fire Initiating Devices Intelligent System Devices: Provide intelligent analog devices where shown and required. Each device shall retain operating characteristics in non-volatile memory and conduct algorithms to distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted nuisance alarms. All analog devices shall provide dual LED indicators, a green LED shall flash to denote active communication, and a red LED shall flash to denote an alarm condition. Devices shall be interchangeable with twist-lock bases which will provide a supervised remote LED output, „ fault isolation circuitry, or an auxiliary relay contact. In the event of an addressable loop communications failure, devices shall remain capable of initiating an alarm sequence. .� a. Duct Detector Housing Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies to mount an analog/ addressable detector along with a standard, �w relay or isolator detector mounting base. The housing shall also protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. The housing shall utilize an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. Drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing shall also be provided. The housing shall be finished in baked red enamel. Remote alarm LED indicators and remote test stations shall be provided. + * b. Smoke Detector - Photoelectric A. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The detector shall have the ability to set the sensitivity and alarm verification of .. each of the individual detectors on the circuit. It shall be possible to automatically change the sensitivity of individual analog/addressable detectors for the day and night periods. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre- alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient ELECTRICAL 266100 - 17 A* AWA Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Im Smith College Ak Northampton, MA AM systems or conventional devices. low b. Addressable control modules or relays shall provide auxiliary control functions. C. Addressable loop wiring shall support all devices shown and allow for a minimum of 25% spare capacity and be wired in a Class B, Style 4 fashion. 'W d. As a minimum, power supplies and notification appliance °W circuits shall operate all devices shown plus 25% spare , capacity, and be wired in a Class B, Style Y fashion. e. Audible and visual signals shall be circuited separately to allow continued operation of the visual signal in the event of A. a silencing of the audible signal. AW D. Field Mounted System Components Im AM 1 . Power Supply Al® System power supply(s) shall provide multiple power limited 24 VDC '0° output circuits as required by the panel. A Upon failure of normal (AC) power, the effected portion(s) of the .R system shall automatically switch over to secondary power without "m losing any system functions. A Each system power supply shall be individually supervised. Power .W supply trouble signals shall identify the specific supply and the Im nature of the trouble condition. 4, All standby batteries shall be continuously monitored by the lak powersupply. Low battery and disconnection of battery power AW supplyconditions shall immediately annunciated as battery trouble ,m and identify the specific power supply affected. AW All system power supplies shall be capable of recharging their AW associated batteries, from a fully discharged condition to a capacity Ak sufficient to allow the system to perform consistent with the requirements of this section, in 48 hours maximum. All AC power connections shall be to the buildings designated emergency electrical power circuit and shall meet the require-ments of NFFA 72 - The AC power circuit shall be installed in conduit raceway. The power circuit disconnect means shall be clearly labeled FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL and shall have a red marking. The location of the circuit disconnect shall be labeled AW permanently inside the each control panel the disconnect serves. AW AM ELECTRICAL 266100 - 16 Aft ., Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA �u building. h. Activate the exterior weatherproof beacon. i. Activation of a Duct-smoke will shut-down the �w corresponding HVAC unit. k. Activation of a Tamper Switch will send a Supervisory Trouble to Public Safety. C. General Requirements 1 . The fire alarm system shall be designed and UL and FM approved 4► for Fire, Audio Evacuation and Security applications. The system ,M operational characteristics shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory, shall be field programmable and capable of being edited "W with no factory involvement. 4W 2. The system shall utilize broadcast polling techniques and 4w microprocessor-based detectors to minimize the required response time and possible false alarms. Individual initiating and control devices shall retain pre-programmed response characteristics, 40k history logging, and support electronic addressing. A system-wide O► response (alarm sequence) to an alarm condition shall take place within 3 seconds. 3. The system shall support analog sensing techniques to monitor individual devices which enable the user to set sensitivity aw parameters. All inputs shall be subject to multi-level alarm verification. The system shall be capable of reporting the status and sensitivity of each device and vectoring this information to a printer. The system shall automatically identify any detector which becomes dirty (maintenance alert), prior to false alarming. 4. The system shall be supported by standby batteries. In the event of a loss of primary power, batteries shall support 60 hours of full supervisory operation followed by 15 minutes of alarm. 5. The system shall be capable of nine levels of alarm prioritization, and allow control by event, and may include cross zoning, stepping, and/or logic statement inputs. 6. All equipment shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials and accessories covered by these requirements shall be provided by a single manufacturer, or if provided by different manufacturers recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. 7. Circuiting Guidelines. Each initiating device and indicating circuit shall be electronically supervised and individually addressable. All wiring shall be as follows: a. Individual addressable modules shall be used to monitor waterflow, tamper, and status conditions from any related '" ELECTRICAL 266100 - 15 Ak AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Am Smith College Northampton, MA Aft. 13. Provide copies of Operating & Maintenance manuals with the request for final inspection. O & M Manuals shall include the following: a. All of the information submitted in the shop drawings. b. As-built documentation which incorporates all modifications ""�" to the system, whether made as a field change or by a .M change order. I^ C. Include a copy of the final test report, UL certificate and test contract. AW .f. 14. Three 100% test are to preformed (Vendor, Vendor and Engineer, , and Vendor/Engineer and Fire Department). Test areas will be coordinated with the Fire Department to determine initial layout will perform. .W 15. Signage and labels shall comply with MEC, NFPA 72, and the NFD checklist. 16. CO Detection shall be interlocked with the Fire Alarm Control panel "t and designed to activate in accordance with requirements set forth ,.k by authority having jurisdiction. A. B. Sequence of Operation *" 1 . The operation of a manual station or activation of any automatic alarm initiating device (system smoke, heat, water flow, Duct Smoke) shall automatically: 4" a. Initiate the transmission of the alarm to Smith College Public Safety via data transmission to Campus monitoring system. b. Sound a voice evacuation signal over all audio circuits. AW C. Flash all visual signals throughout the building in a ,k synchronized manner. d. Flash an alarm LED and sound an audible signal at the FACP. AM Upon Acknowledgment, the alarm LED shall light steadily and AM the audible shall silence. Subsequent alarms shall re-initiate AW this sequence. e. Visually indicate the alarm initiating device type and location '" via the LCD display located at the FACP and at all remote AW annunciators. f. Automatically shut down or control HVAC equipment to .A initiate smoke control functions as required. Manual override AM, controls and programmable relays shall serve as an interface AW to the Building Automation System. g. Operate prioritized outputs to release all magnetically held `�' smoke doors and magnetically locked doors throughout the ELECTRICAL 266100 - 14 *" Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA �w quality and performance of the equipment and matches existing system. .w 9. The system design and installation shall conform to the following standards: a. All equipment shall be UL listed for it's intended purpose. b. NFPA standards 70, 72, 90A, 92A, and 101 . C. Current State Building Code. d. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). e. All requirements of all local authorities having jurisdiction. f. Contractor will adhere to the requirements of the ,M Northampton Fire Departments checklist and guidelines. 10. Submit 12 complete sets of shop drawings to include: a. Complete point-to-point riser diagram showing all equipment and size, type and number of all conductors and devices. b. Large scale drawings of each panel showing module placement and spare capacity allowances. C. Address listing of all field devices shown on floor plans for coordination of LCD message text assignments. d. Original catalog data sheets for all items to assure 4ft compliance with these specifications. This equipment shall be subject to approval, and no equipment shall be ordered without prior approval. e. Provide calculations to support the size of standby batteries notification circuits and power supplies submitted. Calculations shall demonstrate proper current draw, voltage Ak drop, wire size considerations, and spare capacity 4ft allowances. f. Confirmation that the equipment supplier, Simplex, will Ak provide on-site project management and supervision during A► system installation, and perform system testing and .w instruction as well as interface to existing Campus system. g. Contractor will adhere to the requirements of the `.t Northampton Fire Departments checklist and guidelines. 11. Conform to all UL standards for testing and provide certification of the completed installation. Provide the services of a factory trained technician for proper testing and operation of the inter-connect for Campus monitoring. ,.► 12. The equipment supplier shall conduct the initial programming of the system and a complete rack/test of hardware panels prior to delivery to the installing contractor. Ak ELECTRICAL 266100 - 13 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 ► Smith College Northampton, MA AW 13. Occupancy sensors to be Watt Stopper passive infrared/ultrasonic AW DT 200 or equal. 14. Wall plates shall be smooth Type 302 satin finish stainless steel with matching screws. ► 15. Time Clocks shall be 120V-40A three pole Astronomic style with skip a clay features by Tork; Model 7300Z or approved equivalent. " " 16. Timer switches shall be 120V 20A featuring 60 minute time cycle by A*. Tork; Model C560M or approved equivalent. „R 2.7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM .k A. Scope 1 . Install new analog/addressable fire detection, alarm and control system in compliance with the specifications and drawings. The .t system shall interface to other building systems to conduct monitoring and control functions as described herein. 2. The fire alarm control panel is a microprocessor based fire AM alarm system. New peripheral devices shall be integrated onto the existing system digital data communications. Add „,t addressable loop cards as required. 3. Each initiating device shall have full analog detection capabilities; Aft will maintain operating characteristics stored in dedicated EEPROM A memory, identify its' exact location, and shall operate as described AM elsewhere in these specifications. 4. Work in this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the related contract documents. ,. 5. All exceptions, variances and substitutions of operating capabilities or equipment called for in these specifications shall be listed in writing and forwarded to the Engineer at the time of bid. �* 6. Provide automatic and manual, closed circuit, multiplex fire alarm communications according to the contract documents, wired, connected and left in first class operating condition. "" 7. Final connections, testing, and adjusting of the system shall be done under the direct supervision of the system supplier. Provide NICET certified and factory trained technicians to demonstrate the system to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, and make all additional adjustments to the system operation as required by the Owner's Representative. a. Provide a NICET certified technician factory trained on ' Edwards's systems for proper operation and interconnect to Campus monitoring system. 8. Provide equipment manufactured by Simplex. This constitutes the ELECTRICAL 266100 - 12 '"" AMW Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval. 2.6 WIRING DEVICES A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. 4w Where two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided �., with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates. 1 . Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side * and back wired. To be Leviton Cat. No. 53521, or equal. 2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898HG1, or equal. 3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan base and lid, 4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat. No. 20350, or equal. 4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat. No. 53621G, or equal. 5. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side �.. wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12212, or equal. 6. Light Switches, 3 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12232, or equal. 7. Light Switches, 4 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12242, or equal. 8. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton Cat. No. 1221 PLR, or equal. 9. Double pole switch - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, ,w Leviton Cat. No. 12222, or equal. 10. Key operated switches shall be of the same grade and rating as specified for toggle switches. 11 . Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows: +■► a. Type "50" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 279. b. Type "30" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Oft Cat. No. 278. 12. Drop Cord Receptacles (Quad Outlet) - Two duplex receptacles as specified above mounted in a pendant outlet box, Ericson Cat. No. 6030 with 26031 cover plates. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 11 4^ Aft .. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AW Smith College ,,., Northampton, MA .. Aft, D. Conductors #3 AWG and larger, Type THW, stranded. Aft E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud "f partitions may be Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall Aft be raceway and wire as specified. F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those AW specification sections. Aft G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire, Triangle/PWC, or equal. 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel 'o" unless otherwise noted or required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code, AW and shall be as required for their use. ,,m B. junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations A", shall be of the cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with Aft watertight screw-on cover and gasket. Aft C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate: "` 1 . Structural conditions. 2. Size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering. 3. Device of fixture for which required. D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed. .w Ate. E. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be Aft used. AM F. Pull and junction boxes, whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code A+ gauge. Oft G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover AW plates and screws, bonderized paint finished. ,ft, Im H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the Massachusetts Electrical Codes. Aft ASR I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Aft Company, General Electric Company, Raco, or approved equal. Aft AM ELECTRICAL 266100 - 10 A. A\ AM wM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 4W Smith College AW Northampton, MA Ak 2.1 RACEWAYS Ak 4% A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications. B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways run in walls or *�* partitions, run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings .► for electrical metallic tubing shall be of steel construction, set screw type. C. Raceways for site communications and site power and light shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent welded fittings, or Type EB where shown to be encased in concrete. Use steel sweeps on conduit 3" and larger. D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors or other removable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. 2.2 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules of the Massachusetts Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the "lay-in" type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. .• B. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller, Type THWN, solid. C. Conductors #4 AWG through #8 AWG, Type THWN, stranded. "' ELECTRICAL 266100 - 9 AM "M Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 low Smith College loft Northampton, MA low work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. Ak C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive AM maintenance shall be considered as being defective. AW 1 .1 7 CUTTING AND PATCHING Im Im A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes required for the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by Im the General Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a loft manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Im Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, '® etc. shall be checked by the Electrical Contractor, and error due to failure AW to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. Aw B. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and "" patching required for conduit and equipment where sleeves were not 4^ installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do all A drilling required for the installation of hangers. AM C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. Ak D. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the lak Owner. Im E. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed AM concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this 4" area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall cover the entire working AW area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. Aft 1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS Aft A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1 . PART 2 - MATERIALS �► ELECTRICAL 266100 - 8 ,w 4ft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical Oft equipment rooms. Ak B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building. 1 .15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient ' length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of .� the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab AW sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1 Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. Ak 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 5. Panel schedules 6. List of recommended spare parts. 7. Copies of all service contracts. 8. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors �w as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. " 1 .16 GUARANTEE A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of final w acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his ELECTRICAL 266100 - 7 Aw Awe Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AW Smith College Aak Northampton, MA AM 40, A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power Im as specified in Division 1 . Ak AM 1 .1 1 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Ak A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of ,*► interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his AM estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or AW implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. AM o B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, Ift shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. .f. 4 C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. Im D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical AM Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing AW such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no 4M additional cost. 1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING ** A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work '" efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. AW AW 1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS .► A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for Im completion of his Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor. ,m B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines Im and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the A General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall AW provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work AW shall be removed by the individual Contractor. AW 1 .14 WORK CONCEALED AM ..k ELECTRICAL 266100 - 6 4M low lift A► s A.► Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA aw manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1 .7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. „ B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be •, required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance „ with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for 4ft errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor. 4W D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at * his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 4M Ak 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1 . 1 .10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER '" ELECTRICAL 266100 - 5 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 •& Smith College A% Northampton, MA AM F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of A* pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Electrical AM Contractor installing such items. G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of A% his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall AW make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. '""" All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable 1W means. .,�► H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with , all conditions affecting his work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. A& �. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and . Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Am Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. AW AW 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AW A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in 14 this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the A General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in product specifications and as Aft approved by the Architect and Owner. AM AW B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will '" be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1 .6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials A used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of AM ELECTRICAL 266100 - 4 Ak Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed AM between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. '% D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the p progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the Ak actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 3 Aft AN, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Mi* Smith College AN, Northampton, MA SECTION 266100 - ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL Ak At.. 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Aw A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and low applicable parts of Division 1 , as part of this Section. Ak B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which A affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically lab mentioned in this Section. Aw C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the .w,. work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK .00, A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for Ak and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work Ak specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not AW limited to, the following: AM 1 . Upgrades to Fire Alarm system Ak 2. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit. A 3. Wiring devices and plates. 4. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or "" Owner including final connections to equipment. Awk 5. Interface system with Campus fire alarm load. 6. Lighting fixtures. 7. Siesmic. 8. Telecommunications system. 9. Feeders A 10. New Distribution and Panelboards 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS AM A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, '"W and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where .oft provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or Ak regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions Am Am ELECTRICAL 266100 - 2 Ak .k Am IRM Aft Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Ak Smith College Ak Northampton, MA .,► INDEX SECTION 266100 - ELECTRICAL s PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS �*► 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 GROUNDING 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 1 .4 INSPECTIONS 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 1 .5 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.6 TESTING 1 .7 PRODUCTS 3.7 FIRE SAFING 1 .8 SUBMITTALS 1 .9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 1 .10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 1 .1 1 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER 1 .12 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1 .13 PRODUCT HANDLING 1 .14 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1 .15 WORK CONCEALED 1 .16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 .17 GUARANTEE 1 .18 CUTTING AND PATCHING RECORD DRAWINGS * PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 RACEWAYS 2.2 WIREWAYS 2.3 CONDUCTORS ww 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 2.5 NAMEPLATES 2.6 WIRING DEVICES 2.7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM aw► 2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.9 MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES 2.10 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 2.11 PANEL BOARDS 4ft 2.12 TELECOMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 2.13 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL AM " " ELECTRICAL 266100 - 1 Alk Aft AM A AN AM .f. AM AW A 4w A Am, .lk AW ,,W Aft Aft Oak Aw. sue► Aak Am, .a A^ AW .■a Alk Ak AM AW A.W. ARM 4" Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College """ Northampton, MA of parts shall be confirmed by the Owner's representative, who shall countersign the Certificate. 3.12 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage *k rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG .�► Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION �w HVAC 235500-75 AM AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Ask Smith College Northampton, MA A D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be A` replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. Am Im 3.10 IDENTIFICATION Am A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified AM as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from ,W the floor or usual point of vision. look B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal ,.w* direction of flow. The letters shall be 1 high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers are not over 50 feet on center. C. Each valve, except run out valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1 -1 12" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any *�► pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the AM discs to the valves with brass "S" hooks or chains. .. D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be Im identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or 40► instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic, which will be black and show white letters when Aft engraved. Letters shall be 1 /2" high. AW E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the AM Architectural section of these Specifications has been accomplished. 3.11 SPARE PARTS A. Filters: Each air handling unit and cabinet type unit heaters shall be provided with three (3) extra sets of filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after substantial completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the Owner. ► B. Cabinet Unit Motors: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan coil unit motor for each size installed on the project. Spare motors shall be delivered to the Owner. .. C. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan belt of each size furnished. D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated location to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery HVAC 235500-74 *� Am a Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 3.7 INSULATION �w A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from covering. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket. D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then 4ft be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. 3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated ,d% accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ,k ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected. B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up. C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. "'` HVAC 235500-73 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Aft AM G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic °""° or other temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the A valve, fitting, joint, or section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before. Im 3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING AW A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned A* before placing in operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill low scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water being Pak circulated. Clean all strainers. AW B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. , C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion AM of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained *f► completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall be repeated. �* D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the *' slightly alkaline side (ph = 7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be , still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium phosphate shall be repeated. E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-leak" compounds to the system. 3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS AM A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust 'w systems, and prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and A*. appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and .M balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the Drawings, or as directed. low AW B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by Ak the Owner. Aft HVAC 235500-72 low .k .W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA connections where required to isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified. F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional requirements. G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system. H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with the Owner. The HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling (adding glycol if required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and operational. 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction. ' B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water * and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester. C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1 .5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31 .9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building AM Services Piping. D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. 4k F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. """^ HVAC 235500-71 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 4ft Smith College Northampton, MA AM, Deflection AW ... Air Handling Units and Centrifugal 1 , 4, 19 Internal Exhaust Fans Isolation Pumps - In-Line 23 PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM AM AM, A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise without filters in place and permission from the "� Owner. . AM B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all """ construction dirt, dust, etc. before the units are turned on, and clean filters ow shall be installed. Aft 3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING Aal" A. All cutting, patching and drilling shall be by the General Contractor. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly supported throughout. Provision for expansion and "" contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops. All pipe shall be 46 cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs removed. AN" B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch *l connections or reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of Alk tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting. "" C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases, or above hung ceilings. D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other piping, ducts, .W, and equipment of other trades. Aw E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit 4W future replacement, removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible AM HVAC 235500-70 "` Im AM Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA equal to the maximum weight and dimensions of the duct for Aft which bracing details are selected. 6. Walls, including gypsum board non bearing partitions, which have ducts running through them may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide channel framing around ducts and solid blocking between the duct and frame. P. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the schedules in paragraph S of this Specification. Q. Seismic Restraint Exclusions: 1 . Piping: a. All piping less than 2-1 /2 in. in diameter except those listed below. b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D. C. All piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 1 -1 /4 in. 1.D. " d. All clevis or trapeze supported pported piping suspended from Aft hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than the 12 in. in length from the structure to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze. "* e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in diameter and smaller. 2. Ductwork: dk a. Rectangular, square or oval ducts less than 6 sq. ft. in cross sectional area. b. Round duct less than 28 in. in diameter. C. Duct supported by hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than 12 in. in length from the structure to the structural connection of the duct work. �. R. Suspended Equipment: 1 . VAV boxes and fan powered equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. and rigidly connected to the supply side of the duct system and supported with a minimum of 4 hanger rods. S. Schedules: Vibration Isolation and / or " ` Seismic Restraint Equipment Schedule Specification Static Aft HVAC 235500-69 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA AW AM 7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before applying restraints in a manner similar to " clevis supports. ,•W 8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. AW 9. Cast-iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined with a four band shield and clamp assembly in Zones 213, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections 3.02.C.2 and 3. A For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced spacings of 112 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 '" and 3. A N. Vibration Isolation of Ductwork: 1 . All discharge runs for a distance of 50' from the connected AM, equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means of Specification 10 hangers or Specification 5 floor isolators. Spring deflection shall be a minimum 0.75 in. 2. All duct runs having air velocity of 1000 fpm or more shall be isolated from the building structure by Specification 11 hangers or 5 floor supports. Spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. A O. Seismic Restraint of Ductwork: 1 . Seismically restrain all duct work with Specification 12 or 13 restraints as listed below: Ak a. Restrain rectangular ducts with cross sectional area of 6 sq. am ft. or larger. low b. Restrain round ducts with diameters of 28 in. or larger. C. Restrain flat oval ducts the same way as rectangular ducts of the same nominal size. 2. Transverse restraints shall occur at 30' intervals or at both ends of the duct run if less than the specified interval. Transverse Aft restraints shall be installed at each duct turn and at each end of a duct run. 3. Longitudinal restraints shall occur at 60' intervals with at least one restraint per duct run. Transverse restraints for one duct section .W connected perpendicular to it if the restraints are installed within 4' of the intersection of the ducts and if the restraints are sized for the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA duct construction standards. 4. The ductwork must be reinforced at the restraint locations. .. Reinforcement shall consist of an additional angle on top of the ductwork that is attached to the support hanger rods. Ductwork is AW to be attached to both upper angle and lower trapeze. 'Ok 5. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame so that the combined weights and dimensions of the ducts are less than or "' HVAC 235500-68 AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA Am 2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification '' 10 hangers or supported by Specification 5 mountings, ft anchored with Specification 25 anchors, and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations Ak where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to ± 25% of the initial load. Submittals must include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final Ok changes and seismic loads. Submittal data shall include 'AM certification that the riser system has been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed Am design. Am M. Seismic Restraint of Piping: 1 . Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use Specification 12 cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated piping. ,r. �•• a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and �., compressed air piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger. b. Piping located in Mechanical Rooms, mechanical equipment (fan) rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that are 1 -1 /4" I.D. and larger. C. All other piping 2-1 /2" diameter and larger. 4. 2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is As required to limit anchorage loads. Ak 3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to Ak limit anchorage loads. 4 4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and ,k anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. �w 5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20 ft. maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40 ft. .wk maximum spacing. 6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within allowable limits at longer distances. ..R '"* HVAC 235500-67 AW AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA A 13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to AM accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. Aw 14. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be Specification type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted equipment. 15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project. 16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe sizes exceed 24 in. or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities. ..� 17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals. 18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive displacement which results from high air throughst in relation to the equipment weight. Horizontal throughst restraint shall be Specification type 28 (see selection guide). AM. 19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support ,t structure as possible. Ak L. Vibration Isolation of Piping: Ak 1 . Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the main lines near the mechanical equipment shall be as AW described in Specification 1 1 . Specification 1 1 hangers must AM also be used in all transverse braced isolated locations. Brace hanger rods with SRC clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other locations throughout the "lk building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification 6. Heat exchangers AM and expansion tanks are considered part of the piping run. , The first three (3) isolators from the isolated equipment will have the same static deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. If piping is .M connected to equipment located in basements and hangs A from ceilings under occupied spaces the first three hangers shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and Im including 3 in., 1-1 /2 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6 in., and 2-1 /2 in. deflection thereafter. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical equipment install Specification 23 flexible piping connection or Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is not suitable for the service. `w HVAC 235500-66 AO IM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College !W Northampton, MA 2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or misalignment. 3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and °** vibration control system herein specified. 4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. 5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. 6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the architects/engineers attention prior to installation. �► Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies low between the Specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior �., to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. A& 8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations which are deemed defective in workmanship and materials at the `M Contractor's expense. 9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from: a. Flanges of structural beams. b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction. C. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. 10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit. 11 . Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non- , . isolated systems. Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only. 12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. Ak 4W HVAC 235500-65 Am k Aft ^1 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AM Smith College Northampton, MA A% AM 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced AW for equal resistance in any direction. All-directional anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Wk 25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1 /2 in. thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height of the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical .w motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of ± 1 -5/8 in. AM motion, or to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall , be Type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4 in. thick neoprene sponge bonded to the inner AW faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to AM eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it Alk, integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 AM dig. F., 10 lb. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the AW sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. " 27. The horizontal throughst restraint shall consist of a spring . element in series with a neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be *' designed so it can be preset for throughst at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1 /4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one (1) rod and angle brackets for attachment �* to both the equipment and the duct work or the equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of throughst and symmetrical on either side of the AW unit. Horizontal throughst restraints shall be Type WBI/WBD Ak as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. AW K. Execution - General: Aw ..0, 1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers written low instruction and all certified submittal data. ,.. AW Ak HVAC 235500-64 .f,. low Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College a k Northampton, MA Aft retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 4W 250 psi up to 190° F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 250° F. 16 in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190° F and 135 psi at 250° F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/l . All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the above Specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion joints. Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the Oft pressure requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have 1 /2 in. thick Neoprene washer bushings M large enough in area to take the throughst at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall be ""' installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in "^ vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off Aft valves. Expansion joints shall be SAFEFLEX SFDEj, SFEj, SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated: Flanged Male Nipples 3x14 10x26 1 /2x9 1 -1 /2x13 4x 1512x28 3/4x10 2x14 5 x 1914 x 30 1 x 11 2-1 /2 x 18 6x2016x32 1 /4x12 Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut- off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. ,■, 24. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1 /2 in. thick ""* HVAC 235500-63 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA *""+ ,w. Bases shall be a minimum of 1 /12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6in. The base depth need not low exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 112 in. bars welded in place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a layer 1 -1 /2 in. above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets shall '" be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1 in. .� clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Ak 21 . Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on Ak spring isolation curbs. The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and removable A steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently resist I" wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be a minimum of 1 /4 in. thick. Steel springs Aft shall be laterally stable and rest on 1 /4 in. thick neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs AW provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs „b� waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs Am waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. „W_ All spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall have anchorage pre-approval AM "R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Curb shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead ,. . wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. to 24 in. may 4k be single sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1-1 /2 in. may have Aw threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable HVAC 235500-62 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Pre- approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z-1225 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock absorbent rubber 4W materials compounded to bridge bearing Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be manufactured with air gap between hard and resilient material of nor less than 1 /8 in. nor more than 4W 1 /4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be equal or greater than the load assigned to Aft the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the load deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an AM anchorage pre-approval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State ,k of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubbers shall be series Z-1011 as 4W manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Ak 18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full A diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety 4* shoulder which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud edge anchors shall be Type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the w anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from 4W full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill- in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large " enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows. '"� HVAC 235500-61 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a "" scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger AM showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide all- directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize .w two (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. "� Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and ** arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid , brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly ..� shall have anchorage pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type AM SSB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Am 14. Steel angles, sized to pre-vent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile 'f" iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Aft Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint " locations. They shall be special purpose performed channels Aft deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Pre- approval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California. `'" Clevis cross brace shall be Type CCB as manufactured by ,.t Mason Industries, Inc. 16. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking 'a" steel members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1 /4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1 /8 in. HVAC 235500-60 low Ak AOK Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 '"" Smith College oft Northampton, MA horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either w, the building control air or a supplementary air supply and AM equipped with three (3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1 /8in. Submittals shall include natural 04 frequency, load, and damping tests performed by an ,W independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Ok Industries, Inc. 9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have a MT air spring �► as described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 .2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1 /4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and ,M a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 300 arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 300 capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 11 . Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be pre- AM compressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be Aft designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after Ak *W HVAC 235500-59 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College low Northampton, MA A& over the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally. A wft steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Imp 4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Spring isolators shall be free standing, laterally stable .w without any housing, and complete with a molded neoprene Aft cup or 1 /4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring ,..� diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. AW 6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as • described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 /2 in. shall be maintained around «.► restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so A*W as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings Im will be bolted or welded in position there must be an internal ,f„ isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic Ak forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. „h Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile ... iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum if 1 /4 in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall ,, have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified AW HVAC 235500-58 loft .Ak dM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2 �► SBCCI ►, I. Product Intent: 1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the specifying ..w, engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section D. 2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the ak discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than Ak 1 /8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater AM than 1 /4 in. J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints: 1 . Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 AWA in. square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 4ft gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre- approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting 4M structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing 0„ cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve .A prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass .w HVAC 235500-57 Aft AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College A Northampton, MA a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad to attachment to the structure details and design shall ,m, be prepares by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings. "� b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with Im restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum ,� edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of '~° full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors •M are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized ,W to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment. Aft 4W 2. Supplementary Support Steel: low a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel 4M for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified. 3. Attachments: , a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, A * double-sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with 1410, the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations. H. Seismic Force Levels 1 . The following force levels will be used on this project. Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E. , Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For Code for all pipes, Duct for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety "`' & Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either Ak Equipment Equipment Rigidity or Flexibility Mounted low Zon Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. e Aft UBC HVAC 235500-56 4OW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College .► Northampton, MA submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including the combining of tensile and shear loadings) to support seismic restraint designs must be 04 stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design .� experience and licensed in the state of the job location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 450 to the weakest mode. (3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads, and capacity of materials �* utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment, and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. E. Code and Standards Requirements: 1 . Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced code: a. Massachusetts State Building Code. b. BOCA National Mechanical Code. C. NFPA 90A. F. Manufacturer's Responsibility: AWN, 1 . Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities: a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. ,�► b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified. C. Provide calculations and materials if required for '^ restraint of un-isolated equipment. d. Provide installation instructions, drawings, and trained field supervision to insure proper installation w and performance. G. Related Work: 1 . Housekeeping Pads: Oft HVAC 235500-55 .ru. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA A* A* 1 . The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows: AW AM a. Descriptive Data: AM (1) Catalog cuts or data sheets . on vibration Am isolators and specific restraints detailing compliance with the Specification. (2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration �. isolators and seismic restraints by referencing .� numbered descriptive Drawings. b. Shop Drawings: Aft (1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. A. (2) Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. (3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all A attachment and support points. (4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints "`� and anchors; include number, size, and O* locations for each piece of equipment. ,w C. Seismic Certification and Analysis: oft Aft (1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least , five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location. Ak (2) All restraining devices shall have a pre- ^06 approval number from California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency ""� showing maximum restraint ratings. Pre- Aw approvals based on independent testing are A preferred to approvals based on calculations. Where pre-approved devices are not available, Awk Idw HVAC 235500-54 .M 4W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 4M Smith College +k Northampton, MA oft Cabinet Heaters Piping Chillers Pumps (all types) W Compressors Rooftop Units Comp. Room Units Tanks (all types) Condensers C. Definitions: 1 . Life Safety Systems a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump !k control panels, service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including all generators, transfer switches, transformers, and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems. C. All medical and life support systems. d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc. e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the ,�. equipment schedule. 2. Positive Attachment: a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill-in wedge anchor, a double-sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other equipment are not acceptable Ak on this project as seismic anchor points. 3. Transverse Bracing: a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct, or conduit. 4. Longitudinal Bracing: dw, a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe, duct, or conduit. D. Manufacturer's Data: HVAC 235500-53 4M Aft Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the equipment schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on AW vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. Aft 2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. w%% 3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all AW mechanical building system components in place during a seismic ,ft event. 4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component manufacturer's, and building construction AM standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most stringent shall apply. 5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements). ..� 6. The Contractor shall correct any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements in an approved manner. '` 7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic .► force levels as detailed in Section H. B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: "' 1 . Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and equipment. 2. Equipment isolation bases. " 3. Flexible piping connections. low,, 4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. 5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated Ak equipment. A% 6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads. 8. All mechanical systems: Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification). , AC Units Condensing Units Air Distrib. Boxes Ductwork Aft Air Handling Units Unit Heaters Air Separators Fans (all types) AW Boilers Heat Exchangers HVAC 235500-52 " Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College "* Northampton, MA 4ft B. The headers shall include all necessary inlet, outlet and vent connections as required. Standard connection sizes are %z" NPT tapered thread for supply and return piping, and 1 /8" for the vent connection. Internal baffling is provided where required for proper water flow. C. The radiant heating panels shall be available in lengths from 2'-0" to 29'- 6" in two inch even increments without the need for splicing. The panel radiation shall be capable of being mounted to typical stud wall construction without additional blocking or strapping. Appropriate wall mounting brackets or optional pedestals shall be provided with the radiation as required. D. Pressure ratings for the radiation, as indicated in the HVAC schedules, w shall be as follows: 1 . STANDARD: Working pressure-56 PSI maximum, Test Pressure-74 PSI maximum 2. MEDIUM: Working pressure-85 PSI maximum, Test Pressure-1 10 PSI maximum + ► 3. HIGH: Working pressure-128 PSI maximum, Test Pressure 184 PSI maximum E. Panel radiation expansion shall not exceed 1 /64" per foot of radiation at 215°F. The installer shall provide adequate expansion compensation for each radiator. F. The panel radiation shall be cleaned and phosphatized in preparation for the powder coat finish. The radiation is then finish painted with a gloss powder coat finish, for a total paint thickness of 2-3 mils (0.002" - 0.003"). The color shall be selected from Runtal's standard color table. G. The radiator manufacturer shall provide a sample of the radiator with + . grille for evaluation by the Architect/Engineer. H. Ribbed pipe cover trims, finished to match the radiators shall be provided with the radiation as required to suit construction. 4ft, I. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flat tube �. panel radiation as manufactured by Runtal North America, Inc. Radson shall be considered an approved equal. 2.27 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL A. Intent: A Aft Jw, HVAC 235500-51 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College `M Northampton, MA b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simultaneously with mechanical system balancing. low. C. Review of system with Engineer. AW d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction, and Am acceptance. e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have Ak been in full operation, review problems with Owner, recheck ,ow all adjustments, and recalibrate as required. AW 4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional AW manual covering the function and operation of all control and am management system components on the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be Im furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the 'Aft total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be delivered to the Mk Owner on AutoCAD disks. ,k 5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of 001° Operation have been attained, all temperatures are maintained within .10k specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits. ""�" ). Service and Guarantee: 1 . The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be AM guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material for a 1 period of 12 months from date of acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service, adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period. A 2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest revisions of software offered by the Contractor AK that applies to this Project. 2.26 PANEL RADIATORS Aft A. General: Provide steel panel radiator elements of lengths, locations, A*,, capacities and style as indicated in the drawings and schedules. The wall hung heating panel radiation shall be of one-piece all-welded steel "" construction, consisting of flattened water tubes welded to headers at OW each end. The radiator shall include an integral heavy gauge (0.09" "" minimum) all-welded perforated top grille (for curved radiators the grille is omitted). RF models to have steel corrugated fins welded to the rear Am side of the water tubes to increase the convective output of the unit. „A, There shall be no less than 32 fins per foot. Fins shall start within 1" of the headers, and shall be spot-welded three times per tube. Aft HVAC 235500-50 �* aw. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA d. Typical Points List: 10. Space Temperature Al A 1 1 . Hot Water Valve Command DO 12. Fan S/S DO ww 7. STEAM CONDENSATE PUMP CP-1 CONTROL a. Unit pumps shall cycle via factory packaged controls (float ** actuated) to return condensate from receiver back to the building condensate return system. If the lead pump fails, the lag pump shall immediately start, and alarm to the FMS. The lead/lag control is by factory packaged controls. b. BAS shall monitor pump status via current transformers and alarm for pump failure. c. Sump level will be monitored by DDC system for high level *�► alarm. d. Points list: 13. Lead Pump Status DI 14. Lag Pump Status DI 15. High Condensate Level Alarm DI 8. PROTECTIVE COVERS: 1 . Furnish and install concealed sensors located in the following areas: a. Toilets, Halls, Corridors, Lobbies, Entries. "! I. Adjustment and Calibration: 1 . On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run, Ak' and adjusted. 2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact, under „ proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation. 3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps: �. a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings. HVAC 235500-49 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 19. Filter Differential Pressure (3) DI (2) 20. Enthalpy Wheel Intake Temp. Al 21 . Enthalpy Wheel Discharge Temp. Al 4. EXHAUST FAN EF-1 CONTROL a. Mechanical Room exhaust fan EF-2 shall be controlled by a space temperature sensor. When the respective space temperature rises above setpoint (80 degrees F, adjustable) the exhaust fan shall be commanded to start. Once AW commanded to start the exhaust damper and intake damper Ak shall be energized open. Once both dampers are proven open via end switches the exhaust fan shall be allowed to Oft start. An amperage switch installed on the exhaust fan IM, motor shall indicate fan status. If the DDC controller is calling for the fan to be on and the amp switch is off, a fan Aft failure alarm shall be sent to the BAS. Ab b. Typical Points List: Ak 1 . EF-2 S/S DO ..t 2. EF-2 Status DI � 3. Exhaust Damper Command DO 4. Exhaust Damper Position DI '"" 5. Outdoor Air Intake Damper Command DO Ak 6. Outdoor Air Intake Damper Position DI .b, 7. Space Temperature Al A^ 5. TYPICAL PANEL RADIATOR (PR) CONTROL a. The space DDC temperature sensor shall cycle the 2- position hot water control valve to maintain space . temperature setpoint (70 degrees F, adjustable). b. Space temperature shall be capable of being set-back during the unoccupied period. C. Typical Points List: 8. Space Temperature Al 9. Hot Water Valve Command DO AW 6. TYPICAL HOT WATER UNIT HEATER (UH) CONTROL All a. The space DDC temperature sensor shall cycle the 2- position hot water control valve to maintain space temperature setpoint (70 degrees F, adjustable). b. A strap-on aquastat shall prevent the fan from operating if there is no hot water available. C. Space temperature shall be capable of being set-back during the unoccupied period. AW HVAC 235500-48 AM ..k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ok Northampton, MA 1 . Smoke detectors are located in the supply and exhaust/return duct of the air handling unit as indicated on the plans. 2. A hardwire auxilliary contact on the fire alarm control panel, upon detection of smoke in the airstream and/or upon a signal from fire alarm in the event of alarm within the zone, stops air handling unit supply and exhaust fans and closes the outside air and ►, exhaust dampers. All shutdowns shall be hardwired interlocked and shall not rely on control system programming. j. BAS shall monitor the intake damper open and closed positions through damper end switches. In the event the damper closes in a non-alarm condition, stop supply fan, close outdoor air damper and initiate an alarm at the BAS. k. Filter bank differential pressure: ,f, 1 . The AHU is equipped with three filter banks: 30% supply pre-filters, 90% supply bag final-filters and 30% exhaust pre-filters. A pressure differential indicating sensor across the filter banks shall indicate an alarm at the BAS for high or low pressure conditions. Provide independent transmitters for each individual filter bank. I. Points List: 1 . Supply Fan S/S DO 2. Supply Fan Status DI 3. Exhaust Fan S/S DO 4. Exhaust Fan Status DI 5. Outside Air Damper Command DO 6. Outside Air Damper Position DI 7. Exhaust Damper Command DO 8. Exhaust Damper Position DI 9. Enthalpy Wheel Drive Motor S/S DO 10. Enthalpy Wheel Drive Motor Status DI 11. Discharge Air Temperature Al 12. Outside Air Temperature (common) Al 13. Outdoor Air Relative Humidity (common) Al 14. Hot Water Valve Command AO 15. Freeze Protection Pump S/S DO 16. Freeze Protection Pump Status DI 17. Low Temperature Thermostat Shutdown DI 18. Fire Alarm Shutdown (as required) DI (as required) Ak A* HVAC 235500-47 Am 4M IN 11 1 Aft Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA commanded to start. Fans are locked out until manually reset through the BAS. Om .* f. System volume control: law 1 . System operates at a constant speed/constant *m volume. Am 2. Fan speed for the AHU supply fan shall track the speed of exhaust fan EF-1 W. Minimum and maximum VFD speed settings for the exhaust fan and AHU shall AM be determined in the field by the BAS Contractor and balancing Contractor. AM g. AHU discharge air temperature is controlled through the BAS A% with temperature sensors. h. Heating coil temperature control: •1• 1 . The air handling unit has a hot water heating coil with .. a dedicated freeze pump. Coil discharge air Am. temperature controller, with averaging type sensor, modulates the fail-open 2-way modulating control valve to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint (70 degrees F summer, adjustable/65 degrees F Aft winter, adjustable). 2. Hot water coil freeze protection pump control: a. During the occupied mode, enable freeze Aft protection pump whenever the outdoor air temperature is below 45 degree F (adjustable). b. During the unoccupied mode, enable freeze protection pump whenever the outdoor air AM temperature is below 40 degrees F (adjustable). C. Freeze protection pump status: BAS shall monitor freeze protection pump status via A differential pressure switch. If the pump fails, generate a critical alarm at the BAS and fully open the water coil 2-way control valve. AW 3. Temperature low limit switch at entering side of supply fan de-energizes unit supply and exhaust .M fans, closes outside air and exhaust dampers, de- ,m energized the enthalpy wheel drive motor opens 100% the water control valve to coil when air temperature AM falls below 38 degrees F (adjustable). A critical alarm *W shall be indicated at the BAS. i. Smoke control: Abk' HVAC 235500-46 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4% 3. TYPICAL ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR (ERV) CONTROL a. Energy recovery ventilator is a modular air handling unit with an enthalpy heat recovery wheel. The system is designed as heating/cooling, single duct, constant air volume, constant discharge air temperature system utilizing 100% outside air. The air handling unit includes a supply fan, exhaust fan and enthalpy wheel motor/drive assembly. w, b. The unit shall operate either in the Occupied Mode or Unoccupied Mode. C. Occupied Mode: 1 . During the occupied mode of operation the unit's supply fan, exhaust fan and enthalpy wheel drive motor shall run to provide conditioned air to the occupied zone. 2. Discharge air temperature control shall come under control of the BAS. •f, d. Unoccupied Mode: The Unoccupied Mode shall commence at the pre- programmed unoccupied start time. During the unoccupied mode, the unit's supply fan, return fan and enthalpy wheel drive motor shall de-energize and 4w the outdoor air and exhaust air dampers shall close. e. Unit operation: 1 . The BAS shall index the unit between modes of operation (occupied/unoccupied) by a time schedule. 2. Unit start/stop shall also be manually selectable through the BAS. 3. Once the unit is indexed into the occupied mode of operation the supply fan and exhaust fan shall be enabled and the enthalpy wheel drive motor shall energize. Air handling unit an outside air damper interlocked with the supply fan and an exhaust damper interlocked with the exhaust fan. Before either fan is allowed to start both damper shall be fully open as proven by end switches. Whenever the fans stop all dampers shall close. 4. If a fan failure occurs at the supply fan, exhaust fan or enthalpy wheel drive motor, as detected by a current switches at each motor, the fans are stopped, outside air and exhaust air dampers shall close, and as alarm is generated at the BAS. This interlock is disabled for 30 seconds (adjustable) after the unit is initially Oft HVAC 235500-45 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA A 1 . System volume control is accomplished by a VFD. Rate of change of fan speed is adjustable through the BAS. , 2. Exhaust fan shall modulate between its minimum and maximum speed in response to the three (3) space humidistats, one per floor. At initial start-up the fan Ask shall index to the minimum speed position. If any of the space relative humidity sensors rises above 50% RH the exhaust fan speed shall be increased on a time A proportioned basis until the respective space relative A*% humidity falls below setpoint. Once all space relative humidity settings fall below setpoint the exhaust fan ' speed shall be decreased on a time proportioned AM basis until it reached its minimum speed setting. , 3. Minimum and maximum VFD speed settings for the exhaust fan shall be determined in the field by the BAS Contractor and balancing Contractor. ,.. 4. High limit pressure control: 1 . The exhaust air suction plenum has a static „,ft pressure sensor/transmitter. If the static pressure falls to -1 .25" w.c. (adjustable), a critical alarm is indicated at the BAS, the fan .�. speed control is overridden, and the VFD's is modulated to maintain an average suction pressure of 0.75" w.c. (adjustable). A* 2. Alarm indication and override control remain in force until manually reset through the BAS. 3. The BAS continuously monitors and compares Ak pressure signals from each pressure sensor/transmitter. Whenever the output from any pressure sensor/transmitter drops below 10% or rises above 90% of calibrated range, that pressure sensor/transmitter signal is „M locked out of control sequence and an alarm is indicated at the BAS. ' e. Points List: Ak 1 . Exhaust Fan S/S DO A' 2. Exhaust Fan Status DI *m 3. Exhaust Fan VFD Command AO am 4. Exhaust Fan VFD Fault DI 5. Exhaust Air Damper Command AO AM 6. Exhaust Air Damper Position DI 7. Space Air Relative Humidity (3) AI (3) 8. Exhaust Suction Static Pressure Al HVAC 235500-44 low Aft Am 4W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 4M Smith College Northampton, MA 16. HX-1 - 2/3 Steam Valve AO a ► 2. HAVEN TOILET EXHAUST FAN EVR-1 CONTROL a. Toilet exhaust fan on EVR-1 is a centrifugal exhaust fan controlled by a VFD and space humidistats. b. Unit operation: 1 . Exhaust fan shall be indexed on by a time schedule from the BAS. 2. Fan start/stop shall also be manually selectable through the BAS. 3. If a fan failure occurs at the supply fan, as detected by a current switch on the exhaust fan, the failed fan is stopped, exhaust air damper shall close, and an alarm W* is generated at the BAS. This interlock is disabled for 30 seconds (adjustable) after the fan is initially commanded to start. Fan is locked out until manually reset through the BAS. 4. Exhaust fan has an exhaust air damper interlocked oft with the exhaust fan. Before the exhaust fan is allowed to start the damper shall be fully open as *"* proven by end switches. Whenever the fans stop all dampers shall close. C. Exhaust fan control: 4K 1 . If the dampers open position switch has not been energized within 20 seconds (adjustable) of the fan start signal, the fan is stopped, exhaust damper is closed and an alarm is indicated at the BAS. 2. Whenever the exhaust fan is signaled to stop, on a failure of the fan speed control signal, on failure of the VFD, or on a failure of a fan, the VFD's ramp down to the minimum pre-programmed speed at the programmed ramp rate and stops. 3. The VFD starts at minimum speed setting and ramps to the control point. The VFD is controlled off a single, common control point. Unless otherwise noted, the VFD's ramp up and down full scale over 15 seconds. VFD's do not operate at less than 6 hz „ft (adjustable). The VFD is not allowed to operate if its disconnect is open. On a failure of the VFD, as defined by an output from the VFD, an alarm is „ generated at the BAS, and the fan is disabled. d. System volume control: HVAC 235500-43 Aft, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College "" Northampton, MA Akkl switches on each pump) shall be monitored at the BAS. w. Upon a failure of the lead pump the BAS shall start the "M standby pump, stop the lead pump and alarm at the BAS. AW The standby pump shall come under control of the DDC controller differential pressure sequence. The hot water "" pumps shall operate on a run/standby arrangement and A shall be duty-cycled based on equal run time. ,W C. The DDC controller shall reset the hot water supply temperature inversely proportional to outside air '" temperature, as follows: ,m 1 . Outdoor air temperature 0°F (adjustable): hot water .w supply temperature: 160° F (adjustable). 4M 2. Outdoor air temperature 60°F (adjustable): How water supply temperature 120°F (adjustable). d. The heat exchanger has 1 /3-2/3 steam valve control. The steam heat exchanger 1 /3 and 2/3 steam control valves shall be modulated as follows to maintain the required hot AM water supply temperature to the system: Am oft 1 . The 1 /3 control valve shall modulate open as required to maintain hot water supply temperature. When the 1 /3 A& valve reaches full open position, and there is a call for Ak additional heating capacity, the 2/3 valve shall modulate open and the 1 /3 valve shall close fully. The 2/3 valve ' ` shall modulate as required. If additional heating capacity AVW is required, the 1 /3 valve shall again modulate open with AW the 2/3 valve remaining fully open. 2. As the demand for heating capacity decreases, the valves Mk shall modulate and be staged in reverse sequence. AM e. Points list: 1 . Hot Water Pump P-1 S/S DO 2. Hot Water Pump P-1 Status DI 3. Hot Water Pump P-1 VFD Command AO 4. Hot Water Pump P-1 VFD Fault DI 5. Hot Water Pump P-2 DO 6. Hot Water Pump P-2 Status DI 7. Hot Water Pump P-2 VFD Command AO 8. Hot Water Pump P-2 VFD Fault DI 9. System Differential Pressure Al 10. Hot Water Flow DI 11 . Hot Water Pump Selector DO "P 12. Hot Water Supply Temperature Al ., 13. Hot Water Return Temperature Al �. 14. Outside Air Temperature Al 15. HX-1 -1 /3 Steam Valve AO '"k Alk HVAC 235500-42 AM 1^ AM 4W Alk Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 "' Smith College Northampton, MA of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided. Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all 1/0 points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic representation. 2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program controller as defined in the real time operating system. 3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode, respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous functional mode. 4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and control all functions and sequences within r► the system. H. Sequences of Operation: Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific control sequence for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each specific control sequence will require appropriate 1/0 points, which are scheduled on the Drawings. 1 . HAVEN HEATING HOT WATER HEAT EXCHANGER HX-1 AND HOT WATER PUMPS P-1 AND P-2 CONTROL. a. The heating hot water system shall be enabled whenever the outdoor air temperature falls below 60 degrees F (adjustable). The lead hot water pump shall energize and come under control of its VFD. b. The heating hot water system differential pressure shall be 4 monitored at the end of the longest run. The DDC controller shall modulate the pump VFD to maintain a differential pressure of 12 psig (adjustable) at the end of the longest run. Differential pressure setting and sensor location shall be coordinated in the field with the Balancing Contractor and BAS Contractor. Hot water supply and return water temperature as well as pump status (via differential pressure ow HVAC 235500-41 Ak Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA low Aft j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, Model A70HA-1 C. A k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way A valves shall be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber Colman with Belimo Actuators, Model Am AF24-S. AW I. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge AW and jam seals and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV10-1 8 or 2G JSA shaft extensions where required. 5. Local Site Communication Network a. The modules shall communicate within their respective ,,,,, network with a token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS-485 standard, including a "' minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a minimum of Aft 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring required AW for the local site network. Aft F. Software AM 1 . The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the functions required by this specification. Software AW shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum, include: .W a. Complete database entry. b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of operation indicated. C. Graphics of each system as shown on the 1/0 Summary Tables. d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non- critical alarms. e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated. ,M G. Systems Software Aft A, 1 . The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different , colors, the following system information: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in AM relation to local landmarks. Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change. Locations "'t A* HVAC 235500-40 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Oft Smith College +!w� Northampton, MA 2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design. Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap- 4M acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall be manufactured byJohnson Controls, Model P-74FA-5-C. C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 1% of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be ..� adjustable over the operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific electrical application. d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of +0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor. Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without requiring the changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have dry Aft contact pulse accumulation. e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap- acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to Veris Industries, Inc. Hawkeye 735. f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of +5% over a range of 20% to 95% RH, Visala Mod. HMW-40U. g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable. '^ h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices. i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The 'f" ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20°F-140 0F. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays. "* HVAC 235500-39 AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Am Northampton, MA ., . i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating .aw at 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically "` isolated. Im 3. Terminal Control Devices - T-Line a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC AW maximum, 3 amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally closed, and either dry contact or Im bussed. AW b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0- 1 OOK Ohm input impedance. C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and an occupancy LED indicator. 4. Instrumentation and Control a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have A accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required for the AM application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1% of AM the temperature range of their intended use. lift 1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the •• averaging type and have an accuracy of +10F. Kele Ak Precon Model ST-FZ. 2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of -52°F to 152°F and an accuracy of within +10F in AW this temperature range. Kele Precon Model ST-O. 3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of + 0.25°F in the range of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA- 1OK-2-RSO-RLC Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator. " 4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of ,,ft +0.25°F in their range of application. 5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy "' of + 0.75°F over the range of their application. b. Pressure Instruments 1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors .� shall have a 4-20 MA output proportional signal with low provisions for field checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the AW device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR-272- 2-XX-B-1 -2-2. HVAC 235500-38 *b A AW 4M Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects Am require more than 100 controllers. 4W h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up to 100 controllers (total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet). Aw i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to Central Site Workstations, portable computers, or modems. j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones. 2. Terminal Control Modules -T-Line a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling units, fan coil units, exhaust fans, unit ventilators, etc. b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop computer. C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T- Line controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains w., the space temperature until communication with the TNI is restored. d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all application programs for each T-Line shall ,�. be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory within the TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years. e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary type output. 4M f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local override switch, with setpoint adjustment switch. g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent VAV operation. h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of communication, power, and all outputs. "" HVAC 235500-37 Ak Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Am Northampton, MA Ak 4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being Aw controlled by the ATC Contractor. 4W 5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels. 6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose. 7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Aft Contractor. Power wiring shall be defined as follows: AM a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt (except for power to the temperature control panels). Ab b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters, and electric motors. AM C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required. .. d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air compressor. ► e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors. f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor motor starters to compressor motor. Ah A E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system performance. AM 1 . Global Network Controller - LANgate Aft a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based 'W communications device which acts as a gateway between the oft. System Control Module Network (CMnet) and the Global Network (Lgnet). b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which allow all control modules to communicate , with equal authority. C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any Aft combination of up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit AW controllers, and/or Control Modules. „m d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the various Cmnets which may be installed AW throughout a building. Am e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of "� which may be implemented over fiber optic, twisted pair, or Ak coaxial cable. ,k f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers. .R HVAC 235500-36 AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work. 2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must ww be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion schedule. 3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact ., installation. The system will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of"as-built" Drawings, and one (1) CADD disk of these Drawings. 4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that include: a. Description of all points. b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment for each function. C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment. d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure 5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the submittal process, during the w installation, start-up or acceptance portion of the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams herein required by this specification. 6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments (fast motion) or decreased increments (slow motion). D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows: 1 . All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective devices. *�* 2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system 4^ components, such as solenoid air valve. 3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field Ak wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices. HVAC 235500-35 AM AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project. 4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application software, system peripherals, and field hardware. S. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project, shall perform all operating functions as Aw detailed in this Specification. 6. Provide the following system hardware: a. Central Site(s) and Control Modules b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary AM Tables. d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing. '"w e. All modems and accessories. ,A, 7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The .M database required for implementation of these specifications shall be provided by the Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, AM calibration variables, graphics, reports and point summaries. 8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of Ak the points and perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of this specification. .� 9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: , a. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) b. National Electric Code (NEC) C. National Fire Code d. Uniform Building Code e. Uniform Mechanical Code f. Uniform Plumbing Code 4W g. UL916 h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive AM shall apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. , C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance 1 . Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and A"` materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical .�► literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other "W IM HVAC 235500-34 ** Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ►. Northampton, MA 2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing Automated Logic (ALC) WebCTRL BAS operating platform. All system points will be networked using Lan Gate Routers (LGR) tied into the Camps Ethernet, sharing all new existing points in real time date. It will be the Contactors responsibility to develop site specific operating parameters, building name, general area maps, floor 4W plans, mechanical system graphics, and thermal graphs, all to be displayed graphically at the central site (CS) via the existing software `"' programs + . 3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices manufactured by Barber Colman. 4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, A.s. relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a Ak complete system of control wiring for integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and Ak properly integrated to the control system. 5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection shall be extended from the existing '" system. 6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 - Electrical Work. Wiring shall be in �w metal raceways where required by prevailing codes. 7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid" nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to be marked with stamped tape. B. Scope of Work 1 . All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Ak Technology, Inc. of Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Ak Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, pneumatic tubing, computing equipment and software as Ak defined in this specification. 3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components, except site �► HVAC 235500-33 -M- AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College A Northampton, MA AM pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage the coil shall be tested at 250 prig air pressure under water. Coils shall be of the steam distributing, "non-freeze" type. F. All units furnished with DX coils shall have drain pans pitched for even flow of condensate with side drain connections on both sides of unit. Provide ^ copper tube "P" trap with cleanout in condensate drain piping, "P" traps shall be equal to unit pressure. G. Provide, where noted on schedules, internal face and bypass dampers with low full size coils. AM H. High capacity mixing section shall be furnished with properly located JM1 access doors equipped with handles. Internal slides shall be provided for A* filter racks. Filters shall be removable from either end of Section. AW I. Bag filter and pre-filter sections shall be provided with all units. Each unit shall be furnished with three (3) sets of pre and final filters. ,m ). Airflow Measuring Outside Air Dampers: Provide factory-mounted "" damper in the outdoor air opening to measure airflow. Construct with galvanized steel damper blades, housed in a galvanized steel frame and mechanically fastened to a rotating axle rod. Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at 1 -inch wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg. The AM airflow measurement station shall measure up to 100 percent of total AM outside air and/or return air. The airflow monitoring device shall adjust for temperature variations. The airflow monitoring output shall be a 2-10 vdc signal proportional to velocity. The accuracy of the airflow measurement station shall be +/- 5 percent. AM K. All sections with access doors shall have factory wired convenience AW receptacles and factory wired marine type light fixtures with guard and ,w switch. Im 2.24 ACCESS PANELS Ak A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. AW installed above plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible AN spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL oft (12" x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSC-21 1 "Universal" (12" x 12"). MkI 2.25 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. General Requirements AW 1 . All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Yankee Technology. 4W A HVAC 235500-32 "` AM 4M 4W Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1 /2" and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off. Aft 2.23 AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) * A. Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings, central station draw-through units of the types, sizes, and capacities as scheduled on the Drawings. All units shall be factory-assembled and tested and shall be as manufactured by the Trane Company, York International or McQuay. No substitutions will be allowed. B. Units shall consist of modular fan and coil sections, filter section, internal face and bypass sections where called for, adjustable motor bases for high efficiency, totally enclosed NEMA frame motors, and OSHA approved belt guards. Casing shall be of complete frame with removable panels, modular, flush mounted into the unit framework with properly located •• access panels. Casing shall be double wall insulated with a 1 in. minimum 4w thickness fiberglass insulation with a density of not less than 1 -1 /2 lbs. accordance with NFPA Bulletin No. 90A. Insulation shall be secured to casing with waterproof adhesive and permanent fasteners. All cabinet surfaces shall be galvanized. C. Fans shall be centrifugal type, double inlet, double width. They shall be of the forward curved, low speed type on all sizes. Fan housing shall be 4ft equipped with adjustable cut-off. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested at rated speed after being installed in factory assembled units. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated ball bearings sized to provide minimum average bearing life of 200,000 hours. Lubrication fittings shall be extended to the exterior cabinet. Fan shafts shall be solid, cold finish steel, turned, grout ground, and polished to insure trouble-free operation and tolerances within the recommendations of bearing manufacturers. Fan motors shall be mounted to an adjustable pivot base in optional position external to the unit. Fan V-belt drive shall be of the variable pitch type. Fan belt guard shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer, easily removable, and made of solid steel with tachometer openings. Inlet vanes shall be furnished where so called for on the schedule. D. Coil sections shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with removable panels and shall be arranged for the removal of the coil from either end of the unit. Combination hot water/chiller coils shall consist of 5/8 in. o.d. copper tubing on 1 -1 /2 centers arranged in a staggered pattern with respect to circulation of airflow. They shall be bonded to the tubes by hydraulic expansion of tubes and the coils tested with 300-lbs. pneumatic *�* pressure under water. E. The heating coil shall be of the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper 4W tubes type, assembled in a zinc-coated steel frame. The coil shall be Ak '�'" HVAC 235500-31 Im AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA �* requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. 20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21 ; full-faced for cast-iron A^ flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. Im 21 . Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed. Am 2.21 PACKLES EXPANSION JOINTS low A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping "m systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by AW Installer to suit intended service. Select packless expansion joints to M01 provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors. Am B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure ,,r, systems, 2-ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings Ak for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides �► and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper positioning. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide expansion "° compensators of one of the following: AM Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc. Ak Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Ohl Keflex, Inc. Metraflex Co. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. AM Im D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside ~' guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate. A oft 1 . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment guides of the following: Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Metraflex Co. 2.22 STRAINERS A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be installed on the inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed ends; 2-1 /2" and Aft larger shall have flanged ends. AW B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. I, class. Strainers for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones, Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as AW Alk HVAC 235500-30 Am 4W Awk 4M Am .ft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA may be used in fan room equipment and connection to existing lines. C. Materials 1 . Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, A106 or A120; except comply with ASTM A53 or Al 06 where close coiling or bending is required. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. Class 150 for Schedule 40 P�p� 9 i in , Class 300 for Schedule 80. 3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV. 4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing A"" of the following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. a. Material Group: Group 1 .1 b. End Connections: Buttwelding C. Facings: Raised-face S. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. 6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714. 7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, ►► provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney 'Weldolets" or 'Threadolets", or equal. 8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1 -1 /2" and where pipe size is less a� than 1-1 /2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples). 9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard- drawn temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping. 10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306. 11 . ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280. 12. Wrought-Copper Solder-joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22. 13. Cast-Copper Solder-joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23. 14. Wrought-Copper Solder-joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29. 15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43. "* 16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.15. 17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation Oft requirements. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Mk Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. Ok 18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation Ok requirements. A, 19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation Am A HVAC 235500-29 AM Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA .M AM 7. All hot water, steam, condensate return, condensate drains, refrigerant piping, and make up water piping shall be insulated with Ak Fiberglass pipe insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall Ak have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU in. per Ow sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The Ak insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly ,f together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. All Pex Aft tubing run in walls shall be insulated with %z" Armaflex insulation. Ak AM F. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: Minimum Pipe Insulation Required: 1 . Hot Water/Steam and Condensate Return: '" AM a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1 12 in. b. Runouts 1 in. and less: 1 -1 12 in. C. Runouts 1-1/4 in. to 2 in.: 2 in. d. Runouts 2-1 /2 in. to 4 in.: 2 in. 2.20 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General 1 . Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of AM bidding shall be in force. 2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into "" each and every length of pipe. Ak 3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread oft conforming to ANSI B2.1-1968. 4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance AO with ASME B31 .1 , or ASME B31 .9, as applicable, for shop and project Am site welding of piping work. B. Application "" AM 1 . Hot and Dual Temperature Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size A 2" and smaller threaded, 2-1 /2" and larger welded, or Type "L" copper for hot and dual temperature water. Ak 2. Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40, threaded, cast bronze fittings. 3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class BAgI silver solder. 4. Condensate Drain (from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube Aft with cast or wrought drainage fittings in lieu of copper PVC drains Aw HVAC 235500-28 ''" I Aft A Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA duct insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper 'ok wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width. B. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be insulated in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts. C. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all exposed supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall Aft be insulated with 1 in. thick, 6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Oft Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All edges and "' angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of Ak tackboard of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Aft Duramesh 205, and a heavy finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. Ak D. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. Liner shall be 1 -in. thick, 3-pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with U.L. approved neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed where shown on Drawings. All lined ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless otherwise noted. Aft E. Pipe Insulation 1 . All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire Oft retardant and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings. 2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation. 3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's *f* instructions to maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier. ml� 5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water/chilled water, refrigerant, and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers 'f shall be furnished and pipe insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger. .w. 6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by Gustin-Bacon, Manville, or other approved equal. "" HVAC 235500-27 Aft AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ""° Northampton, MA ..ft AW C. Heat exchanger shall be as manufactured by ITT Bell & Gossett or approved equal. AW AW 2.17 STEAM TRAPS AW A. Furnish and install float and thermostatic steam traps where indicated on Ak the Drawings. ,�,,,, B. The trap shall be of the mechanical lever ball float type having a ductile iron AM body with horizontal inline screwed connections and shall incorporate a balanced pressure thermostatic air vent. Valve mechanism shall be stainless steel and attached to a removable cover for easy maintenance. The cover shall be 180 degrees reversible to permit flow in either direction. AM C. Steam traps shall be as manufactured by Tunstall Associates. No substitutions will be allowed. AM AW 2.18 HANGERS AM A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & AW Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. AW B. For all pipe 2-1 /2" and larger - Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10' intervals. A AW C. For all other suspended piping - Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing ,M 1-1 /4" or less, 10' intervals for piping at 1 -1 /2" and larger. AM D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be AM copper plated or plastic coated. AW E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within V of each horizontal elbow. 4W Vertical runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers low placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. AW F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all ,m piping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation. Im G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp; to be installed immediately below a coupling. „W 2.19 INSULATION A A. All air supply, return, and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be 1-1 /2 in. thick, 1-pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil AM jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with Benjamin Foster No. A 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with staples and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed AM A* HVAC 235500-26 '^ 0M Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College 4* Northampton, MA Aw Unit shall be Domestic Series CC as manufactured by Bell & Gossett or 4w approved equal. 2.15 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES A. Expansion tanks shall be ASME pre-charged diaphragm tanks, stamped 125 psi working pressure. Tanks shall be supplied with a heavy-duty butyl diaphragm, ring base, lifting rings, and an NPT system connection. An air charging valve connection shall be provided to facilitate adjusting pre- *f► charged pressure to meet system conditions. A& B. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting Ak causing entrained air to be separated from the water. To be Spiro Vent "Air Separator", line size, with drain valve and strainer. No substitutions will be allowed. ., C. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size, but in no case shall they be less than 2 in. steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high. Drain tubing shall be extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line are readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return side of each loop of radiation before piping drops down to return main. ° * These vents to be key or screw type equal to Dole or Taco. D. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall be Bell & Gossett, Cash, Taco, or Watts equal to Bell & Gossett No. B-3 Reducing Valve set for approximately 60 psig inlet and 21 psig outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow preventer piped to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe valve and one check valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications. E. Furnish and install all temperature - pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems. All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS. 2.16 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Furnish and install where shown on the Drawings, steam to water, shell and tube U-bend removable tube bundle, steam in shell, water in tube exchangers. The heat exchanger shall include a cast iron bonnet, copper tubes, steel shell and baffles and be ASME stamped. Aft B. HX-1 Haven House - Shall be capable of heating 200 gpm from 140°F. to ww 160°F with 5 Ibs steam and a .0005 fouling factor. «■, oft 4"'' HVAC 235500-25 AM 4". Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Aft Northampton, MA AW level gauge, dial thermometer, (2) pressure gauges for pump discharge, (2) bronze fitted isolation valves between pumps and recover, and (2) lifting eye bolts. „001 A cast iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning bronze screen and large AW, dirt pocket shall be mounted on the receiver. The screen shall be easily removable for cleaning, requiring no additional floor space for servicing. A B. The centrifugal water pumps shall be flange mounted on the receiver. Pumps shall be close coupled vertical design, permanently aligned, bronze fitted and be equipped with stainless steel shaft, enclosed bronze impeller, .. and renewable bronze case ring. Carbon/ceramic mechanical seals shall be rated for 250°F for maximum life. Each pump shall be close coupled to a �*► vertical drip proof motor. Pump capacities, motor HP and RPM, electrical characteristics, and receiver shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. A C. The unit manufacturer shall furnish, mount on the unit, and wire a NEMA 2 • ► control cabinet with drip lip and piano hinged door enclosing the following: , • (2) Combination magnetic starters (each having 3 overload relays) *' with fused disconnect and cover interlock for each motor. • (1) Electrical alternator. • (2) "Auto-Off Hand" selector switches. • (1) Numbered terminal strip. , • (1) Fused control circuit transformer for each motor when the motor voltage exceeds 230 volts. All control cabinet components shall be UL listed or recognized and NEMA AM rated. The control panel assembly shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. """ Each pump control circuit shall be completely independent of the other. The electrical alternator shall change the operating sequence automatically after each cycle. Am Am Simultaneous operation under peak load conditions, and operating of the AM second pump, should the first pump or its control fail, shall be provided by the lag float switch. 4 D. All factory installed wiring shall be numbered for easy identification and the AW numbers shall coincide with those shown on the wiring diagrams. All Im interconnecting wiring between the pump, control panel shall be enclosed AM in liquid tight flexible conduit. Aft The unit shall be factory tested as a complete unit. The pump manufacture AW shall furnish complete elementary and connection wiring diagrams, piping Am diagrams, installation and operation instructions. .ft 4W HVAC 235500-24 .. AW AAW , . Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 """ Smith College emu, Northampton, MA 4k A"` A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to ,,,,,, Ashcroft "Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation damper (Ashcroft #1106B) and a brass lever �w handle gauge cock (Ashcroft #1095). 4k 4% B. Model number, size and range to be as follows: '"'k 1 . Ashcroft - #1018, 3-1 /2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale. 2.12 UNIONS 4M A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they AW shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart k Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping, they w., shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint. °w B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to both faces. C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below I percent of the galvanic ,w current, which would exist with metal to metal contact. 2.13 PIPE SLEEVES A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be �► sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging. w� 2.14 DUPLEX CONDENSATE PUMPS A. Furnish and install according to plans and manufacturer's instructions a duplex condensate unit as shown on the Drawings. The unit shall consist of (1) cast iron receiver, (2) water pumps, (2) float switches and all accessories as hereafter specified. The condensate receiver shall be of close grained cast iron construction and shall be equipped with (2) externally adjustable 2-pole float switches, water HVAC 235500-23 AM, AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Ak AW E. All shut-off valves 2-1 /2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316, steel disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat, designed for AM bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two position Alk operation. AM F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following AM valves when used as balance valves. ,,M G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger - Tour & Anderson Series " STAF, neoprene seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top A and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, A. Figure 101 F or 1 1 8F, G6-H12. Provide open position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more above the Am floor. Aft H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1 /2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson "" Series STAF, lever operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body 4M with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working .M pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves. Im I. For 2 in. and smaller - Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson Figure 4M STAD or STA-D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom bushings, complete with lever. "" Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves, which are labeled AM "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be Aft furnished with drain kit. 0M J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or AM Smolensky equal to Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig ASME rated. """`' AM 2.10 THERMOMETERS AW A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to AW Taylor 30E.J31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading A mercury, 9" scale length, 2oF subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient AM to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1 /2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. AW B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: "m AM 1 . Hot water heating system: 25-240oF Im 2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES Aft AM HVAC 235500-22 lak Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA C. The pump housing, motor stool, and shaft coupling shall be constructed of close-grained cast iron. The impeller, impeller seal ring, and pump shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel. The impeller shall be secured to the .�► splined pump shaft end by means of a stainless steel lock nut and locking washer. The seal faces shall be of tungsten carbide/carbon with other mechanical seal parts constructed of stainless steel. D. Motor shall be nominal integrated variable frequency drive totally enclosed fan cooled 1750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quiet operation. ., The horse power of the motor shall be of such size as to insure non- overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be premium efficiency. Provide steel base. E. Pumps shall be Grundfos Series L. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.9 VALVES �.. A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed. B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all bronze with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure. In general, all line service valves are to w, be gate valves, manual vents are to be globe type. C. Solder end valves are as follows: 1 . Gate Valves - Stockham Figure B-109. 2. Globe Valves - Stockham B-14T. 3. Check Valves - Stockham B-309. k 4. Drain Valves - Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap and chain. 5. Ball Valves - Watts Series B-6001 -SS-XH. D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: 1 . Gate: 2-1 /2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-620 or G-623. 2. Globe: 2-112 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613. 3. Check: 2-1 /2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-931 . 4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. Ask ®"^ HVAC 235500-21 Aft m w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA E. The convectors shall be finished with factory baked enamel finish in color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. All fasteners shall be tamper-proof. F. Convector A - Type SW-A: Type SW-A cabinets shall be constructed from A not less than 14 gauge CRS front and top and No. 16 gauge CRS back and .k sides. The front shall wrap around the sides of the cabinet and shall fasten at sides with vandal proof screws. Air outlet louvers of venetian type shall be in slope top. Type SW-A air inlet shall be through open bottom. Back shall be provided with holes for mounting on wall. oft G. Dampers: Provide factory installed Allen Head operated dampers for all Aft convectors. The damper operator shall have two free wheeling clutches A"W for automatic engagement at the beginning (closing or opening) position and shall position the damper blade at any intermediate point between "" full closed and full open; at the full open and full closed position, the Ak clutch shall disengage allowing the die-formed, unbreakable nylon damper knob to be turned beyond the full closed or open position without jamming or distorting the damper assembly. The operator is to be 5/8 in. Im machined aluminum screw and zinc die-cast iron and escutcheon plate. AW The escutcheon plate shall be fastened through the enclosure to a 3/32 AM in. back-up plate with countersunk sheet metal screws. H. Access Doors: Convectors shall be provided with one access door. Access door shall be 5-1 /8 in. by 4-1 /8 in. and shall be located in the inlet louver area. Access doors shall be hinged on side with straight shaft AM type hinge and shall fasten with cam-type locking device with Allen Head AM operator. AM I. End Pockets: Where noted, convectors shall be provided with 4 in. end pockets, both ends. End pocket shall consist of the cabinet extended in length as noted with No. 20 gauge CRS baffle spot welded to back of AM cabinet extruding from heating element to air outlet louvers. A 2.8 CIRCULATING PUMPS AM, A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially •. designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown 0141 on the Drawings. Aft B. Pump end shall be of the in-line, single stage design with close-coupled AW motor. The pump models shall be furnished as shown on the plans and installed in accordance with the manufacture's recommendations. The "'"" pump shall be capable of operating continuously at temperatures from 5°F A to 250° (-15°C to 121°C) and working pressures of 175 PSI (12 Bars). Pump A flanges shall be ANSI B16.1 , 125-lb. flat face. HVAC 235500-20 AM I^. AOW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College *" Northampton, MA D. The fan wheels shall be of the backwardly inclined non-overloading type. E. The shaft shall be constructed of C1040 ground and polished steel. 4% F. The bearings shall be of the ball bearing concentric lock type and shall be 41k especially constructed for quiet operation. Bearings shall be of the self- aligning grease pack, pillow block type, selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours. W 4W G. Motor and drive shall be belt drive with adjustable motor sheave. Motor nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of AW 5%. Belts shall be of the oil resistant type. Motor shall be especially k„ designed for quiet operation. Ak H. A factory wired non-fused disconnect switch shall be located under the •W housing of the unit. Provide spring vibration isolators for each fan. w I. Fan shall be Loren-Cook Model CPV or equal by Greenheck. 2.7 CONVECTORS A. Convectors shall be of the wall mounted or semi-recessed type as shown f. on Drawings for heating with hot water. Unit shall have a capacity as Am shown on the drawings and shall be rated in accordance with Code CS]40-47 of the National Bureau of Standards. ok ,, ► B. Convector elements shall be of suitable type for use with hot water and shall consist of round seamless copper tubes, non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers, steel element end supports and fin tube supports all suitably protected against corrosion. All tubes shall be mechanically expanded into fin collars. Tubes shall be expanded and rolled into headers with contact strengthened by tapered brass bushings so inserted as to prevent tubes from loosening or pulling out by continued expansion. No soldered or welded joints or compression couplings shall be permitted. C. All cabinets shall be reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness. Cabinets shall be constructed of 16 gage quality steel. Fronts shall be secured in place by quick opening fasteners with vandal proof heads. Cabinets and fronts shall be phosphatized and painted inside and outside with one coat of grey primer. Complete cabinets and convector elements are to be manufactured by the same company. A horizontal channel stiffener shall be installed on the inside of the front panel of all units' 36" or longer. D. The convectors shall be securely attached to the building structure and shall be set dead level in both directions. All convectors shall be mounted one block course (8") above finished floor. "` HVAC 235500-19 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College °'� Northampton, MA Aft recommendations. All relevant information shall be included oft relating to the following: AW Im a. tube handling b. tube measuring C. tube cutting Im d. tube bending ,W e. tube repairing f. tube connections A g. tube solvent sensitivity .W h. tube UV light sensitivity AM i. tube capacity and pressure drop j. tube loop layout patterns k. tube fastening procedures ,® I. manifold assembly instructions M. manifold location "" n. fitting assembly instructions . o. insulation practices Am p. installation method by construction type q. control applications Am r. system start-up procedures A 2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing system shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommended .m procedures for the products utilized. Aft 3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing system shall be supplied by one company, including: PEX tubing, fittings, AM manifolds, and other recommended and required hardware to A assure a compatible and a complete radiant tubing system. Am 2.6 UTILITY FAN A Am A. The utility vent set shall be of the centrifugal fan type completely assembled with fan, fan scroll, motor, belt drive, motor mount and motor AM, housing. The capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings and certified ,* performance tests by AMCA shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. AW B. The fan shall be mounted and supported as shown by the detail on the ,a Drawings. The mounting shall be complete with vibration isolators as Aft, recommended by the manufacturer. The unit shall be provided with weather protection. "" 4M C. Fan housing shall be constructed of steel sheet and all parts shall be bonderized and then coated with baked primer-finisher especially ' ' formulated to meet stringent corrosion resistance standards. The fan 4W scroll shall be attached to the side plates by means of continuous lock A seam or welded seam construction. Intermittent spot welded type construction will not be acceptable. `"w AM HVAC 235500-18 *�* Art► Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold configurations and allows for future expansion. b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have an automatic integrated air vent. C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall have a thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water temperatures. Temperature readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have w� incremental adjustment and flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve and a visual flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating system allowing different loop lengths and 4. tube sizes to be connected to the same manifold. Each valve Ak shall be able to fully close to allow complete loop isolation. f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to indicate incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue to indicate cooler return water. g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means of fully isolating the loop from the rest of the system. h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be 1 -1 /4" NPT female, to fit maximum size plumbing and greater system adaptability. 3. Fittings a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut, ferrule and insert with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to manifold. aft I b. Fitting Types:Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 1 /2", 5/8" 3/4" Manifold to 1 /2" copper tubing Hose Bib Manifold Cap C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper tubing should not require soldering. D. System Requirements ,ter► 1 . Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and '* HVAC 235500-17 W Ilk low .NW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AM Smith College Northampton, MA AW 5/8" 210 180 3/4" 210 180 j. Environmental Stress Cracking: There shall be no loss of pressure in the tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9" (paragraph of ASTM F876). k. Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with 7.9, (paragraph of ASTM F876), the degree of crosslinking for PEX tubing material shall be within the range of 65% to 89% inclusive." I. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with 7.10 (paragraph of ASTM F876), the time t2 (t2 = time to failure of boiled sample) shall be at least 50% of the time, t," (t, = time to failure of unboiled sample). AM M. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of Am the tube shall not be more than six (6) times the outside diameter for up to a 90 degree bend. For 180 degree bends, Am the minimum bend radius shall be as follows: 3/8" tubing 3.0" radius AM 112" tubing 3.75" radius 5/8" tubing 4.5" radius 3/4" tubing 5.75" radius A n. Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not ,W more than five (5) feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows: IM 1 . Nominal tubing size. 2. Type of plastic tubing material. 3. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9. AW 4. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure rating is valid. 5. ASTM designation, ASTM F876. ` 6. Manufacturer's name and production code. ... A Additional Marking Alk, 1 . Date of manufacturing. Ak 2. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726. 3. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring the tubing. .M Am 2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall consist of individual loop control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide thermoplastic components ready for assembly. The manifold should also include the following features: HVAC 235500-16 AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College 'W Northampton, MA C. Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous working pressure rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi @ 180 F working temperature and 80 psi @ 200 F working temperature. d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries, Inc., all PEX tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and materials, Standard Specification F876 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing", and German Standard DIN 4726 for "Oxygen Permeation" as related to the following paragraphs: e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially uniform in color, opacity, density, and other Am properties. The inside and outside surfaces shall be matte ,,k or glossy in appearance. the tubing walls shall be free of cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or other defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the wall integrity. f. Dimensions and Tolerances Nominal Average Outside Minimum Tubing Size Diameter Wall Thickness 3/8" 0.5 00" 0.070" * 1 /2" 0.625" 0.070" 5/8" 0.750" 0.083" 3/4" 0.875" 0.097" �w g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a density in the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m3. h. Sustained Pressure: Nominal Tube Minimum Burst PressureMinimum Burst Pressure Size psi @ 180oF psi @ 180oF 3/8" 250 210 1 /2" 195 165 5/8" 190 165 3/4" 190 165 i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic tubing shall be as given. Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Minimum Burst Size Pressure Pressure psi @ 1 80o psi @ 180oF 3/8" 275 235 1 /2" 215 185 HVAC 235500-15 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ' Northampton, MA AM ,it. B. Ceiling Exhaust Register (CER) - Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 aluminum deflected blade register, off-white finish, with opposed blade damper. C. Top Exhaust Register (TER) - Titus Model 350FL/AG-1 5 aluminum deflected blade register, off-white finish, with opposed blade damper. AGO Mk D. Top Supply Registers (TSR) - Titus Model 271 FL/AG-1 5 aluminum ,m construction, double deflection, white finish, with opposed blade damper. E. Ceiling Diffuser (CD) - Titus Model TDCA steel construction, adjustable discharge diffuser, with opposed blade damper. , 2.4 LOUVERS .M. A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the AW following Ruskin Mfg. Co. model. 1 . Type "A" - No. ELF375D with box frame, extended sill, 1 /2" .� aluminum mesh bird screen, and custom color Kynar 500 finish. Ak 2.5 RADIANT HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Aft A. Scope of Work 1 . This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant tubing system consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection, distribution manifolds and associated fittings. '"'" A& B. References 1 . American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876, entitled "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing". 2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems". .� 3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water floor heating systems". C. Materials 1 . Tube a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in accordance with ASTM F876. b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using the "electron beam method of A crosslinking, performed at ambient temperature and ANk pressure. Aft HVAC 235500-14 .fie Ate. w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4. oft Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181 . Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. Ak positive pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be ,w. UL rated for velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E. "K R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to retaining clamps. S. All exhaust ducts serving shower shall be aluminum. T. Install duct-type smoke detectors furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor. .�, U. Fabricate kitchen hood exhaust ducts and supports, used for smoke and �. vapor removal from cooking equipment, of 16 ga. Minimum stainless steel where concealed, and of 18 ga. Minimum stainless steel where exposed. For duct construction, comply with SMACNA, "HVAC" duct Construction Standards", and NFPA 96, "Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment". All joints shall have leak-proof continuous welded seams. Provide accessible gasketed, bolted cleanouts at each change of direction. Al 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS Ak A„ A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items "' for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing (minor variations 4w are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. scale. A B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings. 2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Anemostat-Waterloo, Titus, or w�. Barber Colman, equal to those specified in the Following paragraphs. See „ Drawings for sizes, cfm's, locations, and qualities of various types. In general, all units shall be installed with face bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall be key operated. Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to be factory finished with color selected by the Engineer. HVAC 235500-13 WA Ak Aft*, I" Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside la dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings. .. M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static Aw pressure with maximum leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1 /2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal. N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, Aft to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped AW with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be , ► provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x Alk 1 /8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used. "' O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not less than 1-1 /2 hour fire protection rating �'' in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, AW having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351 , 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed AW according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1 -112" x 1-1 /2" x Aw 1 /8" returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles �"�'' shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area. P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers "" shall be made with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1 . To be Thermaflex A S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for supply, or equal. joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps. Connection to rigid ' ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps. .f Q. Flexible Air Duct: Am 1 . Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex, Cleveflex, or equal, AW and shall be equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct. 2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased AW with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an inside-bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA low *lk HVAC 235500-12 .W Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA a�► Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. AM F. Duct sections 1'-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with Ak flat drive cleats 2-1 /8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the HVAC Contractor's option. G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1 /2" standing bar slips made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets. joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1" standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42", the standing bar slips will be reinforced ■, with 1-1 /2" x 1-1 /2" x 1 /8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be Aft jointed with 1 -1 /2" x 1 /8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 4ft- 1 /8" rivets at not more than 4-1 /2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" Aft stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1 /4". Ak H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, except where specified otherwise. Button ++ punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of fittings. I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper, reheat coil, at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door, two rotary type latches shall be As used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum 4W except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for Oft access to fire damper fusible links or other devices. Ak j. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1 -1 /4" x 1-1 /4" x 1 /8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with black 1" x 1 /16" strap iron bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that +�w they are not greater than 6" centers. K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point. '""" HVAC 235500-11 Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA Aft E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Ift Owner. "" F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this Aft area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the entire working area AM with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. A* 1 .19 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1 . AW B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings .. whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of 10� concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to Am these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above Oft, all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble. PART 2 - MATERIALS '"" A 2.1 SHEET METALWORK A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any lift ductwork. Above hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co- A. ordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures. 4 AW B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality. .M AM C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest 00 ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements for metal gauges, joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a .m neat, smooth, finished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off. .w D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions Ak shall be made by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to clear structural AM members and to co-ordinate with other trades and any duct changes must A meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. A E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall AW be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Am Am HVAC 235500-10 Am AW AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Aft Northampton, MA AW, that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from '""' moisture during storage. Ak Ak 1 .17 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning. �. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. AW D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall AW remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over Ak from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the 4► Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. 1 .18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4 in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of HVAC in the building, shall be performed by *W the HVAC Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Aft HVAC Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at 4*. his own expense. 'k B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General A* Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where �.. incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. �w AM HVAC 235500-9 AOL 4^ Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College "" Northampton, MA .M sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and Aft easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be la" bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. Aft C. The manual shall include the following information: AW 1 . Description of systems. AW 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. ,. 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item Aft of equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. .W 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation Aft- and control of each item of equipment. 7. Valve chart. Oak 8. List of recommended spare parts. low 9. Copies of all service contracts. Aft 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. 1'l . List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors .W as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 0M D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control" paragraphs of this Section for Ak additional requirements. 1 .16 PROTECTION ` A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused. AM B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally A* inspected, tested, and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary , covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or AM foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, Aft protecting, setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include A* exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, A and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to 'w protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor. am Oak D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure HVAC 235500-8 A A% Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 '"�" Smith College Ak Northampton, MA Aw Oft B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the HVAC Contractor. 1 .13 WORK CONCEALED A. All p�p� 9 i in and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except Ak storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. w, 1 .14 GUARANTEE A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. �w► B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. ► C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1 .15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS qua. A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall Aft video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab HVAC 235500-7 a& AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AM Smith College Northampton, MA *W AW 1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS AW .M* A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, AW plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans A+ and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is ,.1k to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements. AM B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, A. shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. ,.. C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling AW measurements from the Drawings. AW D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all �. offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Am Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing '" such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to ,.. meet such conditions, at no additional cost. E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and low Balancing Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full „� comprehension of the work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and '""" materials. 1 .11 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his AM materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. AW Delivery and storage of materials and equipment must be coordinated with -AM the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas designated by the College. B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AM A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor. AW Aft HVAC 235500-6 " Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Ak A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall """ be new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are �.. intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of 4ft types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1 .7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the project. In addition to the above, one (1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's HVAC Department for review and approval. .w. B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance .► with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are 40 not in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer. 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He w► is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS Oft A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out 4"" apparatus as specified in Division 1 . Ak km HVAC 235500-5 Aft AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith CollegE! Northampton, PIA AM E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated . on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum .40 requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the 40k actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Aft Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all 4M measurements. Am F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Contractor AW installing such items. A G. The HVAC Contractor shall be respo isible for the proper protection of his 4 work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open AM during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All low instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. .IN. H. The HVAC Contractor shall be respo: sible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the AM Owner. Aw I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall .� be called to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work. A �. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this low Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No substitution will be allowed for the Trane, York, or McQuay air handling units and condensing unit, Trane, McQuay or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves, Grundfos pumps, Tour and , Anderson balancing valves, Tunstall steam traps. A B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests ,0k secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will sm be conducted in accordance with the lieneral Requirements. Aw 1 .6 PRODUCTS AW Am HVAC 235500-4 AM A ... Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith CollegE! A., Northampton, MA the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the "" College. Aft Am 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES, AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise. B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The HVAC Contractor shall empicy only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall no': be removed or replaced without the Aft express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins. Am C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage Ak done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution cf his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of w support, to all other trades requiring such information. The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. "'" HVAC 235500-3 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College '"� Northampton, MA *m AW SECTION 235500 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND Al CONDITIONING (HVAC) "M A PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS "m A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1 , and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which .. affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. "' AM- C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the low work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. AW AW 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK AM A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, Equipment and services necessary for A and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following; 1 . Steam to water heat exchanger. 2. Unit heaters, cabinet heaters a-id radiators. 'ft 3. Pex tubing system and manifold. Aw 4. Piping systems for hot water, steam supply and condensate return, ww including pumps, heat exchanger valves, and specialties. 5. Duct systems for make up air exhaust and air conditioning, including 4 fire dampers, registers, louvers, and terminal boxes air handling ,,s, units. 6. Exhaust fans. "" 7. Insulation for piping, ductwork., and equipment. A. 8. Air handling units A, 9. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control work shall be by Yankee Technology, Inc. *w 10. Installation of and connection ':o equipment furnished by others. o 11 . Air and water balance, tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall be preformed by "Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc Aft and billed directly to the College." Aw 12. Guarantee. 13. Instructions. Aw 14. Record Drawings. Am 15. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing AM heating and ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All piping and equipment shall be the property of AW HVAC 235500-2 Am Oft ,.., Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith CollegE'.s Northampton, MA INDEX SECTION 2351300 - HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 1. 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3. 1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM 1. 2 SCOPE OF WORK 3. 2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING ,w, 1. 3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3. 3 PIPE INSTALLATION 1. 4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3. 4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS 1. 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3. 5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING 1. 6 PRODUCTS 3. 6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS 1. 7 SUBMITTALS 3. 7 INSULATION Oft 1. 8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3. 8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1. 9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3. 9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.10 IDENTIFICATION 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING 3.11 SPARE PARTS 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.12 FIRE SAFING 1.13 WORK CONCEALED 1.14 GUARANTEE 4; 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1.16 PROTECTION wk 1.17 CLEANING 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS PART 2 - MATERIALS 2. 1 SHEET METAL WORK 2. 2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS 2. 3 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS 2. 4 LOUVERS ** 2. 5 RADIANT HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTM AM 2. 6 UTILITY FANS 2. 7 CONVECTORS 2. 8 CIRCULATING PUMPS (In Line Type) 4w 2. 9 VALVES 2.10 THERMOMETERS 2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES 2.12 UNIONS 2.13 PIPE SLEEVES ate. 2.14 DUPLEX CONDENSATE PUMPS 2.15 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES 2.16 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS ► 2.17 STEAM TRAPS 2.18 HANGERS 2.19 INSULATION w 2.20 PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.21 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS 2.22 STRAINERS 2.23 AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) 2.24 ACCESS PANELS 2.25 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 2.26 PANEL RADIATORS 2.27 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL HVAC 235500-1 Aft 4^ Ak Alft 4m .NW AOW AW AOW, AM Am w*. Ak 4w .lk Am. AM AW Ak AW AW A* 4m AW AW AOM Aft AWk Aol AW A .w Alk Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College 4W Northampton, MA 1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no „ft voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. Ak 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing AM insulation with sealing compound. 3.12 GAS SERVICE Ak Ak A. This contractor shall arrange for the installation of a new gas service by Bay State Gas Company. All arrangements for this service shall be Aft coordinated by the contractor and billed direct to the college. Aft Ak END OF SECTION ,w► asn AM Ak Am Am ak PLUMBING 225400-39 Aft +AR Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Aft Northampton, MA AU B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium AM hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 40 50 parts per million of chloride as determined by residual chlorine tests at ,w end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being chlorinated. C. After twenty-four (24) hours, test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 AM ppm are present, flush out system until all traces are removed. .&. D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. ,W Continue flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over "' next three (3) days indicate that quality of water is not being maintained. ,o► Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose. ,M E. Submit test results to Owner. AW 3.11 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to AM complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. A 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. Aftw 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, ,M storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. '0.... B. Safing Insulation 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" ,,,w minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. A 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. low D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. AM E. Application d Aft PLUMBING 225400-38 Im Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry proceeds. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly .► together and sealed. AW 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS 4, AW A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All .w water piping passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center pipe in sleeve. Amk B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass through walls. 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS M A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Aft Underground piping shall be tested prior to backfillin Equipment 9 p p� 9 p 9• required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the * Plumbing Code. 3.8 CLEANING UP *f A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter or discol- oration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for Oak use. ok 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 4^ 4^ A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish k this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid. *a* 3.10 DISINFECTION AM A. Flush out entire system. ak A AW PLUMBING 225400-37 Am Aft .s. AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Am Northampton, MA Am B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in AW accordance with the directions of the manufacturer. .ft AM C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. AM Clear interior of conduit of dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard manufactured PVC adapters and fittings. A E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment Am indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. .0k A 3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS A A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe AW, shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or Aft forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the AW building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, Ak valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 112" between finished covering on the different services. B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe. Ak 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be AW performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. A B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed A& by the General Contractor. C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the General Contractor. 3.5 INSUL4TION ,. A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor A regularly engaged in that business. *W AW PLUMBING 225400-36 'R Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College .� Northampton, MA Vibration Isolation and / or Seismic Restraint Equipment Schedule Specification Static Deflection Pumps - Base Mounted 1 , 4, 18, 23 Pumps - In-Line 23 Ilk PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Installation: 1 . Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste .► pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1 /4" per foot for piping 3" and ,W less and 1 /8" per foot for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. 2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45o wyes, long or short sweep 1 /4 bends, 1 /6, 1 /8, or 1 /16 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1 /4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permit- ted. AM B. joints:, Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and AW notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded A^ joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler '^ and oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetra- ,�,,, fluorethylene tape applied to the male threads. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill. Aft Ak PLUMBING 225400-35 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AW Northampton, MA 1^ they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in Aft addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. .Ok 5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20- AW ft. maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40-ft. maximum spacing. low 6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a 4W longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size ,m connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within allowable limits at longer distances. A` 7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze Ak members before applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports. A& 8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main M lines. 9. Cast-iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined .M with a four band shield and clamp assembly in Zones 2B, 3 and 4 AM shall be braced as in sections 3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and Aft 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced spacing of 1 /2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3. AM AM N. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the schedules in paragraph S of this Specification. O. Seismic Restraint Exclusions: 1 . Piping: a. All piping less than 2-1 /2 in. in diameter except those listed below. b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D. C. All piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less AM than 1 -1 /4 in. I.D. d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than the 12 in. in length from the structure to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze. .., e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in AW diameter and smaller. P. Suspended Equipment: 1 . Suspended equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. And Supported with a minimum of 4 hanger rods. Q. Schedules: Aft PLUMBING 225400-34 A* Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA as described in Specification 6. Heat exchangers and expansion tanks are considered part of the piping run. The first three- (3) isolators from the isolated equipment will have the same static deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected 4M equipment. If piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceilings under occupied spaces the w�► first three hangers shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3 in., 1 -1 12 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6 in., and 2-1 /2 in. deflection thereafter. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical equipment install Specification 23 flexible piping connection or Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is not suitable for the service. 2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10 hangers or supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors, and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to ± 25% of the initial load. Submittals must include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated A.► expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final changes and seismic loads. Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed design. Am M. Seismic Restraint of Piping: 1 . Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use Specification 12 cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated piping. a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger. b. Piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment (fan) rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that are 1-1 /4 in. I.D. and larger. C. All other piping 2-1 /2 in. diameter and larger. 4* 2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for Am all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors ' may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided Ak """" PLUMBING 225400-33 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College .ft Northampton, MA overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from: a. Flanges of structural beams. Aft b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction. AW C. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. A* 10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to low avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit. 11 . Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non- .• isolated systems. Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only. 12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, Ak the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept AW compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, AW the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept AW compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. ... 14. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be Specification type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted equipment. 15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project. Om 16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe , sizes exceed 24 in. or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities. •* 17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration ,. isolation manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals. 18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive displacement, which results from high air thrust + in relation to the equipment weight. Horizontal thrust restraint Oft shall be Specification type 28 (see selection guide). 19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible. , L. Vibration Isolation of Piping: Aft 1 . Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the Ow main lines near the mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification 11 . Specification 11 hangers must also be used in all "16 transverse braced isolated locations. Brace hanger rods with SRC Ow clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other locations ,W throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators Aft A PLUMBING 225400-32 Om Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Ok exceed 240 dig. F., 10 lb. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of Ak the sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 27. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1 /4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one (1) rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the duct work or the equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at *+� the centerline of thrust and symmetrical on either side of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall be Type WBI/WBD as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. K. Execution - General: w 1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be ±*► installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instruction and all certified submittal data. 2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or misalignment. w 3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified. 4W 4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. 5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. Aft, 6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact ,, k with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the Ak architects/engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the Specifications and the field conditions or changes 4M required due to specific equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations, which are deemed defective in workmanship and materials at the Contractor's expense. 9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of """'" PLUMBING 225400-31 A, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College low Northampton, MA AM Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade A,,,, passage frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the AO. equipment side of the shut off valves. Expansion joints shall be , SAFEFLEX SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as 4W manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and Ah carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated: Flanged Male Nipples ..b 3x14 10x26 1 /2x9 1-1 /2x13 4x 1512x28 3/4x10 2x14 5x1914x30 1 x112-1 /2x18 6x2016x32 1 /4x12 .R' Ak Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off 4W valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as manufactured by Mason AM Industries, Inc. W 24. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of Aft steel tubing separated by a minimum 112 in. thick 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar material .m arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable AW loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All- directional anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes A of steel tubing separated by a minimum 112 in. thickness of 60 Aw durometer neoprene. The height of the guides shall be preset with Aft a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow '" for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of ± 1- 5/8 in. motion, or to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall ,& be Type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum Aw 3/4 in. thick neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the „k construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face of the wall. Where temperatures PLUMBING 225400-30 *1A4 AM 4^ Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be a minimum of 1 /4 in. thick. Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on 1 /4 in. thick �. neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be ANA built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section Ok anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall have anchorage preapproval "R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Curb shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. ++ ► 22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face rubber ends to Ok prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. w► to 24 in. may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1 -1 /2 in. may have AW threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi As up to 190° F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi ww at 250° F. 16 in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190° F and 135 psi at 250° F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1 . All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test At twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the above Specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion joints. Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure Ak requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have 1 /2 in. thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough in area to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. ' "" PLUMBING 225400-29 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA compounded to bridge bearing Specifications. Elastomeric ' materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be w, manufactured with air gap between hard and resilient material of nor less than 1 /8 in. nor more than 1 /4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be equal or greater than the A load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the " ^ load deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubbers shall be series Z-1011 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Ak 18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the "' thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety shoulder, which ,ft fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation AM Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud edge Am anchors shall be Type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, AW Inc. 19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators AM or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. ,M Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall AW have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number AW from I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel Ak concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases Am for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows. Bases shall be a minimum of 1 /12 of the A longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 in. The base ,t depth need not exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include AM minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 112 in. bars welded in •• place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a layer 1 -1 /2 in. above ,w the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being ""* poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting low locations to maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not "' acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by Mason 4W Industries, Inc. 21 . Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring .k isolation curbs. The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z PLUMBING 225400-28 A* Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies 4ft shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace .+ end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final 401K installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California AW verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason 4W Industries, Inc. Oft 14. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe Ak or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of Ow support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. * 15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be special purpose performed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Clevis cross brace shall be Type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 16. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel w► members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1 /4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1 /8 in. shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between �w the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load , ► ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z-1225 as manufactured by Mason �w Industries, Inc. 17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel oft members restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials '�"` PLUMBING 225400-27 ww A* Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA Aft neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum AW of three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either the building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1 /8 in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as 4M described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes Ab vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is Ak removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and AM operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 .2 in. shall ,w* be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact '�" during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all .W seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as manufactured by AW Mason Industries, Inc. 10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 - AM 1 /4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with AM general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel AW washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting �.► through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 300 arc from side to side before contacting the rod AW bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 300 capability. Hangers shall be Type A 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 11 . Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be precompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a W release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection AM shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall .W include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. .M Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft , cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable PLUMBING 225400-26 W AAk �. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the AM back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. *A 5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1 /4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be Ak rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. OW Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to +k 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring ,M diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason Ow Industries, Inc. w 6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A AW steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 /2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum if 1 /4 in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced '" PLUMBING 225400-25 Aft Au 40,. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College '"" Northampton, MA Zon Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Vert. » e Ve rt. Ve rt. Aft UBC AM A! BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.1 0.6 0.2 0.15 0.15 SBCCI I. Product Intent: AM 1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this Aft section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products AM of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems •M strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the .. specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section D. 2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the W,, discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1 /8 in. .00, and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1 /4 in. AW J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints: AW 1 . Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge "`' galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as .* required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured by Mason „m Industries, Inc. 2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from A* contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock „O. absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge- bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage A Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California .� verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. .�► 3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting AM structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the PLUMBING 225400-24 AM 4^ Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College A'` Northampton, MA 4W d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure proper installation and performance. G. Related Work: 1 . Housekeeping Pads: a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure details and design shall be prepares by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings. b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ,w ten 0 0) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor " ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment. 2. Supplementary Support Steel: a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified. 3. Attachments: a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping p ads, concrete inserts, double sided beam *► clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations. H. Seismic Force Levels 1 . The following force levels will be used on this project. Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E. Ak Building "G" Force "G" Force °G" Force "G" Force For *4 Code for all pipes, Duct for Rigidity for Life Safety oft & Conduit Mounted Flexibility Equipment Equipment Mounted Either ' Equipment Rigidity or Flexibility Mounted Aw PLUMBING 225400-23 AW 4W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM, Northampton, MA AW seismic design experience, licensed in the state of A' the job location. AM (2) All restraining devices shall have a preapproval number from California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Preapprovals based on independent AW testing are preferred to Preapprovals based on calculations. Where preapproved devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including the combining ,,W of tensile and shear loadings) to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered low professional engineer with at least five years of AM seismic design experience and licensed in the state om of the job location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as one AM test or analysis at 450 to the weakest mode. r ,M (3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static AM seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis A must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, ,ow embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without "` failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting AW through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning Al, moments may exceed forces at ground level. 0M E. Code and Standards Requirements: Am, 1 . Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced 'f°' code: Oft Alm a. Massachusetts State Building Code. b. BOCA National Mechanical Code. `M, C. NFPA 90A. AW A. F. Manufacturer's Responsibility: AW 1 . Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment Aft, shall have the following responsibilities: a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes to and locations. AW b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as AW scheduled or specified. A C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of unisolated equipment. AM A PLUMBING 225400-22 "" .. Aft Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Oft Smith College k Northampton, MA a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion Ii perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. 4. Longitudinal Bracing: + ► a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. D. Manufacturer's Data: 1 . The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows: a�. a. Descriptive Data: (1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and „a, 41 specific restraints detailing compliance with the Specification. (2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic �►, restraints by referencing numbered descriptive Drawings. b. Shop Drawings: (1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases w including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. (2) Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. (3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit �w► and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points. .w (4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and locations for each piece of equipment. C. Seismic Certification and Analysis: ,�► (1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of PLUMBING 225400-21 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment. "M 6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation Ak, supervision. AM 7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads. 8. All mechanical systems. Equipment buried underground is Alk excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall is AM included. Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not AW listed is still included in this Specification). • Air Separators AM • Battery Racks • Compressors AW • Comp. Room Units A& • Conduit • Electrical Panels A • Piping Amb • Pumps (All types) Ak • Tanks (All types) AW C. Definitions: Ak 1 . Life Safety Systems 'm Ak a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler AW piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems. AM b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency Aft power supply including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or M10 emergency lighting systems. Ak C. All medical and life support systems d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence AW including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc. e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule. 2. Positive Attachment: a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill- in wedge anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded *" perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. 3. Transverse Bracing: PLUMBING 225400-20 Ak Am Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 aw Smith College Oft Northampton, MA Products, Inc., or equal. A ,k E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall file and prepare all applications for backflow preventer approval with the Department of Environmental O""' Protection, and pay all fees and charges. F. All certificates of approval and test results shall be sent to the Architect. � k 2.16 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL oft A. Intent: 1 . All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the equipment schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. All fire protection vibration and seismic control shall meet NFPA requirements. 2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. 3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all mechanical building system components in place during a seismic event. 4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component manufacturer's and building �. construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most stringent shall apply. 5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian �. Building Codes, or other requirements). 6. Any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements shall be corrected by the Contractor in an approved manner. 7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as detailed in Section H. Ak Aft B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: ,�. 1 . Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and equipment. �w 2. Equipment isolation bases. 3. Flexible piping connections. *� 4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. PLUMBING 225400-19 AWA AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AW Northampton, MA low, B. Unit shall be factory assembled, tested, and shall be sized for 45 gpm at a ' 10 lb. pressure drop. C. No substitutions will be allowed. low I^ 2.12 DEMOLITION ,,W A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains, piping, etc., not to be re-used Alft shall be removed by this Contractor and shall become the property of the A'", Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for delivering AW and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to such places as designated by the Owner. so 2.13 TRAP PRIMER ft A. Furnish and install all brass automatic trap primers for all floor drains. " Primer shall include automatic pressure activated brass valve with vacuum Am breaker, and copper duplex manifold distribution reservoir. Valve shall conform with A.S.S.E. Standard 1018. Am, Am B. Valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal. „W 2.14 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers as manufactured by Watts or approved equal. AM, Aft B. Type "A" - pressure type to be Watts Model 800 QT with test cocks and ball ,ft, valves. Am C. Type "B" - atmospheric type, Model 288A chrome plated, when supply is not .� under constant pressure. 2.15 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS AM A. Furnish and install the backflow preventers, as scheduled on the Drawings .dk and as manufactured by Watts Regulator: A` 4W B. This Subcontractor shall provide a spare parts repair kit for each 909 .. reduced pressure backflow preventer, to consist of a repair kit for the first check, second check, and relief valve. AM C. All backflow preventers shall be approved by the Massachusetts State ooft Plumbing Examiners and shall be installed in strict accordance with "' manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and in accordance with Regulation 310CMR 22.22. D. Units shall be Watts Regulator Co., Febco, Division of CMB, Ind., Hersey A PLUMBING 225400-18 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA w hose and bracket, and No. 1453-BB strainer. L. Double Bowl Sink (P-6) w► 1 . Sink to be Elkay Model LR 3329 with Delta Model No. 2476 faucet �. with spray. 2. Garbage Disposal to be In-Sink-Erator Model No. LC-50, corrosion resistant stainless steel, % hp induction motor totally enclosed to provide protection from moisture, built-in thermal overload protection, 120 volt, 1 phase. 3. Provide aquapure water filter under sink. M. Washing Machine Connection (P-7) Aft 1 . Symmons Laundry-Mate No. W-602-X supply and drain unit with %2" supplies and 2" drain with integral stops and recessed wall plate. N. Hose Bibb (P-8) Woodford Model No. 24P, with vacuum breaker and loose key. O. Laundry Tub (P-9) 1 . Basin- Fiat Model L-2 single tub with base unit. 2. Faucet- Chicago Model 895-317, 8" center with E-12 aerator. 3. Trim - Fiat Model 327A strainer and tail piece. P. Gas Log (P-10) Log shall be Peterson Real-Fyre Split Oak Series Model No. SDPG6- .. 24, provides full flames and dramatic glowing embers, 3/a" gas connection, advantage Burner System, flexible connector kit and damper clamp, and manual controls. Q. Floor Drain (FD-1) ter► 1 . Wade Model No. 1 100 w/ FC9 Strainer. 2. With Precision Plumbing Trap Primer. 2.11 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE A. Furnish and install one (1) Powers Model No. 1434-A-D-M-1 without `ft vacuum breaker, single Thermostatic Water Mixing Valve, inlet checkstops, outlet volume/shut-off valve, dial thermometer (range: 0 to 140°F), rough bronze finish, complete with unions and interconnected copper piping, solid bi-metal corrosion resistant thermostat element. k PLUMBING 225400-17 Ak Aft AW, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College low Northampton, MA 3. Fittings - Gerber Model No. 41 -812 waste and overflow. Ak .10 H. Bath Tub / Shower, Handicapped (P-3A) AM 1 . Tub basin - American Standard "Americast" Princeton Model AM 2392.202 or 2393.202, recessed bath, white non-slip. AM 2. Control Valve - Symmons Temptrol Valve and Shower Head, Model A, No. S-96-600-B30-L-V, Pressure balancing mixing valve with combination integral diverter and volume control and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Consisting of tub spout and Clear- , Flo shower head with arm and flange, wall/hand shower with flexible metal hose and 30" slide bar. AW 3. Fittings - Gerber Model No. 41 -812 waste and overflow. A I. Shower Stall & Drying Stall (P-4) Am 1 . Shower Stall - Provided by the owner with two (2) drains set in place and flashed by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall be responsible to furnish and install shower drains with perforated "W strainer and perform all piping. The shower drains shall be Kohler .w Model K-9132-CP. Note: This contractor shall protect shower Am basins throughout the course of construction and shall be responsible for all, or any, damage to showers. Ak 2. Shower Valve - Symmons Safetymix Shower System Model 1 -100-X, .M pressure-balancing mixing valve with lever handle and adjustable .m screw stop to limit handle turn. AW J. Shower Stall, Suites Bathrooms (P-4A) ,W 1 . Shower Stall - Provided by the General Contractor with two (2) A* drains set in place and flashed by the General Contractor. This ,• Contractor shall be responsible to furnish and install shower drains with perforated strainer and perform all piping. The shower drains Ak shall be Kohler Model K-9132-CP. Note: This contractor shall protect shower basins throughout the course of construction and shall be responsible for all, or any, damage to showers. 2. Control Valve - Symmons Temptrol Model C-96-1-X, pressure balancing mixing valve with lever handle, integral service stops, AW built-in choke and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Cast ,W brass adjustable spray shower head with arm and flange. AW K. Mop Receptor (P-5) A, 1 . Basin - Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24" x 24" x 10" high mop 'M basin. AW 2. Faucet - T & S Brass Model No. B-0665-BSTR, 8" centers, with AM vacuum breaker spout, pail hook, rough chrome plated, built-in stops, heavy duty assembly with bottom brace. A` I PLUMBING 225400-16 '"° .W AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 �Ok Smith College Ak Northampton, MA front seat, less cover, with self-sustaining hinge. 4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal. D. Water Closet (P-1A) Handicapped 1 . Closet - American Standard "Madera" 17"H Model 3043.102, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 %z" top spud and 1 .6 gallon flush. 2. Flush Valve - Toto Model No. TMT1 NNC-32, 1 .6 gpf, with vacuum breaker and angle stop. 3. Seat - Church Model 295SSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less over, with self-sustaining hinge. 4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal. E. Lavatory (P-2) 1 . Basin - laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping 'f" and fittings. Ok 2. Faucet - American Standard "Monterrey" Model 5500.140, 4" centers with lever handles. 3. Fittings - Provide grid strainer and tailpiece, BrassCraft No. CS400A stops and risers, Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome ,, ► plated trap with cleanout plug. Ak F. Lavatory (P-2A) Handicapped 1 . Basin - laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings. 2. Supply Fitting - Faucet-American Standard "Monterrey" Model No. 5500.140, 4" center, blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers. 3. Fittings - Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav-Guard" molded vinyl insulation. 4. Mounting height shall be no higher than 34" from top of front rim to finished floor. G. Bath Tub / Shower (P-3) „® 1 . Tub basin - American Standard "Americast" Princeton Model 2392.202 or 2393.202, recessed bath , white non-slip. Ak 2. Control Valve - Symmons Temptrol Model C-96-2-X, pressure balancing mixing valve with lever handle, integral service stops, built-in choke and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Diverter tub spout, cast brass adjustable spray shower head with arm and flange. '"'" PLUMBING 225400-15 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AW Smith College 4W Northampton, MA .44 A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing A* Products, Inc. SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on A Drawings, or as required. No substitutions will be allowed. I, 2.9 ACCESS PANELS .m .M A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x 12" min.) with screw driver type lock. B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, *t Birmingham Ornamental Iron, or equal. Ak C. Access panels shall be furnished and installed at all valves, cleanouts, "" shock absorbers and unions. Aft 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS I' Am A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be furnished and installed with Aft fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment AM shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass AW with polished, bright surfaces. ,,m B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for AW proper installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, Am shall be built into place as the building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing AM fixtures. AW C. Water Closet (P-1) "' 1 . Closet - American Standard "Madera" Model 2234.015, elongated Aw vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 %z" top spud and 1 .6 gallon flush. AM 2. Flush Valve - Toto Model No. TMT1 NNC-32, 1 .6 gpf, with vacuum AW breaker and angle stop. .k 3. Seat - Church Model295SSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open A AM PLUMBING 225400-14 AW Aft Aft eu► Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Ak Smith College Northampton, MA with self-sealing lap, V thick for hot water, and return hot water 1 /2" thick for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0" of finished floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover. B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor barrier. C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade. D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run continuous through the hanger. Jacket shall match "'" adjacent insulation jacket. E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro "Nandi Lav-Guard", or equal, molded insulation kit. 2.6 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, +w equal to Trerice 80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4-1 /2" diameter, 20 F subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response, but in no case less than 3-1 /2" nor less +• than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: AW 1 . Hot water: 30oF - 180oF. -oft C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater and at mixing valve. 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES A. 4-1 /2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating range shall be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co., or approved equal. B. Provide at water entrance, on both sides of pressure reducing valve. 2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS PLUMBING 225400-13 .m A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College "M Northampton, MA ,m A 1 . Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Ab Drawings. Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body ,m and caps shall be ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309. A° 2. Check valves 2-112" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted ,,M with body and cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type disc, Stockham Figure G-931 . "" 3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, .Jenkins, AW Lunkenheimer, or equal. G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A - 3/4". Am H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or IB-440. I. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S. Gauge AW Co.'s Figure P500, 2" diameter, 0 lb. to 100 lbs. A& 2.3 HANGERS AW AW A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & AM Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For cast iron pipe - Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; , at twelve foot (12') intervals for threaded piping. AM C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6) AM intervals for copper tubing 1 -1 /4" or less; ten foot (10') intervals for piping AM at 1 -1 /2" and larger. Install Fig. 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be installed outside the insulation. Hangers for gas Ak piping shall be installed at eight foot (8) intervals. AW D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot (1) of each horizontal AAk elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over five feet (5) in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 1 /2" from the elbow on the AM connecting horizontal run. 4M 2.4 CLEANOUTS *1W A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they low shall be Zurn ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ► ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7 , for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors; or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade. 2.5 INSULATION A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation PLUMBING 225400-12 low Am Alft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Ak Smith College Ak Northampton, MA Am All welding shall be done in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, or any other approved procedure, conforming to the requirements of the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. No welder shall be employed on the work who has Aft not been fully qualified under the above specified procedure and so certified as a member of the local chapter of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or similar locally recognized testing authority. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series B6001 with stainless steel balls. No substitutions will be allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-off. All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe insulation thickness. B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1 /2" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end w with attached cap and chain. C. Provide gas cocks for sizes 1 and smaller, and provide gas rated ball valves on gas piping 1-1 /4" and larger with tee handles. D. Gate Valves: 1 . Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall �► be Class 125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non-shock cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two-piece packing gland assembly, Hammond Figure 1 R1 138, Stockman, or equal. 2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper silicone alloy stem, brass packing +�. gland, Teflon packing, and malleable handwheel, solder end, Stockham Figure B-104, Hammond 1 R1 138, or equal. 3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or equal. E. Balancing Valves: 1 . Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential pressure meter. �.► 2. Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson. F. Check Valves """ PLUMBING 225400-11 Alk AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MAt available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. A AM F. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, W* partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract, Architectural, or Structural AM Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans, and details. M11 G. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the ""_ architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by ,W, the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 4M Ab PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS AM AM A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-112" and larger, shall be cast iron "no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "Clamp-All". No substitutions will be * ► allowed. All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service weight with push-on "' rubber rings. A B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" A, copper pipe with solder fittings. AM C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2" AM and smaller shall be type "M" copper. "m AM D. All hot, cold and recirculating hot water piping within the building shall be Am hard copper Type "L" seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite- Ak 100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8 publications. AM All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated. All below slab trap primer feed piping shall be Type "K" soft rolled with silver AM solder joints. E. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable pattern 4W fittings, installed in strict compliance with the Massachusetts Fuel Gas A° Code and NFPA 54. All piping 2" and below shall be assembled with Am screwed malleable iron fittings; 2-1 /2" and above shall be welded. Provide necessary ball type gas shut-off valves or square head cocks on piping 2" *04. and smaller and drips as required. Piping 2" and larger shall have plug AM valves. All high pressure gas piping shall be Schedule 40, all welded with AM flanged plug valves. All gas valves shall be rated for 125 psi working pressure. .k Aft PLUMBING 225400-10 "` Ift, Im Oft Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Am Smith College Northampton, MA �w B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire Aft satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. Ak 4ft 1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700. 1 .19 CO-ORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall give full cooperation to the 4M Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information 4ft necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. The Plumbing Subcontractor o, shall cooperate with the other sub trades in preparing a complete set of co-ordination drawings. All co-ordination drawings for the plumbing work shall be prepared by this Subcontractor on backgrounds prepared by the HVAC Contractor. .w. B. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches, at a suitable scale, not less than Y4"=1 ', clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. C. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other Ak equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes by the other trades. +�w D. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and �► equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. E. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space '" PLUMBING 225400-9 Oft Aft ..► Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Am Northampton, MA B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an 4W exterior exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the AW Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the ,,M Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing. "" Aft 1 .16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Aft" A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the Am proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment A installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to low take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall .M video tape the instruction procedures an deliver two (2) copies of the tape AW with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. AW, B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Am Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the AM equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab Aw sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be Ak bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. AM C. The Manual shall include the following information: 'M Aft 1 . Description of systems. AM 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. AM 6. Valve chart. ,m 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. AM 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. ,.. 10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Aek Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. AM Am 1 .17 GUARANTEE AW A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his Am work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final AM acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. AM AM PLUMBING 225400-8 Am Am Ak AW AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Aft Project College AM Northampton, MA �w 1 .13 PROTECTION A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1 .14 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4 in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. a C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1 .15 WORK CONCEALED AM A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas Aw except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. AM"" PLUMBING 225400-7 III .w* Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Am Northampton, MA interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his A estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or AW implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. Am B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably 4M implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be AM considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. low C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. , D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all AW offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing •• Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to ""' meet such conditions, at no additional cost. AM. 1 .11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING "m AM. A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other ''"'°- trades. All delivery and storage must be coordinated with the Smith AM College Physical Plant Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall take Im delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these Aft materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after 4 delivery shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. Ak B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AW AM A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for AM completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. AW C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the Plumbing Contractor. Oak AM PLUMBING 225400-6 Am AM AW mt, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA w and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1 .7 SUBMITTALS AM A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. ' B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The respon- sibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for ,.► which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which �.. are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. ' B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections .► of his work. 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS w, A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500. 1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of ""'° PLUMBING 225400-5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Aft E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated AM on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measure- Am ments. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. '"" G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of ,A,,, his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open Aw during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. AM All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. '" Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before AW proceeding with the work. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for .M items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification, and 4ft- as approved by the Architect and Owner. lal B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests Aw secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will A, be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. AM 1 .6 PRODUCTS ,,M A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used low shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, AW without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the Aft work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials om AM PLUMBING 225400-4 AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA w� required in conjunction with plumbing piping; not work of this Section. 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS Oft A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS w. A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Aw Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed ` between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing A^ Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. Ak '41k PLUMBING 225400-3 Ak Ak .u, .ter. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AW Northampton, MA Im Am SECTION 1 5400 - PLUMBING AM PART 1 - GENERAL ,m 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS m' AW A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and .rt applicable parts of Division 1 , as part of this Section. AW B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Am AW C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the 4ft work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. A AW 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK AW A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for A° and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work „ft specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: '"' 1 . Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting to drainage systems within the building or on the site. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals, cleanouts, fixtures, drains, supports, and roof terminals. 2. Existing water heating system shall remain and shall be protected during construction. 3. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, AW fittings, insulation, supports and valves. 4. Plumbing fixtures and supports. ,�. 5. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing. low 6. Gas piping system connecting to water heater gas fired dryers and wl gas fireplace. 7. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others AM requiring water, gas, drain, and waste connections. A 8. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, .m fixtures, and equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping, fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and AW brass piping, fittings and valves, flush valves, mixing valves, heat AM exchangers, and controls) to be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such places designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the Owner's review shall be by this Contractor. B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill "* AW PLUMBING 225400-2 AM Am 4^ Ok Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA INDEX SECTION 225400 - PLUMBING •w, PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION �w 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS AND 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CONNECTIONS 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 .6 PRODUCTS 3.5 INSULATION 1 .7 SUBMITTALS 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3.8 CLEANING UP 1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Aft 1 .11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 3.10 DISINFECTION 1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.11 FIRE SAFING 1 .13 PROTECTION 1 .14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 .15 WORK CONCEALED 1 .16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS � . 1 .17 GUARANTEE Ak 1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS 0, 1 .19 COORDINATION OF TRADES 4.• Oft PART 2 - MATERIALS 4w 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS 2.2 BALL VALVES +% 2.3 HANGERS Alk 2.4 CLEANOUTS 2.5 INSULATION 2.6 THERMOMETERS 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES �w. 2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS 2.9 ACCESS PANELS ' 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS 2.11 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE ok 2.12 DEMOLITION 4w 2.13 TRAP PRIMER Ak 2.14 VACUUM BREAKERS 2.15 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 4A 2.16 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL " " PLUMBING 225400-1 ,.w Al,k. AN AM ,.w w. ,. AM 4w AMW Aft AtOk Awk ..a AW Oft Aft ow AW ..k .r. AS%, AM AOW oft Am ,w. ,mow AM Am .k .w 40 Am .w AW Abb AM AM .M Am. ,.. Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA +w► �e. B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there ++ is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification 4w signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. `"' C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper k direction of flow including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the valve "`t manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation. 3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying there purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles. B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective. END OF SECTION 4M A► Ak Aft Oft Am FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 23 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ..t Northampton, MA Ab AM C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are Ak not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. AW Im D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1 /2 and larger connections. AW, AM E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved A* mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems. AW F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation. G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division 15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods". Am H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 ,M complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. A I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge with a connection not less than 1 /4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between A gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not low be subject to freezing. AW J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI 131 .20.1 , tapered pipe threads for field AW cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows. A& K. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by Ak sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets A as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by A the bolt manufacturer. A^ Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally low compatible with the couplings. Ak 4 L. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. "" low 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS AW A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in om accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, W and the authority having jurisdiction. ,m FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 22 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA �w. A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, ,, ► stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and machine rooms. B. Safing Insulation ®. 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters. E. Application 1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips 4M where necessary. ok 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing �► insulation with sealing compound. 3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire walls, ceilings, floors, etc. 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION �► A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with .w NFPA 13. B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. 215300 - 21 FIRE PROTECTION Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AW Smith College .. Northampton, MA law install new 3/4 H.P. air compressor, and air maintenance device accelerator and air maintenance compressor mounted on riser. I. Flush mounted Fire Department pumper (4" Stortz) AM connection shall be wall mounted cast brass body, dual drop AM clappers, brass plugs with chains, all with rough chrome- plated finish and lettering on escutcheon reading, "Automatic Sprinkler", equal to Potter-Roemer. Hose connection sizes , and threads shall match Northampton Fire Department standards. m. Automatic ball drips, as manufactured by Potter-Roemer shall be Fig. 5982, size 3/4", of straight design in case brass. ,w Install in horizontal position only. n. Swing Check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping for automatic ball drip, size as required. ,m o. Existing double check valve assembly shall remain. Provide test kits Model TK-7-BFP, and two repair kits. "" p. Swing check valve shall be equal to Viking, Model "80" with A* tapping for automatic ball drip size as required. ,M PART 3 - EXECUTION Ask 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, Aim lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire JM sprinkler-piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove "M foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. . Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. AM B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential Ink dry-valve clappers open during test, to prevent damage. AW C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in AW accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest A as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak „m compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. .. 3.2 FIRE SAFING AW A* .w► Am FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 20 AW AW Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ... Northampton, MA 4W Ak Jenkins: 729 Stockham: G-940 Aft Walworth: 8883-LT A. AM 4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to Ak isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from oft horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Aft M. Fire Protection Specialties ^ 4 , 1 . Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the Aft following listing. Provide sizes and types, which mate and match piping and equipment connections. 4• a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Viking Corp., Model "M" standard upright sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature rating 165oF or as required by the insurance underwriter. ., b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking 4r. Model "M" chrome plated head with Type "F-1" recessed escutcheon, rated at 165oF unless otherwise noted; to be Am installed in all occupied spaces. C. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to Viking, Model A-1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and also an approved type sprinkler head wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve area. d. Head guards shall be equal to Reliable Model 1 for upright sprinklers in areas specified on drawings. e. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000 with sight glass, and test orifice. f. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Star Model "E" w with who �w g. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Viking Model H-1 , I" NPT, 165oF. h. Dry pendent sprinkler shall be equal to Viking Model A-1 recessed type with white cover, extended dry pendent, 1" NPT, 165oF. i. Tamper switches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company, Model OSYS-B, small case, and shall be installed A.► on all control valves for the sprinkler system. j. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection specialties of the following Grinnell Fire Protection Systems, Co., Inc., Viking Corporation, or equal. k. Existing dry pipe alarm valve shall remain. Furnish and FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 19 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College A* Northampton, MA Am Aw Piping Codes are not exceeded. AM 10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. AW AM L. Valves Aw 1 . Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for "" use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure AM ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. Im a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as „m upstream pipe size. Aft b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. 2. Gate Valves a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze ''"" body, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. ,.w Crane: 459 Ak Fairbanks: 0222 .,t Hammond: IB681 AW Jenkins: 275U Stockham: B-133 Am Walworth: 904 AW b. Flanged End, 2-1 /2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron Aft, body bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, AM rising stem. ,,t Crane: 467 AW Fairbanks: 0412 .w Hammond: IR1 154 Jenkins: 825-A AM Stockham: G-634 "` Walworth: 8713-F „lk 3. Check Valves '" Alk. a. 2-1 /2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, AM renewable composition disc and bronze seat ring, bolted cover, flanged ends. .m AW Fairbanks: 0711 Aft. A low FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 18 AW 4% Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 A, Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 AM and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. AW AK a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19. b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: B-Line Systems Inc. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. Corner & Lada Co., Inc. Elcen Metal Products Co. Ak Fee & Mason Mfg. Co. ITT Grinnell Corp. 5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel or wood structural members for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, .. flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. 6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping. *f► 8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure w�, FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 17 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College . Northampton, MA .w.► AW closely fitting pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation AW where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve and extension, if any. Furnish pipe AM escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas; prime A paint finish for unoccupied areas. Aft a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet '"p steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. A b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the following: Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. ,W Producers Specialty& Mfg. Co. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. 4M A C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through 401� floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure -ter, escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole, A* and is flush with adjoining surface. Alb K. Supports, Anchors, and Seals .. 1 . Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size. A% a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1 , for piping AM larger than 4". low b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4" and less. C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. .M 2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments, "'' in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published product Ak information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit AW hanger rods. lak a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. lak b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. Aft C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. AM Aft AM FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 16 A% Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, LUU/ Smith College Northampton, MA sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compounder pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. G. Flanged joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. H. Grooved Pipe joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1 . Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: + * a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in Am foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and pipe. C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve Ak equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1 /4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above Am floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of Aft sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete Ak and other materials from entering sleeves. +�► d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe 4ft with oakum, caulk with lead, on both sides. 2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 15 AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA I�M requirements of NFPA 13 and shall be as follows: 1 . Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas), shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded, AM,m suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms 1 -1 /2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protection Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings. 3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1 -1 12" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings. 4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint .M pressure fittings, where noted on the drawings. &^ C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry "` practices which will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, ,m capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and 'W accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves *M and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. 4k Align piping accurately at connections, within 1 /16" misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as ,W shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise AM indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. AW, Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever AW possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by low locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. A* E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, AM Elevator Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spa- ces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that A must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to installation. Aw AW F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1 ; cut threads full and clean using AMW A* AM FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 14 A. .W .k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 A► Smith College Aw s Northampton, MA (1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. ' (2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A • 536. Aft (3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, AM encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure ww together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest published literature. (4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers «., having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000. (5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000-psi. �..► (6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to '"l pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing ►, with positioning lugs, secured together during A, assembly with nuts and bolts. (7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. �A (8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. Malleable Iron: ASTM 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. wA (9) Grooves: Conform to the following: Standard Steel: Square cut. Ask Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved. (10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with re- w%6 quirements, provide grooved piping products of the ►� following: ITT Grinnell Corp. '• Victaulic Co. B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 13 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College , Northampton, MA AW AM reproduced on 8-1 /2" x 1 1" bond paper. Tabulate valve AM number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for '"" identification (if any). Mark valves, which are intended for AM emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special AW "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as Ak specified in Division 1 . Am d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display Aft frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded alu- ®+ minum, with SSB-grade sheet glass. ,ft e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Aft. Architect. Aft f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference am location for all valves corresponding to the tag numbers. *M The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where directed. Furnish two (2) extra copies of the chart to the Architect. g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12" below * finished ceiling. AW 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS Am ..t. A. Interior Piping AW 1 . Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A 53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required. An 2. Galvanized black steel pipe: ASTM A53. ow a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40. .ft, b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI B16.4, or Aft flanged, ANSI B16.1 . C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; om cut-groove type for piping 2-1 /2" and larger only. ,,,,,,, (1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135. Ak (2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" AM wall thickness for 6". (3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and .. fittings; roll-groove or mechanical locking type. AW d. Grooved Piping Products (for use on pipes 2-1 /2" and larger) Ak w I AM FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 12 Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Ak Smith College Northampton, MA Aft Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials, which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more wa than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option. AW B. Basic Identification 1 . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical A.► identification materials of one of the following: Allen Systems, Inc. Brady (W. H.) Co.; Signmark Div. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. Seton Name Plate Corp. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI Al 3.1 . a. For external diameters less than 6", provide full-band pipe markers, extending 3600 around pipe at each location, 40 fastened as follows: Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic A , pipe marker. W b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed no- menclature, which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect. C. Locate pipe markers as follows: (1) Near each valve and control device. At (2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. (3) Branch p� 9 i in need not be marked. P 3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately " 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices. �4 a. Provide 1 -1 /8" sq. brass tags with black lettering. b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required As" for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured O. specifically for that purpose. C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 11 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 'f Smith College , Northampton, MA Am Aft AW 1 . The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. low 2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable AW scale, not less than 1 /4" = V-0", clearly showing how his work is to ,.t be installed in relation to the work of other trades. 3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and I possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first .w. coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the „W Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed Aft should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of ,W electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes installed by other trades. "" 4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and low equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting Am fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or 4W equipment of other trades is installed. AM 5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade Ak is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other ow materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of AW equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items in- cluding piping and/or equipment of other trades may be AW accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning A shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pi- AM lasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans, AM, and details. , 7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes 'M shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the A* Owner. Oft PART 2 - MATERIALS AM 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS Aft A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. A A AM FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 10 .W 4w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Ak Smith College Am Northampton, MA sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. Ask C. The Manual shall include the following information: Alk 1 . Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. �►. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. .�► 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcon- tractors as well as the local representative for each item of equip- ment. 1 .16 GUARANTEE A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the 01M building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the Ak entire satisfaction of the Architect. oft�w C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 4w Aft 1 .17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall 4M be indicated of concealed work, fire protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the change. w� C. Co-ordination of Trades FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 9 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AW Smith College Northampton, MA AM Am offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection AW Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, "" furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be A required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. low 1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING A 0 A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry " on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS '"" A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Sub- contractor. .�► B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension ..� lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall AM provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. AW C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work ow shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor. AM 1 .14 WORK CONCEALED A& AW A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed AW above new acoustic ceilings. Where ceilings are installed sprinklers shall be installed above and below the ceiling. Im B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an A exterior exposure above grade. 1 .15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment A^ installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient , length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and AM Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Aft Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab 4W low Aft FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 8 04 Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 A& Smith College AM Northampton, MA 3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Spec- ifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall 4, remain with the individual Subcontractor. 4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials 4W and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work, which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. 1 .9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 .10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS �. A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out ap- paratus as specified in Division 1 . 1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS .► A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or Ak reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all � 215300 - 7 FIRE PROTECTION Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College 4& Northampton, MA Am protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. Aft I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment A and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before , ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. ,, , 1 .7 PRODUCTS ""k AM A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the Aft work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of AM manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials .w and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1 .8 SUBMITTALS Am A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection AW Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, A* etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout . drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe AM and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall 4M and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial re- lationship between piping and proximate equipment. Ak Aw 1 . Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization (IRI Incorporated) and the Northampton Fire Department prior to submitting to the Architect for approval. low 2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before AW submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all ,f, changes, which may be required. Aw FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 6 Ak A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College �w Northampton, MA 4, experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. Ak AW B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work Ak in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent f. or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that AM such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Ak Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. Ok D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such infor- mation. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum require- ments of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck. G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished ^ spaces. H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper AM ok Akl FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Aw Smith College Ift Northampton, MA Am Aft piping systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose aw products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. Alk low B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System". Aft C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide". 4W Aft D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels. Aw E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. AM F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing '" regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system ,,W with said officials prior to commencing work. G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's .► rating organization and local Fire Department. Ak H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in AM this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the Alk General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for Am items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification. oft I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results Awr of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. AM AM 1 .5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS AW A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements 'k of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. to Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules Im or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect A rules otherwise. ,w B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code A Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. AIM Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. A 1 .6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS AW A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and AW AW FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 4 "ft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, ZUU1 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include the following: w. 1 . Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Sub- contractor, coordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. 2. Cutting and patching. 1 .3 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configura- tion and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and installation. C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be coordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter (I.R.Q. Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light hazard occupancy. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local �.► authority. Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid inter- ference with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations shall be subject to Architect's approval. The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic calculations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department, and (IRI) Insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 „ recommendations. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE oft� A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection w� FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 3 AM Project No. 5-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 '" Smith College A& Northampton, MA SECTION 215300 - FIRE PROTECTION „ft PART 1 - GENERAL A Aft 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .s► A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable .� parts of Division 1 , and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which AW affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically .w mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the AM work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady prog- A ress of all work under the Contract. 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK A A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and Am reasonably incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection 1 work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings, including, but not am limited to, the following: AW 1 . Fire protection service piping from the existing service line located in the existing basement of Haven House. 2. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building sprinkler system located in the basement and Ak attic. 3. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and AW materials required for his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the project. 4. Existing double check valve backflow preventer assembly on the existing service line shall remain and be rebuilt. A 5. Existing dry pipe alarm check valve station shall remain. Replace A? existing pumper connection with new 4" Stortz fitting. Aft 6. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete by or interfering with new construction. Ak 7. Disconnect and remove all existing heads and install new chrome plated, quick responses heads in all spaces. 8. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter (St. Paul Travelers Insurance Company c/o One Tower Square, 7GS, Hartford, CT. (Attn: Mr. David M. Goush) 1 -860-954-6171 for ,w review and approval. 9. Remove existing pipe schedule system and install a new " hydraulically designed dry pipe system using galvanized piping. Ak AM I. A& FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 2 AW 4% Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Ak Smith College Aft Northampton, MA � INDEX SECTION 215300 - FIRE PROTECTION w PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 FIRE SAFINGS 1 .3 SYSTEMS DESIGN 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.4 FINAL CLOSEOUT 1 .5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 1 .6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 .7 PRODUCTS 1 .8 SUBMITTALS 1 .9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 1 .10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1 .1 2 PRODUCT HANDLING �r. 1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1 .14 WORK CONCEALED 1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1.16 GUARANTEE 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND Oft PRODUCTS 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS Ak AM Aft ok FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 1 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. AM 2. Mat Size: See Allowances. Aft 2.2 FABRICATION "*"` A A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise AW indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where AM joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. AM PART 3 - EXECUTION Ok ASK 3.1 EXAMINATION AW 3.2 INSTALLATION 4M A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations AM indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns. ..k Am END OF SECTION 124813 • AW 4W A .W AW Am Aft,. AW .m AM Aft A Am Am Aw AM AW A ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813 2 A look Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 "f Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL Ak Ak 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS �w A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. ALLOWANCES: 1. The Contractor is instructed to carry an allowance of S40 per sq. yd. for walk-off mats. 2. The allowance for first floor carpet is equal to the allowance for entrance mats and the Aft two may be used interchangeably when determining final product selections. Ow 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Entrance mats for direct glue-down installation. 2. Loose-laid entrance mats. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Maintenance Data: For floor mats to include in maintenance manuals. w�► 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the * U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 4% PART 2 -PRODUCTS 4^ ,40 2.1 ENTRANCE MATS A. Carpet-Type Mats: Polypropylene carpet bonded to 1/8- to 1/4-inch- thick, flexible vinyl backing to form mats 3/8 or 7/16 inch thick with nonraveling edges. ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813 1 AU Oft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 .ft Smith College Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION low 1^ 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face. B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. C. Install cabinets level and plumb to a tolerance of 1 /8 inch in 8 feet. ., .� D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. low 1 . Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not AW less than 24 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. AM Aw 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A A. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings A* and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as 41� recommended by manufacturer. AM B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory- A' applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. A10P' AW AW END OF SECTION 123530 AW I AW AM 4W RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123530 As 6 4 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA W D. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid-wood stiles and rails, 3/4 inch thick, with 1 /4- inch- thick, veneer-faced plywood center panels. E. Face Frames: 3/4-by-1 -5/8-inch solid wood. F. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Wood veneer. G. Cabinet End Construction: 1 /2-inch- thick plywood. H. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms: 1 /2-inch- thick plywood, fully supported by and secured in rabbets in end panels, front frame (if any), and back rail. I. Wall-Hung-Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch- thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails. J. Base-Unit Back Panels: 1 /8-inch- thick hardboard fastened to rear edge of "ft end panels and to top and bottom rails. K. Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1 -1 /4-inch solid wood mortised and fastened into face frame. L. Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1 . join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. 2. Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 1 /2-inch- thick solid wood or 3/8-inch- „ , thick plywood. 3. Bottoms: 1 /4-inch- thick hardboard. M. Shelves: 3/4-inch- thick particleboard or 5/8-inch- thick plywood. N. joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners. Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends and dividers with mechanical fasteners. W Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels. 'M 0. Factory Finishing: Finish cabinets at factory. Defer only final touchup until Aft after installation. RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123530 5 0^ Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 r Smith College Northampton, MA A* a. Edge band exposed edges with minimum 1 /8-inch- thick, solid- wood edging of same species as face veneer. A AM D. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1 . Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects. Same species as exposed surfaces or stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces. "" 2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with Grade C faces and not less than W Grade 3 backs of same species as faces. Face veneers of same species as exposed surfaces or stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium- density fiberboard; or hardboard. AW 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AW A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA Al 56.9, of type, '" size, style, material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Pulls: Wire pulls. AM C. Hinges: Pivot (knife) hinges. D. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to low prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing AW rollers; and complying with BHMA Al 56.9, Type B05011 or B05091 . A* .w 2.3 CABINETS Aft AM A. Basis of Design Product: The design for cabinets is based on HomeCrest AW Cabinetry. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named AM product or a comparable product by one of the following: Im 1 . Windsor Square AW B. Face Style: Reveal overlay; door and drawer faces partially cover cabinet fronts. Ak AW C. Cabinet Style: Face Frame. , RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123530 4 ..k w► Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. C. Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS AW 2.1 CABINET MATERIALS Aft A. Basis of Design: Omega Cabinets, Dynasty near-custom. 1 . Richfield B. General: 1 . Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 3. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content. 4. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1 , made with adhesive containing no urea w� formaldehyde. 5. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 , Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. '* 6. Hardboard: AHA Al 35.4, Class 1 Tempered. �► C. Exposed Materials: 1 . Exposed Wood Species: Maple. a. Select materials for compatible color and grain. Do not use two adjacent exposed surfaces that are noticeably dissimilar in color, Aft grain, figure, or natural character markings. Aw b. Staining and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's AM full range. low 2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects. M01 3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with Grade A faces and Grade C backs of same species as faces. RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123530 3 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Am Smith College Northampton, MA Am B. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, low details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, I^ hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and A cutouts for plumbing fixtures. AM - C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. AW 1 . Wood-veneered panels with transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each species. 2. Solid wood with transparent finish, 50 sq. in., for each species. 3. Exposed hardware, for each type of item. Ak ow D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of casework certifying that low products furnished comply with requirements. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,,,M A. Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a Aw� single manufacturer. lwt B. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards: Ak 1 . Cabinets: KCMA A161 .1 . AW a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and .. showing compliance with the above standard. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AM A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is ,R enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and AM maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the AM remainder of the construction period. Am B. Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other A construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Aw Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to AW A RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123530 A* 2 AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA +w� SECTION 123530 - RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Am A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Ak Section. Ak Mk 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Kitchen cabinets. w 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. B. Semiexposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as "semiexposed." C. Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as "concealed." 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1 . Cabinets. 2. Cabinet hardware. RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123530 1 Aft A w. Am Alk A .ems .dMk ANk Alft A* AW A A Aak Ask .w .w- AOk .r. AM AM ow AM AW 'ooh W 1 T AM low AM Ak AM A A Aft AW A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with Ak requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. AW 3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of Aft glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. Aft Ak 3.3 ADJUSTING Aft A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer,that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial ,�► Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, + before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 122413 �ww AM A. "ft ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA .�. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ROLLER SHADES .w A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following: AM 1. Andrew Dutton Company, Avon, MA. .ft B. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: Am A 1. Panta 1202. AM C. Shade Band Material: 4 ply PVC-coated fiberglass. 1. Width: As required for window size. 2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 3. Material Solar-Optical Properties: Room darkening ..� 4. Bottom Hem: Straight. D. Shade Operation: Manual; with spring roller lift operator. .W 1. Pull: Manufacturer's standard finger-ring engaged pull. 4W ^. 2.2 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION 4 A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a AM flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the 4M roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade. Ak B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, AW measured at 74 deg F: 4W 1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch AW from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each low, shade is installed. AW C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting AM roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated. A D. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal AM noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to A supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use. A AW Am ANW Am .M ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 Am 2 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Aft A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY �.. A. This Section includes roller shades. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and A*^ operating instructions. '"" B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated. Or. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. AM a. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches square, with specified treatments applied. Mark face of material. 4W C. Product Test Reports: For each type of roller shade. Ak ,�.. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location Ok of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. ww 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty Aft finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. Aft Am B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate ''ft measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. ++ ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 1 A► Alk AM AW AM ow AO Awl Am 4m Am Aft Ank Ak ,A Ak AM ,M AM AM 4m A AM Awl AW AM Am Aft Am AM AM ,Mw ..W Alk AOM A .W ..k 4W Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 102800 Ak Aft Ak Ak Aft Ak Ak Ak Ak ate, Ak TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 7 Am A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . Product: B-224 , 2. Location: Provide 1 per floor. A 3. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rag hooks beneath AM shelf. 4. Length: 24 inches. 5. Hooks: Three. '" 6. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. Im 7. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). Im .m a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel. ,W 2.6 FABRICATION .W Aft A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges .m rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. AM Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. .w ,W PART 3 - EXECUTION Aft 3.1 INSTALLATION .R, AW A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit .. manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. AM Im B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 IV, when AM tested according to method in ASTM F 446. Im A 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING AW AW A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or , defective items. Ak B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. AM AM TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 6 AW 4W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 4ft Smith College Northampton, MA w 1 . Size: Minimum 12 inches wider than opening by 72 inches high. 2. Material: Nylon-reinforced vinyl, minimum 10-oz. or 0.008-inch- thick vinyl, with integral antibacterial agent. ,,,m 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 4. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem. 5. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet. *�+ D. Soap Dish: 1 . Product: B-973 2. Description: Without washcloth bar. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Material and Finish: Polished Chrome on cast bronze.. Aft Aft Ok Aft E. Robe Hooks: 1 . Product: Ives 583 2. Description: Stainless-steel, double pronged 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless Steel, MB26D .�► 2.4 SHOWER DOORS A. Supplier: F.W. Webb 1 . Product: Owner's standard unit with opal glass. 2.5 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES Ak A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Ak one of the following: 1 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Mop and Broom Holder: 4,w TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 ,� 5 AW AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Aft Northampton, MA AW .W 1) Provide one per Shower. Aft Aft C. Grab Bars: Straight, length as indicated. AW 1) Provide where indicated. Ak C. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (SND): Ak 1 . Product: Rubbermaid 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. Am 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing disposal-opening cover. Am 4. Receptacle: Removable. AW 5. Material and Finish: Molded plastic, ivory. A& D. Mirror Unit: "' 1 . Frame: Stainless-steel channel. AM a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. 2. Mounting: .. a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, for concealed mounting flush with .� wall. AM 3. Size: As indicated on Drawings. A AW 2.3 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES A AW A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Aw one of the following: Ak 1 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. ,qt B. Shower Curtain Rod: AM .M, 1 . Product: B-6047 AM 2. Description: 1-1 /4-inch OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-inch- thick AM stainless steel. Im 3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed *M fasteners. ,k 4. Finish: No. 4 (satin). ,t C. Shower Curtain: '.' A* TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 Am 4 AM �w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA ■► C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness. Aft D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. w 'f'" E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized ,k after fabrication. Ak F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate ** service). Aft H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. Rubbermaid, Inc. B. Grab Bar including Towel Bars: 1 . Mounting: Flanges with exposed fasteners. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish. Aft 3. Outside Diameter: a. Towel Bars and Shaving Bars: 1 -1 /4 inches b. Grab Bars: 1 -1 12 inches. 4. Configuration and Length: a. Towel Bars: Straight, 28 inches long. 1) Provide one per Shower / Bathtub b. Shaving Bars: Straight, 12 inches long. Am TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 3 AM Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College IM Northampton, MA .W B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations AM by room of each accessory required. AM 1 . Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 .5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. .► A B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required Ak to prevent delaying the Work. Aft A 1 .6 WARRANTY lak A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer Jft agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that ' fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. AW Am 1 . Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. I,.,,, AM PART 2 - PRODUCTS A* A. 2.1 MATERIALS A* AM A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal AM thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Aft B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat Ak products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. AM ,ft TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 AW 2 AW 4W .k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 '"" Smith College k. Northampton, MA Mk Ak SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 4•• Ak PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and .�.. Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY low A. This Section includes the following: Ak 4k 1 . Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. A^ 3. Shower Doors 4. Custodial accessories. B. Owner-Furnished Material: 1 . Paper Towel Dispensers. 2. Soap Dispensers. 3. Toilet Tissue Dispensers Aw M, C. Related Sections include the following: Ak '"k 1 .3 SUBMITTALS Ak ok A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: AM 1 . Construction details and dimensions. Aft 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. "* 5. Manufacturer's warranty. 4 ok TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 Ak oft 1 4w A Aft AM AW A AO Am, 4M AOW Aw AM 4m Ak ,Are 4m. Alk AW AW AIW Alk AMIW 4 AIR, wW AW APW AIM, AOM AMW AM AM AOW AM AW .wk AM AM A, Ah Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 oft Project College Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 4W Ak A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install 4w units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with �. manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1 . Maximum Clearances: Ak Ok a. Pilasters and Panels: 112 inch. ak b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 4► 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less 4. than two brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Aft 4k a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or the joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two 'M fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so Oft tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed Oft position. AM Aft 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to «. manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in- swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. AM Ark, END OF SECTION 102113 Aft TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 5 AM AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 .M Smith College Northampton, MA .W C. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant Am anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling ** adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above .m finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure AW without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage. ,. D. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard .M corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to AM conceal anchorage. AW 4W E. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide in-swinging doors .0. for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide out-swinging doors with AM a minimum 32-inch- wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. Awl 1 . Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted Am to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. A 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. AW 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber- AW tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment- AM mounted accessories. Im 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out- AM swinging doors. AM 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having AM jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments AM indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. "" A. AM AM AW TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 AM 4 AW AM Ok ok Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College *f► Northampton, MA Ak a. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching Panel. E. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning. F. Overhead Cross Bracing for Ceiling-Hung Units: As recommended by •ft manufacturer and fabricated from solid polymer. Aft 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty Ak operating hardware and accessories. Ak 1 . Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear oft anodized aluminum or Stainless steel. tm B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum 4% head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. Ak C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, Ak with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt Ak applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust- ''" resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION yaw, A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant � . supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor • conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling " adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 ow 3 wm .w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Am Northampton, MA 1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS W Im A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. AM 1 . Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made Aw, without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with AIM fabricating toilet compartments without field measurements. Coordinate A* wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to ensure that AM, actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Oft low PART 2 - PRODUCTS •M Im 2.1 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS '" Aw A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by AW one of the following: A 1 . Comtec Industries. A* 2. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. Aw 3. Santana Products, Inc. AM B. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene AM (HDPE) or polypropylene (PP) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. + 1 . Color and Pattern: Two colors and patterns in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns. C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless '" steel. • D. Brackets (Fittings): .w 1 . Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel. A° 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer, Ak extruded aluminum or stainless steel. Ak Am Am TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 AM 2 AM A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA Ak 4w SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS Ak Ak PART 1 - GENERAL Ak A% 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS oft A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and IM- K Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. aft Aft 1 .2 SUMMARY .w A. This Section includes solid-polymer units as follows: *"* 1 . Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced. B. Related Sections include the following: Ak 1 . Division 10 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS Ak A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and AW finishes. Ak % B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1 . Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 1 . , Ank AM AW AIW AM 4w 4w AM Am A .W 0* .W AOW om AM .ft w.a AIW Am A AIM lak, AM AW ,■W wm. ..A AM Alk 4 .0, AtW Alk Alk AW AM 4A AOW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. END OF SECTION 099123 w ,k Aft Ak Aft ok ft Oft Aft Oft Aft Aft INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 9 AW o Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA AM D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore Im damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Aw AW 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE low 4W A. Steel Substrates: Im 1 . Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1 E. ..» .W a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. AM b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. 10 C. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semigloss). A B. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork and doors. .. Am 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T. AM a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. AM b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. Ak C. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss). AW C. Plaster Substrates (Ceilings): AW Aft. 1 . Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. ,k a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. Aw b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex Im matching topcoat. AM C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (flat). AM D. Plaster Substrates (Walls): .M 1 . Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. AW a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. Aw b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex Ak matching topcoat. AW C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (eggshell). E. Gypsum Substrates (Walls) to receive Vinyl Wall Covering: AM AW INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 Am 8 AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. ww D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: "'► 1 . Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Pipe hangers and supports. C. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. d. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Electrical Work: a. Panelboards. b. Electrical equipment with a factory-primed finish for field painting. dw, 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 7 AM A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment ,.k name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. A% C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, AW oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. .w 1 . Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible Am primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. oft D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods aw recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. E. Wood Substrates: , AM 1 . Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying AM primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. AM 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with Aw putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. A' Ab F. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured Aw and dry. Am G. Gypsum Substrates: Do not begin painting until compound is cured. AW AW 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. ••k 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar 000, exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, „% and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. A. Aw INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 AM 6 „m .k 04 w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA Oft 2.7 ALKYD PAINTS A. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5). 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2. PART 3 - EXECUTION ,w. ,k 3.1 EXAMINATION a�w A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. Ak A B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1 . Wood: 15 percent. 2. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1 . Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 .� 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA AW 1 . VOC Content: E Range of El . " 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1 . AW A B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45. law 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E1 . 4 1w, C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer ,,,t for use in paint systems indicated. AW A 2.4 METAL PRIMERS "" .. A. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. A%� 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E2. AW 2.5 WOOD PRIMERS Aw A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. Aw 1 . VOC Content: E Range of El . ,� 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1 . .w 2.6 LATEX PAINTS Ab AW A. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Flat): MPI #143 (Gloss Level 1). Aw 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4. Aft B. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI #145 (Gloss Level 3). 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E3. .. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5. A ow C. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5). ,,k, . 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. W . INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 A* 4 a Ok oft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ft Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS •.�► A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Benjamin Moore & Co. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: + , 1 . Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. „ 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in .� writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these w requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1 . Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than Oft 1 .0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4W 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS �.. A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 Ak 3 AW Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 ow Smith College Northampton, MA AW C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and AM gloss of topcoat indicated. AW 1 . 12 inch by 12 inch sample on actual substrate. AM 2. Label each Sample for location and application area. ,.w ,tk D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1 . Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use 40 same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Aok AW 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: �* low 1 . Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Alk Approved Products List." AW 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint `W systems indicated. .. Im .., 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING AM A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas AM with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. AW 1 . Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and AON residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. AM 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS M.l mh A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. .w Aw B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet AW surfaces. AW A .. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 AM 2 4W, AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING .� PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this �. Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems AW on the following interior substrates: 1 . Steel. 2. Wood. 3. Plaster. 4. Gypsum Wallboard B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers ,.. specified in this Section. 2. Division 08 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this Section. ®. 3. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates. 40 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A* A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. s B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. 1 . Submit full color wheel of manufacturers formulated colors. 2. Submit ready mix color charts for each product, Aft Aw 40K INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 1 mow, ,.W ,k Aft Am AM A .MP A A AOWI .w A 4m Aft AAW ANA wm. ,f. Am Aak Alk AM A AW, AM AAW Alm ,W .rrw .M.' 4w Ab ow W .W AW AIW a Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by ok washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. oft D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 4^ defaced painted surfaces. Aft, 4w 3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE Aft A. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork,trim and doors. 4ft 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.3L. Ak a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior latex(gloss). B. Dimension Lumber Substrates,Nontraffic Surfaces: Including board siding and wood ceilings. I Latex System: MPI EXT 6.2M. 4ft a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. Aft b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. Am C. Topcoat: Exterior latex(flat). AW C. Dimension Lumber Substrates,Traffic Surfaces: Including lumber decking and stairs. Am I. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.5E. 4ft -4ft a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/extenior latex floor and porch(low gloss). C. Topcoat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch(low gloss). 1) With additive to increase skid resistance of painted surface. go A% END OF SECTION 099113 Oft 4M Ak ow EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 5 Aft 4W A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA AW 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and A& conditions. ..k 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. AM AM 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and AW incompatible paints and encapsulants. Aft 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required AM to produce paint systems indicated. ,O,„ D. Wood Substrates: Ak,, .M 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view,and dust off. AM 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. A* 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic low wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. AW 3.3 APPLICATION 4M Aw A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. ,ft 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. AW 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final A^ installation,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of AW same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. AW C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film Am has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. ow D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, , , roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. Aw EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 '" 4 Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint ,O, system indicated. k Ak 2.4 WOOD PRIMERS Wk A. Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI #6. 04 Ak 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. Ak 2.5 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS A. Exterior Latex(Flat): MPI#10(Gloss Level 1). Ak 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. „f„ B. Exterior Latex(Gloss): MPI#119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg). AW 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. Ak 2.6 FLOOR COATINGS Am A. Interior/Exterior Latex Floor and Porch Paint (Low Gloss): MPI#60 (maximum Gloss Level 3). Ak Ak 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Aft A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. 4* B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 4& 1. Wood: 15 percent. oft C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 ,f„ 3 Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved .. Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Am Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 40 A 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING AW A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient AM temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. "" .w 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. Aft 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. w. Aw PART 2 -PRODUCTS AW •.. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the oft following: AM 1. Benjamin Moore&Co. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. A 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL Aw A. Material Compatibility: Ak 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another 'm and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. AW 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. Aw B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. dit Ab, EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 2 •� ••* A% Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Ak A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following A. exterior substrates: 1. Wood. 'Am B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. AM Am B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. A% C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat 40 indicated. O., 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same Aft designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Oft Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. oft 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: Ak EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 Aft 1 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 ..� Smith College Northampton, MA Am E. Install accessories in locations indicated. "` A. F. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, blisters, and other A defects. AM G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Ak AM: H. Clean and prime all surfaces with silicone primer. Apply sealant to all seams, Aw joints, plumbing trim and accessories. Where panels terminate against A* substrates to receive paint finish, apply paintable sealant. „& A 3.4 CLEANING AM A* A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent AW surfaces. Aft B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. AM C. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, fixture trims, and similar items. D. Remove all excess and waste materials. W Ak Alk END OF SECTION 097500 AW Aft,, low AW A, AW 1W A., Aw ..w Im A* AW PVC WALL COVERINGS 097500 `M 4 •w AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College """° Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION Aw 3.1 EXAMINATION Ak .k A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with ,m, requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and Ak other conditions affecting performance of work. Ak B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Ak Ak 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. w�► *W B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, 4W including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1 . Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and AW concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut, scribe and fit PVC wall-covering sheets to heights indicated. Provide trim pieces at outside corners and wall caps. �.► C. Where panels extend full height of partition between adjoining spaces, extend 0M wall covering over top of wall and finish with trim piece. D. Lap adjacent panels a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm). Construct horizontal " joints to shed water. PVC WALL COVERINGS 097500 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA om are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its .m intended use. Aft AW B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 AWN fc is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. l.. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PVC WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS �tt A. PVC Wall Covering: AWN A"k 1 . Manufacturer: Universal Bath Products. „■, a. Product: High-molecular poly-vinyl chloride sheets 0.090 inches ,ft, thick. b. Color: Bone �A C. Accessories: Mt 1) Trim shapes: Standard trim for outside and inside corners. 2) Shampoo / Soap shelf. Aft 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall AW covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall- AW covering manufacturer. Ak B. Sealant: Mildew-resistant Silicone. ,, 1 . Product: Dow Corning 784, 786 or GE-SCS-1702 , A Awk k PVC WALL COVERINGS 097500 2 Aft ,W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ' Northampton, MA SECTION 097500 - PVC WALL COVERINGS Am PART 1 - GENERAL Am Ow 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . PVC wall covering. AW 2. PVC Accessories. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS * A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical k characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance ., characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of PVC wall-covering. Indicate seams and termination points for each type of shower and bathtub surround. ±�► C. Samples for Coordination with other Finishes: 4 inch by 4 inch samples of sheet product. D. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. Ak 1 .4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions 4W -oft PVC WALL COVERINGS 097500 f 1 AIW AOW A AM AM AM AM AOW AW AW Alk ,OW Aok AW AOW AW AW Aft ANW AM A. w Aft OW AAk AM A Alk AW AOW AIW AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Aft Smith College Northampton, MA H. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. • C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 097200 fir► ft sw 40 WALL COVERINGS 097200 5 AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1 . Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and AM concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. AW 2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall-covering AM manufacturer. 3. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. AM AM D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and AM eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. Aw E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the AM installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. A 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where „M more stringent requirements apply. Ak B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at Ak partition breaks and corners. 1 ,.114 C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. A* 4W D. Install reversing every other strip. AW E. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and AM no visible shrinkage. Aft F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 6 inches from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. low No horizontal seams are permitted. A G. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, Ak and other defects. AW WALL COVERINGS 097200 AM 4 AM AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College "" Northampton, MA 1 . Vinyl Wall-Covering Standards: Provide products complying with the following: 4^ a. CFFA-W-101 for Type II, Medium -Duty products. 2. Width: 54 inches. 3. Repeat: Random. 4. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Match Architect's samples. 4k 4W 2.2 ACCESSORIES Ak A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with Ak specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer, and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in ow Division 09 Section "InteriorPainting"and recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer for intended substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. "* WALL COVERINGS 097200 3 A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Im Smith College Northampton, MA AW 1 . Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: 0^ a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. AM 1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS , AW A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 ,ft. fc is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. „W C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less Am than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or AW curing. Aw 1 .6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Aft, 1 . Wall-Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount of Aft each type installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS AW 2.1 WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS AW A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number Oft or dye lot. AWA B. Vinyl Wall Coverings (WCA & WCB): Owner will furnish wall coverings for contractor to install. WALL COVERINGS 097200 2 .k AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 .. Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL l .l RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this �. Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY w. A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Vinyl wall covering. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 09 Section "Interior Painting"for priming wall surfaces. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS Ak A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. k B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of wall covering indicated. C. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings and adhesives with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. .r► WALL COVERINGS 097200 1 A. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and .r, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and 00, nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. o AW D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed AW obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. Ak� E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked AM for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 4W AW 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING AW look A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: AW AM 1 . Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. " 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. ' A B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of A, Indoor Installations." low C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of A* equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer. 4W AW END OF SECTION 096816 AMW Oft I" ,.. AM A& A SHEET CARPETING 096816 AW 6 AW .W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1 /8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1 /32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. +► D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before Ak installing carpet. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1 . Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct ' Glue-Down Installation." 2. Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11 , "Attached-Cushion Installations." „ B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of �. carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. Oft SHEET CARPETING 096816 5 .k:. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AW Smith College Northampton, MA A" 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES ,.w AN A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic- low cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet .. manufacturer. .R o 1 . VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for AW VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116: AM a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h. .lk. b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h. J C. 2-Ethyl-l -Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h. .M Iwo C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by lak carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. Jft D. Underlayment: Multiply underlayment as Specified in Division 6. A Ak* AM PART 3 - EXECUTION Aft 3.1 EXAMINATION low A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for I" compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. Aw A* B. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 1 . Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in AM Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." AM 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may AW interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface. «b AM SHEET CARPETING 096816 ..t, 4 Ift an Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 tw. Smith College `f Northampton, MA C. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1 .7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Ak W„ 1 . Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to Ak unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. O► 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty A period. 1 . Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories. 2. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 3. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. 4. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Ok PART 2 - PRODUCTS o ow 2.1 MATERIALS: Ak A. Carpet materials will be selected by Architect SHEET CARPETING 096816 3 Am. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 ""' Smith College Northampton, MA lot,. 1 . Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample. At, 410" C. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: AM 1 . Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. ...x 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet and carpet cushion. apt, 10100, D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. ..,, Aft 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE at A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical logo products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency ,,,,% acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. /pt .f► 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ..N ..a. A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS , A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." ,NN,. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is ow complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are Al maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended , use. AW SHEET CARPETING 096816 2 4M Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4w SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING Aft PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 04 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and ,M, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this ... Section. 4" B. ALLOWANCES: `% 1 . The Contractor is instructed to carry the following allowances for carpet. a. $40 per sq. yd. for first floor carpet. b. $35 per sq. yd. for second and third floor carpet. 2. The allowance for first floor carpet is equal to the allowance for entrance mats and the two may be used interchangeably when determining final product selections. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: �w. 1 . Carpet with integral cushion for direct-glue application. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS ok A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate: 1 . Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Carpet Cushion: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written Oft data on physical characteristics and durability. Am B. Samples for verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. SHEET CARPETING 096816 1 ,�w 4" At, 40W AAA, AAwi ARI A w, AM At, A04, A/'M, AM As, AMs Aikr Al R, Af9a AM9s Aft Awk 406 AR do}, ASR A*% AN#. 40% .it ASR AW* AIR Aia ASE Aft Ads .AMR. AAtk Alb AMA, A!w Aws nw� Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover floor file until Substantial Completion. Aft END OF SECTION 096519 4W Aft 4W 4W 4W Am 4a oft Ok Ak Ak wA Ak RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 'A% 5 4w AM, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ' Northampton, MA owl C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching AM, compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. .00, D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. IM, 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed AN, at least 48 hours in advance of installation. , E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. tea- 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION AW A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. Aft, B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor Ant, offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. AW .t, 1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated. 400, C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as AM manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. ..n. 1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. AW D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent A04, fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets,pipes, outlets, and door frames. Aft E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles '"* to center of door openings. AM., F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting AW by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, AW: nonstaining marking device. 40t. G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion joint covers, M• and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. .s H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 4 AM Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ^* ► Northampton, MA 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. ,,f, B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate a� conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Rubber Floor Tile Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. a� C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. .a�. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. Oft B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and Aft that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Aft 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion'Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed anw with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 „�,, 3 AM AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College "" Northampton, MA Aw 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING low A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient A, temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 AW deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. AW 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AW A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than .M 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 40W 2. During installation. A0„ 3. 48 hours after installation. Aft B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by ,O, manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. 4 C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. Am D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. A. 40, E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting,have been completed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER FLOOR TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: 1. Endura Rubber Flooring, a division of Burke Industries Inc.;. 2. Nora Rubber Flooring,Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.;. A B. Hardness: Manufacturer's standard hardness. 000, C. Wearing Surface: Textured. 4W Am, D. Thickness: 0.125 inch. ,. E. Size: 12 by 12 inches. Aft F. Stair Treads & Risers: Manufacturers matching integral tread and riser to flooring tile for 4° waterfall stairs and treads only for existing stairs with nosing. Aft G. Seaming Method: Standard. A Alk H. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. A. AW AW RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 ' 2 AW A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AM Smith College Ak Northampton, MA Ak SECTION 096519 -RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL AM 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Ak Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rubber floor tile. B. Related Sections: Am 1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings. 2. Division 09 Section "Resilient Sheet Flooring" for resilient sheet floor coverings. 3. Division 09 Section"Linoleum Flooring" for linoleum floor coverings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are " competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by ,nom, manufacturer for installation techniques required. oft B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class 1, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. +nw RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Im A. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of AM floor coverings. AW B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering 'A`' installation: Aw. 1 . Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during AM remainder of construction period. Im D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor 40, coverings before applying liquid floor polish. AW 1 . Apply two coat(s). .M E. After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to .W disappear, cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. , END OF SECTION 096516.13 A AW A 4W Ak.,. A AW Ak AW AM A LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13 6 , ,. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA w 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL * A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. B. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces door reveals, closets, and similar w openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use „ chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. E. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor covering installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers + * and to cover perimeters. F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. , w G. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding .�► bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering " surfaces. 3.4 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Unroll sheet- floorings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. B. Lay out sheet floorings as follows: 1 . Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. * 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. 5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process (stove bar marks). C. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove linoleum floor covering 4 inches up vertical surfaces. Support floor covering at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13 5 ow A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 "" Smith College Northampton, MA "w .p. C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of linoleum floor covering manufacturer. 1 . Match linoleum floor covering. 4MI, D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories: A° 1 . Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by manufacturer. 2. Cove-Base Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by manufacturer. E. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. 4w.0 PART 3 - EXECUTION "'' IM, 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been . ,. corrected. AW 3.2 PREPARATION AM, A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and Aw patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and A* smooth substrate. Aft C. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1 . Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they " will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings AW immediately before installation. .:. LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13 ''"`'` 4 „o, M Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College '* Northampton, MA B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 24 hours after floor covering installation. E. Provide protective cover for floors subject to traffic until Substantial Completion F. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS wf 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: oft 1 . Forbo Flooring, Inc.; Dual or Real, as selected by Architect. 2.2 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING A. Sheet Flooring: ASTM F 2034, Type I, linoleum sheet with backing. 1 . Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length by not less than 78 inches "* wide. B. Seaming Method: Heat welded. �w C. Thickness: 0.10 inch. D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. Oft 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. oft B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and substrate conditions indicated. 1 . Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when * calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13 3 ww Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA E. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6- by-9-inch sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required. AM A 1 . Heat-Welding Bead: Include manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but „W not less than 9 inches long, of each color required. Ak F. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each floor covering product and welding bead Ak color and pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to rigid backing and prepared by Installer "'" for this Project. lat G. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. At.. AW 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AW la. A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor AW covering installation. oak 1 . Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained AW or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required. ook B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. IM Mil 1 . Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. ,ow, 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range A recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1 . Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces. 2. Sheet Flooring: Store rolls upright. AM 4*. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ..,' .40, A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, A but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: A 1 . 72 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 72 hours after installation. „ . LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13 ,M 2 .W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Aft Smith College !� Northampton, MA SECTION 096516.13 - LINOLEUM FLOORING 4ft PART 1 - GENERAL Aft .ft 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Aft A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Linoleum sheet flooring. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with linoleum floor covering. 2. Division 09 Section "Static-Control Resilient Flooring" for resilient floor coverings designed to control electrostatic discharge. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS !* A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1 . Product Data for Credit MR 6.0: For linoleum flooring, including printed statement of costs for each rapidly renewable material. '"" 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1 : For adhesives, including printed Aft statement of VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1 . Show details of special patterns. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated. 1 . Include similar Samples of installation accessories involving color .�. selection. LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13 1 Am- 4W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA .0 H. Seamless Installation: AM: A 1 . Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use AM welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. Aw 104 I. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 4 inches up vertical surfaces. Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt lak at top against cap strip. ,sk AM 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ''t .m A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of ,ow floor coverings. AW B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering .f, installation: AW AW 1 . Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. „W 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. IM, 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. AW C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage At from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during "w° remainder of construction period. AW IM, D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor ,M covering before applying liquid floor polish. ,W 1 . Apply one coat. AW E. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. .W END OF SECTION 096516 AM A 4 Im AW RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 6 AW 10, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ok Northampton, MA E. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where Ak they are to be installed. 4ft 1 . Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. *" C. Lay out floor coverings as follows: 1 . Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. Aft 4. Avoid cross seams. Ak +� D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Aw F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 ,, 5 A.� Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION AW Aw. 3.1 EXAMINATION AW A A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements AW for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of AM the Work. AM B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other Am requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. A"k Ift C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been Am corrected. Awl A 3.2 PREPARATION Ate_ AM A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure AW adhesion of floor coverings. Am B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. "" AM 1 . Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and AV* hardeners. Am 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using Am mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use AW solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by 'W manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4 4 C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and AW patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and AM smooth substrate. AM D. Install underlayment with minimum number of joints. Avoid using sheets less Ak than two feet wide. AM AW RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 AW 4 Am. ... Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College *!, Northampton, MA �, C. Color B: Suite bathrooms. B. Unbacked Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, 0.080 inch thick. C. Wearing Surface: Smooth. D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer. E. Seaming Method: Heat welded. F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or .� approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Wood Underlayment: Multi-ply plywood underlayment 1 . Thickness: 1 /4 inch. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. D. Seamless-Installation Accessories: 1 . Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to Ak contrast with floor covering. E. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories: �w 1 . Cove Strip: 1 -inch radius provided or approved by manufacturer. 2. Retention strip: Metal clip designed to hold sheet in place at top of cove base F. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer and approved by Owner. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 awn 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College .� Northampton, MA 4 B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical •■ products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. AM AW 1 . Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. AM Im 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 4W A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from Im the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range Im recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 Im deg F. Store rolls upright. at AW 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ,k A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, AM but not less than 70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive floor AM coverings during the following time periods: A 1 . 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. Am C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. D. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have ' been completed. A PART 2 - PRODUCTS Ask 1W 2.1 VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERING A A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: .ft 1 . Forbo Flooring, Inc.: Smaragd. .W .. a. Provide two colors, as selected by Architect. AW b. Color A: Public bathrooms. AM Im RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 to 2 A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Aft PART 1 - GENERAL Ak 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Aft A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ww 1 .2 SUMMARY o►, Ak A. Section Includes: Ak 1 . Vinyl sheet floor covering, without backing. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. .� B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated. 1 . For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, of each color. C. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance .► manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming method indicated. +w* 1 . Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 Oft 1 .w» Ak nw Ak 4w Al* Alb, AW AW ow 40 Alm AW Awk A 4 Aw AM Ak ,m, Aft AW .w, Aw Aft Oft ww Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA + !► 1 . Comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." B. Fill and repair wood flooring seams and defects. C. Apply floor-finish materials in number of coats recommended by finish Ak manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than one coat of floor Ak sealer and [three] <Insert number> finish coats. 1 . Apply stains to achieve an even color distribution matching approved Samples. ok 2. For water-based finishes, use finishing methods recommended by finish Mft manufacturer to minimize grain raise. D. Cover wood flooring before finishing. E. Do not cover wood flooring after finishing until finish reaches full cure, and not before seven days after applying last finish coat. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of heavy kraft paper or other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film that might cause condensation. 4^ 1 . Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over kraft-paper-covered 14k wood flooring. Protect flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring. END OF SECTION 096400 4w WOOD FLOORING 096400 5 A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AM Smith College Northampton, MA 4W 1 . Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements AM specified in other Sections. AW 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been AW corrected. Am AW 3.2 PREPARATION I 4w A. Grind high spots and fill low spots on substrates to produce a maximum 1 /8- .w inch deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot straight edge. Im 1 . Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to '"t manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions 4W in substrates. low B. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product A, installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, Am carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory AM conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION low AM A. Comply with flooring manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: AM Wood Flooring." B. Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of Ah. flooring of not less than 1 /4 inch. 4W C. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: Where strip or plank flooring is nailed to solid-wood subfloor, install flooring over a layer of asphalt-saturated felt. D. Solid-Wood, Strip Flooring: Blind nail or staple flooring to substrate. Ak Ak 3.4 FIELD FINISHING A' Ift, A. Machine-sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding-machine Im marks that would be noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying finish. Aft WOOD FLOORING 096400 4 , A o Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Oft, Northampton, MA 4W PART 2 - PRODUCTS Ak 4% 2.1 FIELD-FINISHED WOOD FLOORING A. Solid-Wood, Strip Flooring: Kiln dried to 6 to 9 percent maximum moisture content, tongue and groove and end matched, and with backs channeled (kerfed) for stress relief. 1 . Species and Grade: MFMA-RL Second and Better Grade hard maple. 2. Cut: Plain sawn. 3. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 4. Face Width: 2-1 /4 inches. S. Lengths: Random-length strips complying with applicable grading rules. B. Finish System: Use product provided by Owner. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: ASTM D 4869, Type II. B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic- cement-based formulation approved by wood flooring manufacturer. Am C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." D. Trim: In same species and grade as wood flooring, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Saddles: 112" high, tapered on each side and routed at bottom of one side to accommodate wood flooring and adjacent material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of wood flooring. WOOD FLOORING 096400 3 a� Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AW Smith College Northampton, MA '" C. Maple Flooring: Comply with applicable MFMA grading rules for species, *W grade, and cut. Aw 4 1 . Certification: Provide flooring that carries MFMA mark on each bundle or AW piece. AW Am 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING AI A. Deliver wood flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles. AIM B. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood A• flooring until after concrete, masonry, plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet Aw work is complete and dry. lift C. Store wood flooring materials in a dry, warm, ventilated, weathertight location. Aft Aw, 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS As A. Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood flooring installation, is continuous through installation, and continues not less than seven days after wood flooring installation. *ft 1 . Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between AM, 65 and 75 deg F and relative humidity planned for building occupants in ,ow spaces to receive wood flooring during the conditioning period. � 2. Wood Flooring Conditioning: Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, no later than the beginning of the conditioning period. AM a. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to relative humidity of, and is '" at same temperature as, space where it is to be installed. Am b. Open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize 4ft immediately on moving flooring into spaces in which it will be *W installed. A0, AW B. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature Jok planned for building occupants. 4W A AW AM WOOD FLOORING 096400 A 2 Im AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Oft Smith College Aft Northampton, MA SECTION 096400 - WOOD FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. +, 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes field-finished wood flooring. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A* A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of wood flooring and accessory, with Ak stain color and finish required, approximately 12 inches long and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work and showing the full range of normal color and texture variations expected. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For field-finished wood flooring, obtain each species, grade, and cut of wood from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA's "Official Flooring Grading Rules" for species, grade, and cut. 1 . Certification: Provide flooring that carries NOFMA grade stamp on each bundle or piece. "' * WOOD FLOORING 096400 AO Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA AM 3.4 CLEANING AW A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge Im moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. Ak END OF SECTION 095113 ,.. low 4 AM AW AW .M AW .e 4ft. AW Am AM AW nw AM AM ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 Im 8 ... Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1 . Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other uw objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of w�► trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1 . Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners * accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1 . Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. b. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space. w► 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. " ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 7 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Am B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized, G60, Steel Suspension AM System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, hot- dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation, with prefinished, cold-rolled, 15/16-inch- wide, aluminum caps on flanges. ,00. 1 . Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. Am 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Face Finish: Painted white. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated '""" or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and , penetrations; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. ' 1 . Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel ,W edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. ' AM 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. AW 3.2 PREPARATION Ak A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance „k border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half- width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. A*► AM 3.3 INSTALLATION a A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and per Aft manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." Ak ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 AM 6 Am Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA E. NRC: Not less than 0.70. Aft F. CAC: Not less than 35. w G. Edge/point Detail: Beveled, kerfed and rabbeted long edges and square, butt- ' `` on short edges. �. H. Thickness: 7/8 inch. I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL Aft A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct- hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and " finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 1 . High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high- humidity finishes are indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1 , "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1 . Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1 , "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 . Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation 3. USG Interiors, Inc. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 5 Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA AW 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR BATHROOMS (ACP-A) Aw A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that "" may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the , following: AM 1 . Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Ceramaguard. B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: AW 1 . Type and Form: Type XX, other types; described as high-density, AOF ceramic- and mineral-base panels with scrubbable finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured). A- C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.80. E. NRC: Not less than 0.55. A* F. CAC: Not less than 38. low G. Edge/joint Detail: Square. H. Thickness: 5/8 inch. Am, I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. Aft J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based. AW 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR PUBLIC SPACES (ACP-B) A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Cirrus. Ak B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1 . Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1 , nodular. 2. Pattern: E (lightly textured). `ak AM C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.85. * Ak ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 A% 4 Ak Aow Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA ,,W 1 .8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1 .9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS AW. 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. �w B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 4M Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect 4ftr from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram- negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21 . D. Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels with face and back surfaces coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21 . ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 3 ,w► Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Ak 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, AW or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to AM conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of '" Accreditation" listing the test methods specified. A, B. Source Limitations: Ak 1 . Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a * single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single '' manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer. Aft A D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: AW 1 . Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for ow Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: AW 1 .6 WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturers standard warranty for panel applications in humid Aak environments including anti-microbial treatment and resistance to mildew and Mk sag in humid environments. 1 . Warranty period: 10 years "" om 1 .7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING AW AW A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to owl Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, low humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. ow C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units A% in any way. AW A Am ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 "w 2 Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Ab 1 .2 SUMMARY Ak Am A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for Ak ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 09 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for ceilings consisting of mineral-base acoustical tiles used with concealed suspension systems, stapling, or adhesive bonding. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS ok A. AC: Articulation Class. . B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1 . Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12- inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components. C. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 0. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 A k 1 A ..f Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 .wh Smith College Northampton, MA AW C. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Smooth-troweled finish, unless otherwise 'W. indicated. A.k ..k 3.7 PROTECTION 40% 4W A. Protect installed gypsum veneer plaster from damage from weather, condensation, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. ,W, B. Remove and replace gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base panels that are Aft wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 400 .., 1 . Indications that gypsum base panels are wet or moisture damaged AW include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular M, shape. Mk 2. Indications that gypsum base panels are mold damaged include, but are �A not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. Oak END OF SECTION 092613 ANq ..>. w Ak Ak 1W AW AM ..k AW Ak AM 1^ GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 '" 10 A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. a 3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved soffits and openings. 3.5 INSTALLING JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with joint tape and embedding material to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: Reinforce joints between moisture- and mold-resistant panels with joint tape and embedding material according to panel manufacturer's written recommendations. .�w 3.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING AW A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and with veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. 1 . One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: Trowel apply base coat over substrate to uniform thickness of 1 /16 to 3/32 inch. Fill all voids and imperfections. 2. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts only metal door frames, windows, and other units, groove finish coat to eliminate spalling. 3. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if paper facing has degraded from exposure to sunlight. Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restore bonding capability to degraded paper facing according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved by Architect. B. Concealed Surfaces: Do not omit gypsum veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture, furnishings, and similar removable items. Omit veneer plaster in the *!! following areas where it will be concealed from view in the completed Work unless otherwise indicated or required to maintain fire-resistance and STC ratings: 1 . Soffit walls above suspended ceilings. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 9 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ` Northampton, MA "k 3.3 INSTALLING PANELS Im Alk A. Install gypsum base panels for veneer plaster in the following locations: Ak 1 . Regular Type: All surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: At shower and tub walls. ^w to B. Single-Layer Application: 1 . On ceilings, apply gypsum base panels before wall panels, to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. " 2. On walls, apply gypsum base panels vertically and parallel to framing, A► unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, k and minimize end joints. ASS, a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. Ak b. At stairwells and other walls higher than 30 feet, install gypsum 'ok base panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Ak ,at,. 3. On Z-furring, apply gypsum base panels vertically (parallel to framing) Mw with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. Mk C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum base panels to supports with steel drill screws. Ask D. Curved Partitions: Comply with gypsum base manufacturer's written A installation recommendations. AR Aawk 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES '"k #0� A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing Aa4 with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Trim: Install in the following locations: ''` GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 8 �k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA E. Locate edge and end joints over supports except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints, other than control joints, at corners of framed openings. F. Attach panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached ' to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Cover both sides of steel stud partition framing with panels in concealed spaces, including above ceilings, except in internally braced soffits AM 1 . Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, w► or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less alk than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. I. Wood Framing: Install panels over wood framing, with "floating" internal corner construction. Do not attach panels across the flat grain of wide- dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. "Float" panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. �►, J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths Ak around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Fastener Spacing: Comply with ASTM C 844, manufacturer's written w► recommendations, and fire-resistance-rating requirements. �w 1 . Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. along framing members for Aw wall or ceiling application. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 40 7 Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AM Smith College Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION low AW A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for A compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions , affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. AM C. Verify that mortar joints are struck flush. low Aft D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been Am corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING PANELS, GENERAL ,ow A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Apply according to ASTM C 844 unless A manufacturer's written recommendations are more stringent. AW low 1 . Do not allow gypsum base to degrade from exposure to sunlight as AW evidenced by fading of paper facing. „W 2. Erection Tolerance: No more than 1 /16-inch offsets between planes of gypsum base panels, and 1 /8 inch in 8 feet noncumulative, for level, plumb, warp, and bow. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum base for veneer plaster unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on AM one side. C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end AW joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing 00W member. ow D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at A edges and ends with not more than 1 /16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. AM GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 6 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 631 , polyvinyl acetate. C. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly adhering gypsum base face-layer panels to backing- layer panels in multilayer construction. 1 . Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. E. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1 . Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. G. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Patching Mortar: Dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1 /2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. 2.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MIXES A. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 ,, 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA a. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273; no mold growth after four weeks' exposure. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047, provided or approved by manufacturer for use in gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. 1 . Material: Aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc, except Plastic at Bathrooms. AM 2. Shapes: Aft a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. C. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. .� . R 2.4 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS low A. General: Comply with joint strength requirements in ASTM C 587 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations for each application indicated. AM B. Joint Tape: 1 . Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: As recommended by gypsum veneer AM plaster manufacturer for applications indicated. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer. Im Aw C. Embedding Material for joint Tape: 1 . Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: As recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for use with joint-tape material and gypsum veneer .w plaster applications indicated. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious backer unit Alm manufacturer for applications indicated. W Aft GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 4 M_ Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during veneer plaster application until it is dry. D. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1 . Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS k A. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, formulated for a► application directly over substrate without use of separate base-coat material. 1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. G-P Gypsum; Cameo Veneer Plaster. b. National Gypsum Company; Uni-Kal Plaster. C. USG Corporation; Diamond Interior Finish Plaster. oft 2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588/C 588M. 1 . Regular Type: 1 /2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: 5/8 inch thick, at fire rated partitions. w 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: With moisture- and mold-resistant core, glass-mat facing on both sides of panel. Provide at all shower and oft bath enclosures. "* GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 „� 3 AM 00 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 low Smith College Northampton, MA 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A low A. Source Limitations: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products, including gypsum AW base for veneer plaster, joint reinforcing tape, and embedding material, from a AW single manufacturer. AW, B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction e identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a A testing and inspecting agency. low AW C. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those ,W tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according A* to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency. Am 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .. A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand AM name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. ,.► A C. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging. AW AM 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS low A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 843 requirements or gypsum Awk veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more '° stringent. 40 40W B. Room Temperatures: Maintain not less than 55 deg F or more than 80 deg F „w for 7 days before application of gypsum base and gypsum veneer plaster, continuously during application, and after application until veneer plaster is d ry. mk C. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum veneer plaster drying too rapidly. AW 1 . Maintain relative humidity levels, for prevailing ambient temperature, that "W produce normal drying conditions. A 4^ GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 Am 2 ARM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 092613 - GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this �w Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base for veneer plaster. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood framing and furring. 2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed in gypsum veneer plaster assemblies. 3. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-load-bearing steel framing and other components of gypsum veneer plaster assemblies. 4. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for non-load- bearing steel framing, gypsum liner panels, gypsum board, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1 . Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch length for each trim accessory. "* GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 1 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA .. 1 . Curved Partitions: AM AW a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are Am tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c. AW D. Z-Furring Members: AM 1 . Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. low 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring AW members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry am attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. Aft 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with Alk short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw- "" attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1 /8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. AM END OF SECTION 092216 .W Oak .._ AW Am AM 4W A& A NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 AM 4 Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4► 1 . Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. a. Corrosion Resistance: Provide self-tapping coated screws for fastening metal to metal in high humidity environments. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been oft corrected. Ok oft 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. * 1 . Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. B. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 1 . Space studs as follows: a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Install tracks (runners) at overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 3 AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA �► 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE •w Aft A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that low incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. AM B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and Aft construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to 4^ ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing AW agency. lom A PART 2 - PRODUCTS A* Aft 2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL oft A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. I . Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES w A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1 . Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. IM, 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches. .0K B. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1 -1 /4 AW inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of Aw 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. m. AM, 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 2 ,� Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 4M PART 1 - GENERAL Ak 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. w 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: AW 1 . Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for, framed soffits, furring, etc.). B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed with Z- shaped furring members. 3. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems installed with non-load-bearing steel framing. 4. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Plastering" for metal lath supported by non- load-bearing steel framing. 5. Division 09 Section "Portland Cement Plastering" for metal lath supported by non-load-bearing steel framing. 40 6. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for non-load- bearing metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum panels, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. OW NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 -k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College '�" Northampton, MA B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1 . Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not low limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. AW Ift END OF SECTION 0921 16.23 A* Aw Aw AIA AW 0M AW AW low .* l Aft ow .W Awl Aw A GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 0921 16.23 A"' 6 AW o ate► Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. Ak k C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 4W corrected. *k 3.2 INSTALLATION Ak ter► A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: Ak 1 . ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for applying and finishing panels. B. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. C. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1 /8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. Am 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct Ok sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 0921 16.23 5 Abr AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. A C. Gypsum Base Joint-Reinforcing Materials: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering." AW D. Gypsum Veneer Plaster: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer lot. Plastering." ., Aft E. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to Ok withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. Alk 2.6 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES A^ . A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated. Aw A^ B. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and ends members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. , 1 . Depth: 2-112 inches. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0220 inch. C. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches long and in depth matching studs. 1 . Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. AW ,0W D. Room-Side Finish: "ok 1 . Fire tape gypsum board at walls furred for shower enclosures. AW 2. Gypsum Veneer Plaster over base layer at finished walls. E. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation. F. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 0921 16.23 4 AW ..ik Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire- resistance-rated assemblies indicated. 1 . Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations. Ak Isk 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS Ak ,k A. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M. 1 . Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces. a. Core: 1 inch thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel. B. Gypsum Board: 5/8" Type-X 2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" that GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 0921 16.23 3 4W Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ""k Northampton, MA AM 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand A name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. .k Alk C. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging. AW 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AW ,wk A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. Im A B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and •* conditioned. , C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1 . Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. AW 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ..t Im 1 . American Gypsum Company. MIK 2. G-P Gypsum. 3. National Gypsum Company. AW 4. USG Corporation. AM A GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 0921 16.23 AW 2 .W. AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 '"" Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 0921 16.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies for the following: 1 . Shaft-wall enclosures. 2. Chase enclosures. 3. Horizontal enclosures. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those Ak of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 0^ by a testing and inspecting agency. Oft B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures for installing gypsum board shaft-wall ok assemblies including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Fasteners proposed for anchoring nonstructural steel framing to building structure. 2. Items supported by shaft-wall-assembly framing. 3. Mechanical work enclosed within shaft-wall assemblies. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 0921 16.23 � 1 AM Am A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA Aw Aw Heading 8 (Public Bathrooms) 1 ML2010 Passage Set . ► 1 Closer 1 %z pr FBB 199 Butts 1 Ives 449 stop w/holder Heading 9 (Accessible Bathrooms) 1 MR/ML2030 Lockset 1 %z pr FBB 191 Butts 1 Ives 447/448 Stop 1 Closer , 1 8" Kickplate Heading 10 (Store room & Mech Rms) ► AWA 1 MR/ML2051 1 %z pr FBB 179 Butts (FBB 168 @ a) "` 1 Closer 1 10" kickplate Heading 11 (Cage Enclosures) , 1 DL 4011 Deadlock Aw 1 %z pr 8" strap hinges 1 Ives 410 pull Heading 12 & 12a (Stair Doors except Basement) , 1 ML2010 Passage Set 1 Closer Aft 1 Magnetic Hold-Open Device 2898 A. 1 %z pr FBB 199 Butts (no hold open @ a) Am AM END OF SECTION 087100 AM .W ... A AW Aw AW DOOR HARDWARE 087100 4W 16 Aw Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Heading 3 (Non-Student Access Exterior Doors) .w 1 MR/ML2057 Lockset 1 %Z pr FBB 223 Butts 1 Closer 1 set Weatherstripping 45041 DP 1 Sweep 18100 1 Threshold 271 AK 1 10" kickplate 1 Ives 447/448 Stop Heading 4 (Student Rooms in Suites) 1 MR/ML2065 Lockset 1 % pr FBB 179 Butts 1 Ives 447/448 Stop 4% Heading 5 & 5a (Student Rooms) 1 MR/ML2065 Lockset 1 %Z pr FBB 199 Butts Closer 1 Ives 447/448 Stop 8" Kickplate @ a 1 Sound gasket @ door 102 1 Door bottom @ door 102 ok A Heading 6 & 6a (Student Closets) 1 MR/ML2024 Passage Set 1 % pr FBB 179 Butts Heading 7 (Single User Bathrooms) 1 MR/ML2230 Lockset 1 %z pr FBB 179 Butts Ak 1 Ives 447/448 Stop DOOR HARDWARE 087100 15 ww 4W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AW Northampton, MA low 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION AM A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. .. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. w` Ak C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door Im hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Aw .M4 3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SETS AM, Heading 1 (Main Entry) Am Aft, 1 Exit Device SD-LX-RX-EL 99NL 1 Power Supply PS 873K-2 AO Im 1 Power Transfer EPT 10-SP313 AW 1 Door Position Switch 678-05 1 Cylinder 3080 Aft 1 Cylinder 100-1 14-A02 A 1 Door Operator 710 Duro AW 1 I/S Switch 59H Blue 1 0/S Switch 730B (momentary less cylinder) Ak 1 Cylinder 1080 (US26D) AM 1 %Z pr FBB 223 Butts AW 1 set Weatherstripping 45041 DP 1 Sweep 18100 Aft 1 Threshold 271AK AM 1 10" kickplate AAW Heading 2 (Student Access Exterior Doors) 1 Exit Device CD99NL 1 Cylinder 3080 1 Cylinder 100-118-A02 A% 1 Closer 4111-696 oft 1 % pr FBB 223 Butts 1 set Weatherstripping 45041 DP low 1 Sweep 18100 AM, 1 Threshold 271 AK 1 10" kickplate 'W 1 Ives 447/448 Stop low DOOR HARDWARE 087100 AM 14 .W A 4M Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 1 5-W Series. ok 4w 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1 . Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Oak Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware * onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface- """ mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1 . Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 ADJUSTING +! A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware ,ww and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control Ak devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment k and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 4a 1 . Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial w Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 13 4M AW AOW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA A AW attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. C. Closers to doors and frames. „R 3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.16 FINISHES " A. Standard: BHMA Al 56.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. , B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved AW Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. AW Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. �a Aw PART 3 - EXECUTION of Am, 3.1 EXAMINATION 40, A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. AM B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of .10 wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. Aft. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been •f corrected. Aft low 3.2 PREPARATION .w A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI Al 15 Series. low 1 . Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A250.6. Aw DOOR HARDWARE 087100 12 I, lkm Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.14 THRESHOLDS , ► A. Standard: BHMA Al 56.21 . B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for- Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." w 1 . Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1 :2. Provide *% thresholds not more than 112 inch high. Aft C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Maximum 1/2 sk inch high. 4'" D. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Hager Companies (HAG). 2. National Guard Products (NGP). 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 4. Reese Enterprises (RE). 5. Zero International (ZRO). 2.15 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1 . Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA Al 56.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely DOOR HARDWARE 087100 11 AM Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.12 STOPS AND HOLDERS AM A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Al 56.16. AW 1 . Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are "M scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede A traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. B. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Hager Companies (HAG). AW 2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). 3. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). lm 4. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). ,M AM 2.13 DOOR GASKETING ,.t A. Standard: BHMA Al 56.22. Jok A B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or "�" scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and AM elsewhere as indicated. ,M 1 . Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. low 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. '"" 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold *V when door is closed. .W C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing 'w other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. „W D. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed Ak and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities AM having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to AM NFPA 252. ' Ak E. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 7011702. F. Available Manufacturers: ..w 1 . Hager Companies (HAG). 2. National Guard Products (NGP). 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 4. Reese Enterprises (RE). AM 5. Zero International (ZRO). DOOR HARDWARE 087100 10 w. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Door closers shall not require more than 30 Ibf to set door in motion and not more than 15 Vie► Ibf to open door to minimum required width. C. Power-Assist Closers: As specified in Division 08 Section "Automatic Door Operators" for access doors for people with disabilities or where listed in the door hardware sets. D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. w.► E. Surface Closers: BHMA Al 56.4, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Manufacturers: a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 1) General Use: 4010 2) Barrier-free: 4030 3) Exterior Doors: 4020 2.11 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Size: 1 -1/2 inches less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws. C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA Al 56.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from the following material: 1 . Material: 0.050-inch- thick bronze. 2. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). C. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). DOOR HARDWARE 087100 9 A AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Am Northampton, MA AW AW 1 . Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. Ak 2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by AM permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. Ak a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by ,,w Owner. A E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. AW AM 2.8 KEYING low A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in 'w BHMA Al 56.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying AM conference, and as follows: AW 1 . Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's master ring existing system. Aft AW 2. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control low number that matches the Owner's registration number and include the following notation: AM A a. Notation: Do Not Duplicate. .W 3. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the low following: 4W a. Cylinder Change Keys: Five. AM b. Master Keys: Six. AW C. Grand Master Keys: Six. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Six. .w AW 2.9 ELECTRIC STRIKES AW Ak A. Standard: BHMA Al 56.3 1 , Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. Im B. Manufacturers: Im 1 . HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES). AM AW 2.10 CLOSERS AM A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other "M operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, AW comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for '"` Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." Aw DOOR HARDWARE 087100 AN, 8 Ak AM Am % Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit Devices: BHMA Al 56.3, Grade 1 . B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1 . Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. �w C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Exit devices shall not require more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. w E. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. F. Manufacturers: 1 . Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (C R). 2. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD). 2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA Al 56.5, Grade 1 unless Grade I is indicated. B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1 . Number of Pins: Seven. ' C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1 . Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; for use only with core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 7 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Aw Northampton, MA .N AW 2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL Ak A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility Aak requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Im Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." AM, Im 1 . Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. Alk AM B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Latches shall not require more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. AM C. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA Al 56.25. 4W Aw D. Lock Trim: „ft 1 . Levers: ,.k AW a. Newport NSA, except NSM where indicated 2. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. `' AM E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for AM labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1 . Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1 -inch bolt throw. AM F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 4W AW G. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door AM hardware set, and as follows: 1 . Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA Al 56.13. A 2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA Al 56.5. 3. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as '" recommended by manufacturer. AW 4. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood AW casing trim. Aft. 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Aft A. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA Al 56.13. AM 1 . Manufacturers: Im a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group AW company (CR). Aft Aw DOOR HARDWARE 087100 6 la Ift Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College a Northampton, MA 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 HINGES, GENERAL A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1 . Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely u. (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced w units. C. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1 . Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges. D. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings: 1 . Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors and outswinging corridor doors with locks. 2. Corners: Square. E. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1 . Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads r, to match surface of hinges. 2.3 HINGES A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA Al 56.1 . B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA Al 56.7. ^ " C. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). DOOR HARDWARE 087100 �► 5 Aft AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College l Northampton, MA AM AW 1 . Owner's Representative: Don Saltmarsh. Alk AV&. 1 .6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. AM W B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies access control system. Oft C. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for .W application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide for AM, proper operation. AM AW PART 2 - PRODUCTS AM Aft 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Am 1 . Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, AW sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door AW Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: ,.t. Aft. 1 . Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of �` establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are 10k abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Aft 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. A Aw C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: AM DOOR HARDWARE 087100 AM, 4 Ab� AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4ft A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 1 . Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. eww C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are �► listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with 'f" requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including, �w but not limited to, the following: 1 . Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 3 AW ww. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Im Northampton, MA Ak AM 2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and access control system. AW A C. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified AW finish, full size. Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the A final door hardware sets. AM 1 . Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and A remain undamaged through submittal and review process may, after final AW check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of AM keying requirements. D. Other Action Submittals: AM 1 . Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Aft Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of Aft door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure Mk proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same 4W door numbers as in the Contract Documents. b. Content: Include the following information: '"` AM 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame. 4M 2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door AM hardware item. Aft 3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. "" 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. ,M 5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. AM 6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in AM schedule. AM 7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 8) Door and frame sizes and materials. 9) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. AM A 10) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each AW door and frame. AW C. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest ,, possible date, particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project A' construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other ,M DOOR HARDWARE 087100 Aw 2 4ft QA► 4M Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 '!""'" Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. 4. Power assisted door openers/ B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal frames. 2. Division 26 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring work. 4"° 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. .. B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 1 . Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following: a. System schematic. b. Point-to-point wiring diagram. C. Riser diagram. d. Elevation of each door. ®ft DOOR HARDWARE 087100 4M. 1 4W Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College .SR Northampton, MA low AM B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, "o"` and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for AW weathertight construction. Am D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. Aft AM 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION AM A A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories .. for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. .M B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging AM protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, low dirt, and other substances. ,,b, C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with '"k manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. .W Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Aw. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or Am damaged during construction period. Ali E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting Am from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent .� to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for Aw presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants AM immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. AW END OF SECTION 085200 Am AM Aft Am AM AM AW 4 WOOD WINDOWS 085200 AM 10 ,, oft 4ft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 ""'' Smith College Northampton, MA Ok D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window 4► units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units Ak due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window Ok units. Aft E. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze wood windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. F. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. 2.10 WOOD FINISHES oft A. Factory-Primed Interiors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-prime coat 4W complying with WDMA T.M. 11 on exposed wood surfaces. 4M PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. Examine wall (lashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 1 . Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. ,,� 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 4. Ak 3.2 INSTALLATION Ak A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions A+ for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. WOOD WINDOWS 085200 9 w AMM AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AM Smith College Northampton, MA IM, B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1 . Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class ,,t indicated. 2. Finish: Baked-on organic coating in manufacturer's standard color. "" Aw C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber AW threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following Im color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. Im 1 . Mesh Color: Charcoal gray. Am. ml 2.7 STORM PANELS A. For Alternate windows include in base bid fixed, interior installed aluminum AM framed storm panels for full size of the opening complete with gaskets and tamper resistant hardware for each alternate opening. A* 1 . Finish: White A AM 2.8 ACCESSORIES •. A. Simulated Divided Lites (SDL): Provide permanent dividers in designs indicated AM, for each sash lite, with dividers on both exterior and interior with glazing bar located between glazing lites in the airspace. 1 . Material: Match exterior and interior frame materials. 2. Design: Match existing. , 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. • B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable A sash and ventilator, unless otherwise indicated. AM ,M 1 . Double-Hung Windows: Provide weather stripping only at horizontal rails of operable sash. AW C. Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied. '" WOOD WINDOWS 085200 8 AW AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA ter, B. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass units, argon gas filled, with low-E coating � pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second or third surface. ,A► 1 . Special Glazing: Provide units with "white" translucent glazing at all bathrooms. C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces 4^ weathertight seal. w 2.5 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion- , resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum. w�► B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902. 1 . Sash-Balance Type: Concealed type, of size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. C. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA 901 when tested according to ""' ASTM E 405, Method A. 1 . Operation Function: All ventilators move simultaneously and securely close at both jambs without using additional manually controlled locking *M devices. D. Four- or Six-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904. 1 . Locking mechanism and handles for manual operation. 2. Friction Shoes: Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable material. 2.6 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight- fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside or outside of window depending on operation and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. 1 . Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," Architectural C-24 class. WOOD WINDOWS 085200 7 A Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College A Northampton, MA A I. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, AM polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702. I. 1 . Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins Aft of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. '"w Comply with AAMA 701/702. J. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 7011702. all A 2.3 WINDOWS '"` AW A. Window Type: As indicated on Drawings. laik B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide wood windows of -ft. performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS unless A» more stringent performance requirements are indicated. 1 . Performance Class and Grade: HC 30. Ak AM C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition Am temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1 . U-Factor: 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less. D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole- AW window SHGC maximum of 0.30, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. AW E. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test. 1 . Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft.. F. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test "' methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested , according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Water Resistance Test. 1 . Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than .W 2.86 Ibf/sq. ft. or more than 15 Ibf/sq. ft.. G. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Comply with AW AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for operating window types indicated. AW AM 2.4 GLAZING Aw A. Glass and Glazing Materials: "' AM WOOD WINDOWS 085200 M 6 .o aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College + ► Northampton, MA B. Aluminum Extrusions for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard extruded- aluminum cladding, mechanically bonded to exterior exposed wood members. Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by wood window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile strength, and not less than 16,000-psi minimum yield strength. 1 . General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating ws, finishes. 4, 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. olk 3. Baked-Enamel Finish for Extrusions and Sheet: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel complying with AAMA 2603 and paint manufacturer's written specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. + . a. Color: White. C. Wood Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members. D. Clad Trim and Glazing Stops: Hollow extrusions and finish to match clad frame members. E. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1 . Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. F. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Oft G. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for aW SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. H. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and Aw for complete concealment when wood window is closed. 1 . Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. WOOD WINDOWS 085200 5 !MP .ft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 low Smith College Northampton, MA Ift wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. A* 1 .8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees , to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Aft 1 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. C. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. low d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes A* beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. '�` 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. AW b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. A C. Metal Finish: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. A PART 2 - PRODUCTS Aft 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows: a. EAGLE Window & Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products Corporation Company. b. Marvin Windows and Doors. C. jeld-wen Windows and Doors. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln Aw dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of AW visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger 'A than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide; water-repellent preservative treated. .y 0M WOOD WINDOWS 085200 AM 4 AM AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating wood AM windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single A, manufacturer. D. Product Options: Existing conditions establish requirements for wood windows' aesthetic effects. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria in the specifications and Ak are subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction Ok testing, field testing, and in-service performance. Ak 1 . Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, A► except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions and minimum standards Aft of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. "• 1 . Provide WDMA-certified wood windows with an attached label. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent 01 requirements are indicated. G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. AW 1 . Build mockup for one window, in location selected by Architect.. w H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with 0A, requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." ' 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1 . Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows without field measurements. Coordinate WOOD WINDOWS 085200 3 w. AM AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA .b A 1 .4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance Am requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are Am representative of those specified, and that are of test size indicated below: A 1 . Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for gateway performance for both gateway performance and optional performance grade. B. Structural Performance: Provide wood windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1 .5 SUBMITTALS AM A A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, W. finishes, and operating instructions for each type of wood window indicated. Aft B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, AM attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the '40 following: „m 1 . Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. A° 2. joinery details. ,, 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Interior trim modifications necessary for window replacement. 5. Installation details for new windows. wb , C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. nl�e 1 . Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. �E D. Product Schedule: For wood windows. Use same designations indicated on , Drawings. E. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash operating hardware weather stripping and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. , F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. ^° AW 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Aw A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. 'ft'; AW WOOD WINDOWS 085200 AW 2 „w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 085200 - WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Alternates: See Division One section "Alternates" for alternates that affect the work of this section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed and operable wood-framed windows of the following type: 1 . Aluminum clad. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1 . AW: Architectural. 2. HC: Heavy Commercial. 3. C: Commercial. 4. LC: Light Commercial. 5. R: Residential. Aft B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 40 1 . Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to ' ' determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure. C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. WOOD WINDOWS 085200 A^ 1 4w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 .� Smith College Northampton, MA B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been .� corrected. *�► 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fire-rated wood door frames level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. AW 1 . Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand smooth. ,,w, B. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." "' C. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with .%, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. AW .M 1 . Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. "' Aft D. .Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and Aw bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. AM Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. I . Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor .w finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 At inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. „lk 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and , rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. AW 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING Aw A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. Alk. A* END OF SECTION 081433 A* ... Ak Ab Am 4 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 '"' 6 A ow Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA a. Stiles, Top and Intermediate Rails: 5-3/8 inches. b. Bottom Rails: 1 1 -3/8 inches. 2. Molding Profile: Match existing. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 4ft 1 . Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 112 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W Series standards, and hardware templates. 1 . Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. ti ► D. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water- repellent preservative to comply with WDMA I.S.4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood stile and rail doors will be installed. 1 . Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 .M Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Veneer core plywood, made with adhesive containing no urea- .� formaldehyde resin. Ak 2.3 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF STOCK DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION Am A. Manufacturers: 1 . Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. A 2. JELD-WEN, inc. A 3. Simpson Door Company. Aft 4. Woodharbor Door Company. 4M B. Interior Doors: i . Grade for Opaque Finish: Premium or Select. 2. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed grain hardwood. 3. Flat-Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than that required by WDMA I.S.6 for design group indicated. 4. Interior Door Types: a. Interior French Doors: Single full height glazing panel. lk b. Interior Panel Door Type B: Five panel design to match existing doors in rear of the house. C. Interior Panel Door Type C: Four panel design to match existing doors in front of the house. C. Interior Fire-Rated Doors (20-Minute Rating): Fire-rated doors with 1-3/4-inch- thick stiles and rails and veneered flat panels not less than S/8 inch thick, complying with requirements indicated for interior doors. AM 2.4 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF SPECIAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION AW A. Construction, General: 1 1. Grade of Doors for Transparent Finish: Premium. 2. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Match existing species 3. Panel Designs: Match existing panel designs. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. B. Door Construction for Transparent Finish: 1 . Stile and Rail Construction: Clear lumber; may be edge glued for width. "" Select lumber for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces. 2. Flat-Panel Construction: Veneered, wood-based panel product. C. Exterior Doors: 1 . Stile and Rail Widths: Not less than the following: 0 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS' 081433 Ak 4 Ak AV*, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 .7 WARRANTY wn A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, and have warped (bow, """"' cup, or twist) more than 1,/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. u, 1 . Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Exterior Doors: One year. b. Interior Doors: Five years. 4ft PART 2 - PRODUCTS AW 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. „k 2.2 MATERIALS Ak A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced quality standards Am unless more stringent requirements are specified. Am 1 . Assemble exterior doors including components, with wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. 2. Assemble interior doors, including components, with either dry-use or wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. B. Low-Emitting Materials: 1 . Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins. C. Panel Products: Any of the following: 1 . Particleboard made from wood particles, with binder containing no urea- ,,,, , formaldehyde resin, complying with ANSI A208.1 , Grade M-2. 2. Medium-density fiberboard made from wood fiber, with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin, complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. M,, 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Am A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors through one source from .M a single manufacturer. AM B. Quality Standard for Doors of Stock Design and Construction: Comply with Ak WDMA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," unless more , stringent requirements are specified. Awl 1 . Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with WDMA I.S.6, and include panel design number if applicable. C. Quality Standard for Doors of Special Design and Construction: Comply with Aw AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" unless more stringent AM requirements are specified. 1 . Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for 'A* Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades .M specified. D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and ** labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to 4M, NFPA 252. A AW 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .s A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written low instructions. low B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. ,.... C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop Drawings. Ab 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AW A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is lft enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and A. maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. AM AW STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 Awl 2 im Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College !* Northampton, MA SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: Am 1 . Exterior stile and rail wood doors. 2. Interior stile and rail wood doors. 3. Interior fire-rated stile and rail wood doors. Ak 4. Contractors Options: 4► a. Factory fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. Aft b. Factory priming stile and rail doors for field finish. 0 B. Related Sections include the following: 'k 1 . Division 06 Section " Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door Aft frames. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS ' " A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and glazing. 4 1 . Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data. 1 . Indicate dimensions. 2. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. Ak 3. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. 1 . Provide samples on species of wood specified. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS' 081433 Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA low PART 3 - EXECUTION AW .. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. AM 4M 1 . Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A& 3.2 INSTALLATION ,,,& A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." A* Aw B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by AW manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. Aw 1 . Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of AN doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. Aft 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. END OF SECTION 081416 low am AW AW Aft FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 A& 4 .w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Aft Smith College Northampton, MA Aft 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. °ft B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Standard Duty. , C. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1 . Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 , Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2. Aft 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. as follows: a. 5-inch top-rail blocking. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking. 2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH ^6 A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: Type A 1 . Grade: Premium. 2. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option. 3. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood. 4. Core: Particleboard. 5. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1 . Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2.5 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting". Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer. "* FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 3 Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Am Northampton, MA A^ B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. Aft C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. AW ... 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are ..t enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC Aw system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity Im conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1 .7 WARRANTY Aw A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees AW to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. .0. 1 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: low a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS , low 2.1 MANUFACTURERS M* A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Im one of the following: AN& 1 . Ampco, Inc. ,. 2. Chappell Door Co. 3. Eggers Industries. AW 4. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Lambton Doors. 6. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 7. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 8. Poncraft Door Company. 9. VT Industries Inc. .., W FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 2 ow Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA .4% SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS Oft 04 PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Solid-core doors and transom panels with wood faces. 2. Shop priming flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 06 Section "Interior Finish Carpentry" for wood door frames. 2. Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" for field finishing doors. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. * B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's * "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." ,w► 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ow A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 1 AM AAW Aw Aft Aft, 0 Alk low .. ,d. .k AMW A .m Aftk mw AIW Aft AM Ak aw ..W low AAk AW Aw► mw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1 . Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately 4M before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. ,�. END OF SECTION 081113 Ak A& Ak Ak Ak Ak HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 A& 9 Aft AM A*k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College low Northampton, MA A 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at jambs on a .ft perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. AW AW .1k 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely 10` fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written AM instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.1 1 . Ak 1 . Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to AW NFPA 80. A, b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or ,P, handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding Am face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. C. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are AM constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation 4W tolerances. ..e 2. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with *" postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. , 3. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with A postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. AM Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 8 Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI Al 15 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. , r► PART 3 - EXECUTION '" 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions AM affecting performance of the Work. 'ft B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual '1 locations before frame installation. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area 40 smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1 . Squareness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. .w 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 Aw 7 Aft w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that ..� cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. om, A C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping AK or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. ,IW ... 1 . Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and .k make smooth, flush, and invisible. .w 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. A 3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than r 26 inches o.c. 4. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. .W D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. AM lak E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and AW tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1 . Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to AM ANSI/SDI A250.8. Aft A. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 6 AW^ low ow ate, Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ^k Northampton, MA S. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1 . Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with AN reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. 1 . Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.042-inch- thick steel sheet. C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. jamb Anchors: 1 . Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 4% 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. * HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 ,M 5 Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), �. Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 101 1 /A 101 1 M, Commercial Steel (CS), AM Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. 'M mol C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591 /A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating ,w designation; mill phosphatized. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to Ak ASTM A 153/A 153M. 10 AW E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane „p facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to AM 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development AW indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS ,may A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; Am fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed AM faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1 . Design: Flush panel. , 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, , polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical low steel-stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings 'k indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge. a. Beveled Edge: 1 /8 inch in 2 inches. low 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Aw Ob .. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 1^ 4 Mk AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1 . Provide minimum 1 /4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. �w 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1 .8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. +" PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. `ft 5. Pioneer Industries, Inc. Ak 6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. AM 7. Windsor Republic Doors. AW* HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 Oft 3 40 low A^ Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA ► 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal low thicknesses. Aft, 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and 1^ metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. Ak 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. A* C. Other Action Submittals: A Ak 1 . Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and Aft openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware ,ft schedule. ..x D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed 4W by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. �. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are A► listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings AM indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252. .. to Aft 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. AW AW 1 . Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- ,w finished units. Im B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 "* 2 aft ,.. Ak Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 " ' Smith College Ak Northampton, MA 4k SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Ak PART 1 - GENERAL Ak 0^ 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Ak A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and 4► Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY Ak A. Section Includes: 1 . Standard hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. Aft, 2. Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal Ak doors and frames. Ak Aw 4W 1 .3 DEFINITIONS nk A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions and fire-resistance rating. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1 . Elevations of each door design. * HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 #+ 1 Alk 1w ow Aft .% ..k, ,.w low Alk. Awk L. AW AIW ,■. .w am w. look AW, AW AM AM AOW A ,.ew ,.w AMk Alk Alk ANN Aft ,■. ,.W 4m AW . , AW om. k .a Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION 40 A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without Ak deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage w or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 079200 ok Ok +M +f. Ak Am Ak 4. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 ow 7 4M AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College om Northampton, MA AW B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. A C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining AM surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by ,Ml cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. `" ... 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products ,"w and applications indicated,unless more stringent requirements apply. Am. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint W sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. low C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for ,,., use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. AW ... D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position Ak required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 46, 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. ,.W 2. Do not stretch,twist,puncture, or tear sealant backings. AW 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and ,b replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants A.. and backs of joints. F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. •+lk, 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. A4W 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. A*Ak, G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or .m curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform AW beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of AM sealant with sides of joint. low 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. , 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. •` AM JOINT SEALANTS 079200 AW 6 aw A 4M Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA 4ft 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS • A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. 4W B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with 4W requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- oft sealant performance. Ak B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION 40 A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,waterproofing,water repellents,water, surface dirt, and,frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed ' air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. 'Glass. a�11► !+ JOINT SEALANTS 079200 5 M AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AW Northampton, MA ." 1. Products: AOW a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 950. AW b. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201. C. Polymeric Systems Inc.;Flexiprene 952. d. Schnee-Morehead,Inc.;Permathane SM7101. AM, e. Tremco; Tremflex S/L. AW f. Tremco; Vulkem 45. AW 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P(pourable). AW 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: T(traffic). ow 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: galvanized steel,brick and wood. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P,Grade NF. AW B. Products: AV# 1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600. AW 2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. A 3. Schnee-Morehead,Inc.; SM 8200. AM, 4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 5. Tremco; Tremflex 834. .w 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING Ak A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates sealants rimers and other Joint fillers; and area roved for applications AW J , p J pp pp indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. Aft B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface low skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing .■ optimum sealant performance: .W C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to AM optimum sealant performance. „,W D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant aM manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. '"k .JOINT SEALANTS 079200 Ao" 4 .k 4M Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.2 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D 'W (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Aft 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. sk C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: . ,k ek 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 " classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be '' nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for +ft joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food,provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. Aft E. Single-Component Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant: 1. Available Products: a. Pacific Polymers,Inc.; Elastoseal 230 Type I (Gun Grade). ! b. Polymeric Systems Inc.;PSI-7000. 2. Type and Grade: S(single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4w 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates Aft indicated, O. Ok F. Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant: 4" oft JOINT SEALANTS 079200 40 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College low Northampton, MA AM B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants Ah� showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. AW Mk D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. .k E. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a Ow qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. A. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. .W 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Aft A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for Aw installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single A manufacturer. ,,,W A 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AW A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: AM AM 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- AM sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for Ak applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint AM substrates. ,w, PART 2 -PRODUCTS A% 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be Am incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 AM articles. AVA .w AW a% A JOINT SEALANTS 079200 Aft 2 ,m Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 079200 -JOINT SEALANTS 40 Ak PART 1 - GENERAL Ak 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A►, A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: Ak a. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and Aft louvers. Ok 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Joints between different materials. 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. C. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum veneer plaster partitions to reduce sound transmission. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 3. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical ceilings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. w JOINT SEALANTS 079200 Wk 1 AM- Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ow Northampton, MA B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. " C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive , substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by AW manufacturer. ,s, 1 . Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with Ak bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or AW cementitious construction. 2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance. D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. E. Gravity Ventilator Installation: w l . Check relief vents for proper operation and unrestricted airflow. ► 2. Install security grilles. Weld bar intersections and ends of bars to structural frame or primary curb walls. ,ak F. Seal joints with butyl sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories. MA Aw 3.3 CLEANING Aft A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Aw END OF SECTION 077200 Am Am A A .W AW ow AOW .ft Aft .. .., ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 A& 4 0% .w. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 " " Smith College Northampton, MA F. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2.3 GRAVITY VENTILATORS A. Turbine-Style Gravity Ventilators: Manufacturer's standard unit fabricated from the following materials, with manufacturer's standard welded or sealed mechanical joints: 1 . Manufacturer: a. Active Ventilation Products; Aura-Vent AV-1 2 2. Provide integral weathertight base cap, outlet duct, and rotating louvered turbine. 3. Bird Screens: Manufacturer's standard mesh with rewireable frame. 4. Insect Screens: Manufacturer's standard mesh with rewireable frame. S. Weathertight Base Cap, Outlet Duct, and Turbine Material: Aluminum sheet, of manufacturer's standard thickness. 6. Finish: Powder-coated organic coating. a. Color: As selected by Architect 4W PART 3 - EXECUTION ow 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of K work. 1 . Verify.that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories. 2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION w A. General: install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other A► miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, 'k leaking, and fastener disengagement. Ak ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 40 3 •rs Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College oat Northampton, MA A° A 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS Am A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory a. by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Ao� Drawings. .., 1 .7 COORDINATION AW A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane .. and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. ` 1 . With Architect's approval, adjust location of roof accessories that would ,,ft interrupt roof drainage routes. Aw PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL MATERIALS A A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by .� manufacturer for type of use and mill finish. AK 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Aw A. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne .W preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1- A 112 inches thick. Aft B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded A. for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive AW compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. AM C. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory 4W manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, polysulfide sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim .. and remain watertight. AM E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311 , single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber AW sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, and heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 4' 2 .R AWN., Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 4W 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this ' Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Gravity ventilators. 40, B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing, wood cants, and wood nailers. 2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field- fabricated metal flashing and counterf lashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 4 A^ 1 .3 SUBMITTALS w. A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE e�w A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 1 .S DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage. AL Ak ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 1 Aft ft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College low. Northampton, MA AW Aft 1 . For small roof areas provide elbows and pre-cast splash blocks at base of downspouts to direct water away from building where direct connection to underground storm drainage system is not possible. 2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. ,f AW 3.5 COUNTERFLASHING AND REGLET INSTALLATION A A. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterf lashings with installation of base flashings. Insert counterflashings in reglets or receivers and fit tightly , to base (lashings. Extend counterf lashings 4 inches over base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with butyl sealant. AM 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform AM oxidation and weathering. la► B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. ,., low END OF SECTION 077100 AW A A. Ak .M, low Ak Aft AM oak AW ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 6 Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance. C. Install manufactured roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil-canning, buckling, or tool marks. D. Install manufactured roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. E. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed + * manufactured roof specialties. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no unplanned joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections. F. Fasteners: Use fasteners of type and size recommended by manufacturer but W of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and 4M not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 4W G. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by manufacturer of 04 roofing specialties. Ak 3.3 ROOF CAP INSTALLATION A. Install cleats and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners. AW B. Anchor roof caps to resist uplift and outward forces according to performance requirements. 3.4 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install gutters and downspouts to produce a complete roof drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Gutters: join and seal gutter lengths. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Slope gutters to downspouts. 1 . Install gutters with outer edge located at least 1 inch below projected plane of roof slope at high point. 2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps. C. Downspouts: join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 5 Am Aft Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.5 COUNTERFLASHINGS AND REGLETS AW A. Counterflashings: Manufactured units in lengths designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following *00� exposed metal in thickness indicated: Aft 1 . Copper: 24 oz./sq. ft. Aft B. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate 4M reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashings indicated, lift from the following exposed metal in thickness indicated: AM 1 . Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. ,•w 2. Type: For masonry application, with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. AM PART 3 - EXECUTION AW ow low 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify AW actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work. Aak. 1 . Examine walls, roofs and roof edges for suitable conditions for „M manufactured roof specialties. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, AW and securely anchored. ,ow 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION low A. General: Anchor manufactured roof specialties securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified in performance requirements. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete manufactured roof specialty systems. 1 . Install manufactured roof specialties with provisions for thermal and structural movement. AM 2. Torch cutting of manufactured roof specialties is not permitted. dw B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive am substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with AW bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. Aft ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 4 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 04 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, �w separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to withstand design loads. 1 . Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal. e, C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polysulfide polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311 , single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.3 ROOF RIDGE AND HIP CAPS A. 26 oz. copper sheet fabricated to cover 6 inches on either side of roof slope with round cap profile to allow adjustability to roof slope. 2.4 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS ww A. Gutters and Downspouts: Manufactured formed gutter in uniform section lengths not exceeding 16 feet, with mitered and welded or soldered corner units, end caps, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least * 1 inch above front gutter rim. Furnish with spike and ferrule gutter support brackets and expansion joints and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters. 1 . Fabricate gutter from the following exposed metal: AO a. Copper: 24 oz./sq. ft. 2. Gutter Style: Half round according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 3. Gutter Accessories: Bronze wire ball downspout strainer. 4M 4. Downspouts: Round with formed elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish wall brackets, from same material and finish as downspouts, with anchors. a. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. W, ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 3 Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College """ Northampton, MA AW 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, A** material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and Am finishes. Jak B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of manufactured roof specialties, including ,,k plans and elevations. Identify factory- vs. field-assembled work. Include the following: AW low 1 . Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring manufactured .� roof specialties including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. * 2. Details for expansion and contraction. C. Fabrication Samples: For roof caps and roof edge drainage systems made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components including fasteners, cover joints, AW accessories, and attachments. M. AW 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Oak A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes "* requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. AW Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one AM another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including Ak preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. Aft 1 . Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, Aft except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1 .6 COORDINATION *' r A. Coordinate installation of manufactured roof specialties with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive w installation. Aft PART 2 - PRODUCTS .•W om 2.1 EXPOSED METALS +® A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or HO1 , cold rolled, mill finished. A. ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 Am 2 JW look , ► Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES PART ] - GENERAL AW 'ft 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. W 1 .2 SUMMARY Oft A. This Section includes the following manufactured roof specialties: 1 . Roof ridge and hip caps. 2. Roof edge drainage systems. ,ft 3. Counterf lashings and reglets. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment Oft supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 3. Division 07 Section 'point Sealants" for field-applied sealants. 1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Manufacture and install manufactured roof specialties to resist thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Thermal Movements: Provide manufactured roof specialties that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1 . Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 4M C. Water Infiltration: Provide manufactured roof specialties that do not allow 4%, water infiltration to building interior. ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 � 1 ..w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA �* 2. Name: <Insert name>. 3. Title: <Insert title>. AM. END OF SECTION 076100 Aft .ft .ft A* l Aft. .M AM A* ,A. AW AW Alk Am .f AW Aw AW AM SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 om 12 , Ab Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 '' " Smith College Northampton, MA e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. ' "` 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would �w likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. S. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered Oft by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Aft Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. oft E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. 1 . Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 11 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Ab A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform Aw oxidation and weathering. AM B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. AM C. Clean off excess sealants. low A* D. Replace sheet metal roofing components that have been damaged or have IM, deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.8 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A*" AM A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing ,W Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: .00, AM 1 . Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. 2. Address: <Insert address>. AW 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. • 4. Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of Work: <Insert information>. ` 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. AM 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. AW- 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date>. .. B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1 . Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other AW parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: AW a. Lightning; Aw b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert wind speed> mph; ift C. Fire; Aft d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; "� A SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 10 �b Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Ok 1 . Loose-lock panels at eave edges to continuous cleats and flanges at roof edge at gutters. 2. Fold over seams after locking at ridges and hips. 3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate Ak installation with flashings and other components. AM 1 . Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim, copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Install accessories integral to sheet metal roofing that are specified in aw Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" to comply with that Section's requirements. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1 . Install flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, �w eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. 2. Install continuous strip of self-adhering underlayment at edge of continuous flashing overlapping self-adhering underlayment, where "continuous seal strip" is indicated in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," and where indicated on Drawings. 3. Install exposed flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 4. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, and filled with butyl sealant concealed 4—ft within joints. Oft 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 9 Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges AW unless otherwise indicated. look 1 . Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat Am with two fasteners to prevent rotation. 2. Fasten cleats not more than 12 inches o.c. Bend tabs over fastener head. 3. Provide expansion-type cleats and clips for roof panels that exceed 30 feet in length. AW B. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. For roofing with 3:12 slopes or less, use cleats at transverse seams. low 1 . Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is Im moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent •M movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at Am higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 1414 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "joint Sealants." C. Soldered .Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign Aft matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-112 inches, A. except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. • 1 . Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and AM flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. low 2. Copper Roofing: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets, using solder for .W copper. Aw D. Flat-Seam Roofing: Attach flat-seam metal panels to substrate with cleats, **� starting at eave and working upward toward ridge. After panels are in place, AM mallet seams and solder. Aft 1 . Attach roofing panels with cleats spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. Aft Lock and solder panels to base flashing. 2. Attach edge flashing to face of roof edge with continuous cleat fastened "" to roof substrate at 12 inches o.c. Lock panels to edge flashing and .W solder. AM E. Standing-Seam Roofing: Attach standing-seam metal panels to substrate with cleats, double fastened at 12 inches o.c. Install panels reaching from eave to ,,, ridge before moving to adjacent panels. Before panels are interlocked, apply AW continuous bead of sealant to top of flange of lower panel. Lock standing seams by folding over twice so cleat and panel edges are completely engaged. A. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 8 AW AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 1 . Apply from eave to ridge. 2. Apply on roof not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges of self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches, in shingle fashion to shed water. B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." C. Apply slip sheet before installing sheet metal roofing. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Ak A. General: Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing. ± ► 1 . Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted. 2. Provide metal closures at rake edges, rake walls, and eaves. 3. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. .� Predrill panels for fasteners. 5. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off the material. B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and ®"" anchors as required for a tight installation. 3.4 CUSTOM-FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide + * SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 7 ws, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College A Northampton, MA low low G. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with AW recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. *w Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. ,,w 1 . Form exposed sheet metal accessories without excessive oil canning, 1W buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with Alm exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to 41ft` be seamed, form seams, and solder. .m 3. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. 4. Sealed points: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to AAk accommodate elastomeric sealant. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed "ft fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. .f 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by Aw SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. Aft H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. A" PART 3 - EXECUTION Ak Im 3.1 EXAMINATION low A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for AW compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other A„ conditions affecting performance of the Work. ,.. 1 . Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported AW by framing or blocking, that tops of fasteners are flush with surface, and that installation is within flatness tolerances required for finished roofing Aw installation. , 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored, and that provision has been made for drainage, flashings, and penetrations through sheet metal roofing. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A ,. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION AW A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal roofing. Apply at locations indicated SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 "'k 6 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and with same finish as sheet metal roofing, minimum thickness matching the sheet metal roofing. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions (panel width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and accessories at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1 . Flat-Seam Roofing: Form flat-seam panels from metal sheets 20 by 28 inches with 1/2-inch notched and folded edges. !' 2. Standing-Seam Roofing: Form standing-seam panels with finished seam height of 1 inch. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal roofing that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line and levels indicated; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1 . Lay out sheet metal roofing so transverse seams, if required, are made in direction of flow with higher panels overlapping lower panels. 2. Fold and cleat eaves and transverse seams in the shop. 3. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings, and other components of metal roofing to '011 profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown on Drawings and as required for leakproof construction. D. Expansion Provisions: Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent leakage, damage, and deterioration of the Work. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. E. Sealant joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are indicated or required to produce weathertight seams, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant in compliance with SMACNA standards. F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator of sheet metal roofing or manufacturers of the metals in contact. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 5 Ali. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA AW B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 temper, 24 oz./sq. ft. unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Non-Patinated Exposed Finish: Mill 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts. B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized. A AW 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and as recommended by primary sheet , metal manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self- AW locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. "' 1 . Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Solder: AW 1 . For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. ,m D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polysulfide polymer sealant; low w modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal roofing and remain watertight. Am E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311 , single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber low sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. low F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. Ak 2.4 ACCESSORIES Alk A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet Aw metal roofing assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, clips, Aft flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheet metal roofing unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Cleats: For mechanically seaming into joints and formed from the following materials: a. Copper Roofing: 20-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 4 AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after sheet metal roofing ' installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal roofing materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal roofing materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. 1 .7 COORDINATION + * A. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. rw 1 .8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Warranty form at the end of this Section in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 4W *w 1 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: k a. Structural failures, including but not limited to rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Wrinkling or buckling. C. Loose parts. d. Failure to remain weathertight, including uncontrolled water leakage. e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering, including non-uniformity of color or finish. f. Galvanic action between sheet metal roofing and dissimilar materials. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College low Northampton, MA AM Ato 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, �► material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. Aft B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed ,f by a qualified testing agency, for each product. C. Maintenance Data: For roofing sheet metals and accessories to include in AW maintenance manuals. AM D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. •!. Ak 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE low A. Custom-Fabricated Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal roofing similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful ,., in-service performance. A B. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet .f► Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on ,W Drawings. C. Copper Roofing Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture low Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. AM Oft D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. AM 1 . Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, sheet metal .o► roofing Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof- mounted equipment. Aft 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal roofing installation. 4. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. A 5. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, Aft equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal roofing. '" 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing and inspecting if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for sheet metal roofing during and after roofing installation. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 "' 2 AM 1. am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 076100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Flat-seam metal roofing, custom fabricated. 2. Standing-seam metal roofing, custom fabricated. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for gutters, downspouts, and flashings that are not part of sheet metal roofing. 2. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for manufactured roof accessories. 3. Division 07 Section 'Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants adjoining ,a. sheet metal roofing. 1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sheet metal roofing system including, but not limited to, metal roof panels, cleats, clips, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing integral with sheet metal roofing, fascia panels, trim, underlayment, and accessories shall comply with requirements indicated without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Sheet metal roofing shall remain watertight. B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal roofing that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and AW nighttime-sky heat loss. a 1 . Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 1 Ak "W A A. 4. ,w.. AVW Aw Am A. AM Alk 4w AM AM .VW ww wR .l► AM AW Aft Afft Alk AW A AOW A* w. Amok AS* ,.k Alk AM AW AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature Ak and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. w B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. END OF SECTION 075323 s ww, 4 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 9 4^ Ak Am, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College om Northampton, MA A AW 3.4 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION Aw A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to .W substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written .M instructions. Am B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at Aft required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. AW 4W C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. AW A D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. AM. AW E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. AW AM 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION AM AM A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. �. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to A Architect. Am 1 . Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of Im inspection. B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where AM test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. AW, C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed AM to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified *M requirements. AM 4W 3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING Ak A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of '.W construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07539"" 8 Ak, MW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Complete terminations and base (lashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Installroofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane Ak roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane Ak and allow to relax before installing. Ak B. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of 4ft minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. !A* C. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. D. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. E. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. 1 . Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by membrane roofing system manufacturer. F. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing +► membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. H. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. I. Install roofing membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing. J. Apply epichlorohydrin sheet over roofing membrane at locations indicated. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 7 Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA F. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant, color to match roofing membrane. Ak" G. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. ,W H. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or Aft aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. ,M I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent "` sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet (lashings, T joint AW, covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other om accessories. Im 2.3 WALKWAYS Ak Im A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip- resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. "'` AM PART 3 - EXECUTION AW .,t 3.1 EXAMINATION *1W A A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for om compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 4 1 . Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and Aft braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. Aw 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to .01 roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 'k 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION • A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to "M roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. AW B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof- Aft drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. 0 AM ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075312) 6 „M AW 4 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College w Northampton, MA Ak 1 . Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, fasteners walkway products and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4M 2.1 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE A. EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced uniform, flexible sheet made from EPDM, and as follows: 1 . Manufacturer: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. Ak 1 . Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. Ok 4W B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. C. Epichlorohydrin Sheet: 60-mil- thick, unreinforced flexible sheet with the following typical properties as determined per ASTM test method indicated: „ 1 . Tensile Strength: 1 500 psi; ASTM D 412. 2. Ultimate Elongation: 200 percent; ASTM D 412. 3. Tear Resistance: 150 Ibf/in.; ASTM D 412. 4. Brittleness Temperature: Minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 746. 5. Resistance to Ozone Aging: No cracks after 168 hours' exposure of 50 percent elongated sample at 104 deg F and 100-pphm ozone; ASTM D 1149. .w 6. Resistance to Oil Aging: 15 percent maximum mass change after 168 hours' immersion in diesel fuel No. 2 at 158 deg F; ASTM D 471 . D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. E. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE=MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 5 oft Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Aw 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after AM roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof Aft. penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that AW will affect roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and AM certificates if applicable. AM 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. " 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. Im .M 1 .7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals .. unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and Aft type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other Am components. 4W B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, *W protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing ,M system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1 . Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied AW within its stated shelf life. AM C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration Im by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. AW Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. .m D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid .M permanent deflection of deck. "' AM 1 .8 PROJECT CONDITIONS Am AW A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. A 1 .9 WARRANTY Aw A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty ,.► period. Failure includes roof leaks. AM ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 0753 4 Ak A •mss Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1 . Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class [A] [B] [C]; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, w conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements for preinstallation conferences in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roof deck construction and roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of �. materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. ` 3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. Ak 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and k certificates if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturers representative; deck Installer; and installers whose work **► interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories „ and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 3 IM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA low Aft B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated A` by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base (lashings, and component AM materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of "W a membrane roofing system and that are listed in FMC's "Approval Guide" for AM Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. AW. .f., 1 . Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A- 90. 2. Hail Resistance: MH. om Am. 1 .5 SUBMITTALS AW A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. AW B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that AM roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance AM, Requirements" Article. Am 1 . Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements. I» C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components AW, of roofing system. A D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system. AW low E. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. Am F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. AM IM 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Am A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or Aft licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and AM that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. Aft B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has FMG approval 4M for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. ,w C. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from Aft same manufacturer as roofing membrane. AW D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with 4W the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing AW identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 0753"" 2 ,M AW 4W Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 "' Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING Am PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS „w A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: Ak 1 . Adhered membrane roofing system. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and Oft blocking; and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels. 2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterf lashings. 3. Division 07 Section ".Joint Sealants." 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. B. Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems," before multiplication by a safety factor. C. Factored Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems," after multiplication by a safety factor. w 1 .4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without *� failure. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 � 1 AM look Awk A AW Ala 4m Aft A Alk AM Ak Ak Ak AM w AM AMW AM Am AM lok AM ANk .l AM Ak AIM AW Aft, AW*. AW Awk 4m A AM Awk AM AW ASK Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance ' in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to + * perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Am Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would Ak likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a iw limitation or termination of this Warranty. ,�. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, *�* spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. Ak 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or Ak suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence ** of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. Oft 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing �w Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. 1 . Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. 2. Name: <Insert name>. 3. Title: <Insert title>. END OF SECTION 073126 AM AM SLATE SHINGLES 073126 9 low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College low Northampton, MA AIM 3.7 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY .M A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Am Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following AI project: Aft 1 . Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. /m 2. Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. Aw 4. Address: <Insert address>. ,W 5. Area of Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. AM 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. AW 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date>. Am B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or Aft indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or Am defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and Aw conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost ,,,,, and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are " necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. AM D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: A AM 1 . Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other Ak parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: AM a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 80 mph; C. Fire; '" d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, ••01 excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and AM penetrations of the work; AW f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of the foregoing causes, Warranty AM, shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing 4 Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. AW a* SLATE SHINGLES 073126 Am 8 A, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Ak Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . Offset joints of uniform-width slate shingles by half the shingle width in succeeding courses. 2. Offset joints of random-width slate shingles a minimum of 3 inches in succeeding courses. C. Maintain a 4-inch- minimum head lap between succeeding shingle courses. D. Maintain uniform exposure of shingle courses between eaves and ridge. E. Extend shingle starter course and first course 1 inch over fasciae at eaves. F. Extend shingle starter course and succeeding courses 1 inch over fasciae at rakes. G. Cut and fit slate neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other projections through roof. H. Hang slate with two slating nails for each shingle with nail heads lightly touching slate. Do not drive nails home drawing slates downward or leave nail head protruding enough to interfere with overlapping shingle above. I. Open Valleys: Cut slate shingles to form straight lines at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingles. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley from highest to lowest point. 1 . Do not nail shingles to valley metal flashings. 3.5 SNOW-GUARD INSTALLATION A. Snow-Guard Rails: Install rows of snow-guard rails at existing locations according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1 . Document existing snow guard locations during existing slate removal. Confirm anchorage location for new rails and existence of adequate blocking and anchorage for installation. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or broken slate shingles. B. Remove excess slate and debris from Project site. Alk A► SLATE SHINGLES 073126 7 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College A Northampton, MA A Am 5. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Aw Extend 18 inches beyond penetrating elements and return vertically against penetrating elements not less than 4 inches. A 6. Roof-Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope. AM 3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION AW A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with '"' requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." Aw 1 . Install metal flashings according to recommendations in NRCA's "The Amb, NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." AM B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope Aft slate shingles and up the vertical surface. C. Step Flashings: Install with a head lap of 3 inches and extend both horizontally and vertically. Install with lower edge of flashing just upslope of, and concealed by, butt of overlying slate shingle. Fasten to roof deck only. D. Cricket Flashings: Install against the roof-penetrating element, extending concealed flange beneath upslope slate shingles and beyond each side. A E. Open-Valley Flashings: Install centrally in valleys, lapping ends at least 8 Am inches 'in direction to shed water. Fasten upper end of each length to roof Aft deck beneath overlap. A 1 . Secure hemmed flange edges into metal cleats spaced 12 inches apart Ift and fastened to roof deck. AW 2. Adhere 9-inch- wide strips of self-adhering sheet to metal flanges and to 001, self-adhering sheet underlayment. low F. Eave Drip Edges: Install beneath underlayment and fasten to roof deck. ,m G. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and slate shingles. AW Fasten and seal to slate shingles. AW 3.4 SLATE-SHINGLE INSTALLATION , A. General: Beginning at eaves, install slate shingles according to manufacturer's AM written instructions and to details and recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." AM 1 . Install wood nailer strip cant at eave edges. AM 2. Install shingle starter course chamfered face down. AM B. Install first and succeeding shingle courses with chamfered face up. Install AM full-width first course at rake edge. SLATE SHINGLES 073126 AW 6 .f. AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 '" Smith College Northampton, MA C. Vent-Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121 , at least 1/16 inch thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof and extending at least 4 inches from pipe onto roof. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing slate removal: Refer to Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for procedures regarding removal of existing slate and protection of the building. B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions �., affecting performance of the Work. 1 . Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, ' and completely anchored and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through roofing. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION �w A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches, staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1 . Prime concrete and masonry surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet underlayment. 2. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side. 3. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side. 4. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side. *` SLATE SHINGLES 073126 Aft 5 Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA AW Aw 2.4 ACCESSORIES AW A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. A• B. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311 , single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber A" sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied. 0 C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polysulfide polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in slate- Ah shingle roofing and remain watertight. ,.. D. Slating Nails: ASTM F 1667, copper, smooth shanked, wire nails; 0.135-inch A minimum thickness; sharp pointed; with 3/8-inch- minimum diameter flat 4 head; of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 3/4 inch into sheathing. , 1 . Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. „ E. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 4 2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal AM Flashing and Trim." 1 . Sheet Metal: 26 oz. Copper. low AW B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations that AW apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." AM ,m 1 . Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange extending a minimum of 6 4ft inches over and 4 inches beyond each side of downslope slate shingles and 6 inches up the vertical surface. Am 2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a head lap of 3 inches and a minimum extension of 5 inches both horizontally and vertically. 3. Cricket Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of 24 inches beneath upslope slate shingles and 6 inches beyond each side of chimney and 6 inches above the roof plane. 4. Open-Valley Flashings: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with f- inch- high, inverted-V profile at center of valley and equal flange widths AM of 10 inches. low S. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof- deck flange and 1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch hemmed drip at Oft lower edge. A SLATE SHINGLES 073126 4 ,� Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. New England Slate Company (The). 2. Thickness: Nominal 3/16 inch 1/4 to 3/8 inch. 3. Surface Texture: Rough. ,,, 4. Size: 18 inches long by 12 inches wide. 5. Nail Holes: Two per shingle. 6. Butt Shape: Standard square cut. 7. Color: Vermont Gray. 8. Weather-Exposure Color Change: Unfading. B. Starter Slate: Slate shingles with chamfered nail holes front-side punched. 1 . Length: Exposure of slate shingle plus head lap. 4 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, High Temperature: Minimum of 30- to 40- mil- thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer for adjoining concrete or masonry surfaces to Aft receive underlayment. 1 . Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide + * products by one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. b. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. C. Henry Company. 2.3 SNOW GUARDS A. Snow-Guard Rails: Units fabricated from metal baseplate anchored to fixed bracket and equipped with three bars. 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Berger Building Products. b. M.J. Mullane Company, Inc. C. SnoGuard. d. Snow Management Systems. 2. Brackets and Baseplate: Stainless Steel, mill finished. 3. Bars: Stainless steel, mill finished. SLATE SHINGLES 073126 3 AOW Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College "W Northampton, MA AM 4W 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AW A. Source Limitations: Obtain each color of slate shingle from single quarry AM capable of producing slate of consistent quality in appearance and physical 40*1 properties. Aft B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. AW Im 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING AM A. Store underlayment rolls on end, on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not Im double stack rolls. A 1 . Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid ""w significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. .R B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left AM overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. A* 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS .. A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with installation of self-adhering sheet underlayment only within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures AM recommended by manufacturer. low AM 1 .8 WARRANTY .M A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or AW replace slate roofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. AW 1 . Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLATE SHINGLES A. Slate Shingles: ASTM C 406, Grade S1 ; hard, dense, and sound; chamfered edges, with nail holes machine punched or drilled and countersunk. No A"k, broken or cracked slates, no broken exposed corners, and no broken corners ,o on covered ends that could sacrifice nailing strength or laying of a watertight AW roof. Am A. SLATE SHINGLES 073126 low 2 ,M AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 w Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 073126 - SLATE SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS �w A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Slate shingles. 2. Underlayment. 3. Snow Guards. �w B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for roof sheathing. 2. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on ridge vents. Aw 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual for definitions of terms related to roofing A► work in this Section. Ak '! 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to �w verify color selected: 1 . Slate Shingle: Full size, of each color, size, texture, and shape. .w 2. Ridge Cap: 12-inch- long Sample. 3. Fasteners: Three fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 4. Exposed Valley Lining: 12 inches square. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 4M ** SLATE SHINGLES 073126 1 Am .O Aft AM AOW .M Aft AW low 4w AW AW Aft AMW wb ,mow A AOW AM A AIW AM A AOW M .W AM AMW Am AW 4w d Aft AW AM Ank +mow Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College +ut► Northampton, MA J. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate �► functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop- ,,, applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. Aft END OF SECTION 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 11 .h, AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA .m. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, . using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to ,, greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches long, except Am where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and AW stagger in adjacent and related members. Aw 1 . Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, Im sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. AW 2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight Ak line than 1 /8 inch in 96 inches. G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors fit openings properly and are low accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings AM and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware Am and accessory items as indicated. i 1 . Install cabinets with no more than 1 /8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other ''' variation from a straight line. AW 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not .W more than 16 inches o.c. with stainless steel oval head screws with finish AW, washers. Space fasteners evenly from sides, top and bottom and center A to center. Pre-drill holes for fasteners in shop. Aw H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through supports into underside of ,W countertop. AW W 1 . Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to AM comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in .. color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface A* scratches, and clean entire surface. A 2. Install countertops with no more than 1 /8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or ,M other variation from a straight line. A. 3. Secure loose backsplashes to walls with adhesive. AW 4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with mildew resistant silicone sealant. AW AW I. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 10 „m AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA D. Install according to manufacturers written instructions. E. Apply corner bead on finished curb in continous bead of adhesive to create flashing for raised curb and wet wall. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. rte. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1 /8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and Aft matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 9 AW AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA ow 3. Edges: Grade VGS matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. low AW C. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 4W 1 . Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, AM Grade VGS. 10*1 4 D. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High- pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. low 2.9 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS w. .A A. Grade: Premium. .M. B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 112 inch. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements: AM 1 . As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Ak AW D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid- 4ft surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, Im sealers, fabrication, and finishing. AW 1 . Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration .w indicated. 2. Fabricate tops with shop-applied backsplashes and loose side splashes AM for field application. A AM E. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop. A F. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings in shop. Aft AW low 2.10 SHOWER BASES AM A. Inspect bases and confirm dimensions. B. Adjust rough opening to allow proper clearances. C. Level uneven floors with floor filler. A. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 AM 8 ,M .w MW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College A► Northampton, MA accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Ak 1 . Seal edges of openings in laminate countertops with a coat of varnish. Ak ,o 2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of ,W► transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. �w D. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in .► plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. 2.7 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. *ft C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. ,k Do not glue for width. Ak +* 2.8 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS & FABRICATED CASEWORK A. Grade: Premium. B. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1 . Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 7 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA �* 1 . Wood Glues: 30 g/L. AW 2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. AM E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: PVA. AW 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL AW A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. ""w 4W B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality AM standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity ,w during fabrication and in installation areas. Aft C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges AW to radius indicated for the following: '" Im 1 . Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 •• Inch Thick or Less: 1 /16 inch. AW 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1 /8 inch. Aw 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1 /16 inch. AM D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to Am maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble Aw. components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary '"k for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. AM ow 1 . Notify 'Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely AW assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that AW various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies low. against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before ON. disassembling for shipment. Aw E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, Ak appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate Ak openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 "M 6 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 '" Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." B. Butt Hinges: 3-inch, 5-knuckle stainless steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- thick metal. C. Catches: Sugatsune stainless steel draw latches w D. Towel Hooks: Sugatsune HT50, stainless steel finish E. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA Al 56.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1 . Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. 4,W ' F. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA Al 56.9. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal anchors and inserts as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 M 5 A A., A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA A 2.2 MATERIALS AW Aft A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood. C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1 . Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. AM 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 , M-2-Exterior Glue. AW D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not A indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. .W 1 . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high- AW pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: AW a. Formica Corporation. Aft b. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. ,W C. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. Mk AW 2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full lak range. Am E. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin AIM complying with ISSFA-2. AM 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide *1W products by the following: AM a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. Aw 2. Integral Bowls: 830 sinks 40 3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full , range. AW F. Solid-Surfacing Material at Shower Bases: Homogeneous molded bases of A' filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. Aft 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide J products by the following: a. Swan Corporation. . . 2. Shower Bases: R-3260, left or right handed as shown. AW INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 "m 4 ,m AFM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA A environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate Ak fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 4 1 . Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1 .8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering interior architectural woodwork that may be incorporated into the Work include w„ firms listed on the approved Sub-bidder List. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 3 AW ..s Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 .4 SUBMITTALS Aa* A. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate, solid-surfacing material, Ak cabinet hardware and accessories. Aw B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and A* elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. am 1 . Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, AW including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other .w Sections. am AW C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1 . Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material. 40M 3. Solid-surfacing materials. AM. M Aft 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .w, A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom- AW fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose AM products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a AW certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. Aw B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification AW Program. ... C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Aft Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork AM indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. ow Aw D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with AW requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." low m1k 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ,w A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could A damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork & must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where Aft INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 2 Aft �w► Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Interior standing and running trim to match existing profiles. 2. Interior door frames. 3. Flat wood paneling and wainscotts. 4. Patterned wood paneling. 5. Interior ornamental work. 6. Plastic-laminate casework. 7. Solid-surfacing-material countertops, stools, saddles and trim. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry' for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. , ► 1 .3 DEFINITIONS �w A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 1 AIM A A Aw Ak Aft .W AM wiw .s� wwl gow . w AW AW ok AM AM ww ...k AM Alk AM- Aft Aft Aaw Alk Aft A AM Am* A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; replace woodwork where not possible to repair. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064013 oft 4W A► r EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064013 7 Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Aw Northampton, MA Aft AM B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. ** 3.2 INSTALLATION . . A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with same grade specified in Part 2 for type of woodwork involved. Aw B. Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. AW C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or AW repair damaged finish at cuts. AM Awl D. Ship loose base trim for pilasters for field installation after roof base flashing Im is installed where woodwork is above roof surfaces. 1 . Coordinate delivery of pilasters with roofing applications and schedule. AM E. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and .e drilled holes according to AWPA M4. .W. F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk Am concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. AM G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, oft using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest Am extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1 . Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight AW line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. AW H. Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at .W shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with oft matching filler where exposed. AM I. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural "` woodwork. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064013 4W 6 AAK Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA D. Wood Species: Western red cedar. 2.7 EXTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Premium. AM B. Wood Species: Western red cedar. 2.8 EXTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Exterior ornamental work for opaque finish includes the following: 1 . Balustrades. 2. Pediment heads. �. 3. Pilasters. a B. Grade: Premium. C. Wood Species: Ponderosa pine or Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine. 1 . Do not use plain-sawn lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. 2.9 SHOP PRIMING A. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 09 painting Sections. B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1 . Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064013 5 w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Aww ..ol� 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A A. Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, pressure- preservative treated, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. low B. Nails: Stainless steel. C. Screws: Bronze or stainless steel. 1 . Provide self-drilling screws for metal framing supports, as recommended .. by metal-framing manufacturer. AW D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for *b, secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts, unless otherwise indicated. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. AW 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: 9 to 15 percent. low B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges •m to radius indicated for the following: AW 1 . Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 AM inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. Am Aft C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, .� to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary " for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. low D. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, AW electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use Aft templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped AW openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal with a water-resistant coating suitable for exterior applications. MV* AM 2.6 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH Ak A. Grade: Premium. AW B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members, and kerf backs of other wide, Ah flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. Ab C. Assemble casings in plant except where shipping limitations require field assembly. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064013 4 , Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.2 MATERIALS + ► A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1 . Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1 , Exterior, Medium Density Overlay. 2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: Comply with AWPA N1 using the following preservative for woodwork items indicated to receive water- repellent preservative treatment: 1 . Water-Repellent Preservative/Insecticide: Formulation made specifically for dip treatment of woodwork items and containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC) as its active ingredient, combined with an insecticide containing chlorpyrifos as its active ingredient, both • complying with AWPA P8. B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood) and the following: 1 . Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 2. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 and 15 percent. Do not use materials that are warped or do not comply with requirements for untreated materials. 3. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. dk C. Extent of Treatment: Treat blocking and nailers by pressure process and treat other exterior architectural woodwork either by nonpressure process. 1 . Items fabricated from the following wood species need not be treated: a. Western red cedar. b. Teak. C. African mahogany. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064013 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 low Smith College Northampton, MA A* AM 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AW A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom- fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose , products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. Aft AM B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of exterior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS �•.. A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior woodwork only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, , snow, or dampness. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before ,W fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. AW 1 . Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. ,. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for AW trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual AM dimensions correspond to established dimensions. AM Ak 1 .6 COORDINATION AM A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other AM, related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS Aw A A. Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators AW offering exterior architectural woodwork that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to firms on the Owner's preferred sub- contractor list. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064013 low 2 , low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 064013 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL ` 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the matching existing profiles and details for replacement of existing and new exterior woodwork for the following: 1 . Exterior frames and jambs. 2. Exterior ornamental work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for exterior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product and process indicated and ,^ incorporated into items of exterior architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. 1 . Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1 . Show locations and sizes of blocking and nailers, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. ak D. Qualification Data: For fabricator. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064013 1 lak AM ARW AIM Aw AM_ A Ad A, AMW AOW AM AM Aw w> AIW A AOW Aw Aft .w� AW low AM .wa AM AIM w.. ANA. Ak. ..R AW AW AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 3.6 STAIR AND DECK INSTALLATION A. Treads and Risers at Exterior Stairs: Secure treads and risers by gluing and nailing to carriages. Countersink nail heads, fill flush, and sand filler. Extend treads over carriages and finish with bullnose edge. B. Composite Decking: Install decking to comply with manufacturer's written instructions in continuous lengths perpendicular to face of building and sloped to shed water. Pre-drill holes in end planks, countersink screws and fill with plastic wood filler. Leave 1/4-inch gap at building for expansion and contraction. I. Trim: Install with pre-drilled countersunk screws and construction adhesive. Fill with plastic wood filler. 2. Prime exposed decking as soon as practical. Protect from excess foot traffic until finish coats can be applied. Aft 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and oft shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. • B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 062013 w► EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 7 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College low Northampton, MA 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL .OW A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately AW seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. AW 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. AW Mb,_ B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. AO" 1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. Ak 2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior .W finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 3. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within AMV each flight. 4. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. A Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish AM carpentry. ww 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. •�► B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum AM lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where necessary. "" 1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. AM 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. 4 W AW C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Plane backs of casings to provide AM uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. AM D. Unless otherwise indicated, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. AW AM 3.5 SIDING INSTALLATION Oak A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. Aft AM B. Vertical Lumber Siding: Begin application at corner with tongue edge out. Install subsequent „A, courses with tongue-and-groove edges tightly fitted together. Nail at horizontal blocking spaced not more than 16"on center. Aft 1. Scarf butt joints to shed water only over framing or blocking, nailing top and bottom on Mk each side and staggering joints in subsequent courses. o AM EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 Im 6 A , AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA a. Products: TenduraPlank Natural; Tendura, LLC, Troy, Alabama (1-800- TENDURA). 2. Ogee nosing: Same as decking, 7/8-inch x 1 7/8-inch. Am 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS sk, A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate. 1. For pressure-preservative-treated wood,provide stainless-steel fasteners. 2. For composite siding use fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. 4^ 3. For composite decking,provide#8 x 2 1/4-inch stainless steel screws. 4. For applications not otherwise indicated,provide stainless-steel fasteners. B. Insect Screening for Soffit Vents: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh. „ 2.9 FABRICATION w A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches, except members with ends exposed in finished work. B. Ease edges of lumber less than I inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of ±� lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius. PART 3 -EXECUTION Oft Am 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Prime lumber to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting." sk Aft EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AMW Northampton, MA Aak 2.4 COMPOSITE SIDING om A. Fiber-Cement Siding: Siding made from fiber-cement board that does not contain asbestos oft fibers; complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when Am tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. Alk low 1. Manufacturers: a. James Hardie Inc. 2. Horizontal Pattern: Boards 5-1/4 to 5-1/2 inches wide in plain style. w a. Texture: Smooth. AW 3. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 4W Am 2.5 AW A 2.6 WOOD SOFFITS .W A. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20. ,w., AW B. Species and Grade: Grade Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) eastern white pine, eastern hemlock-balsam fir-tamarack, eastern spruce, or white woods; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or .w WWPA. A, C. Pattern: Beaded edge, smooth-faced beaded groove and tongue-groove pattern, actual face Aft width(coverage)and thickness of 3-1/8 by 9/16 inch,measured at 19 percent moisture content. AM AM 2.7 STAIRS AND DECKING A A. Stairs: A 1. Treads: 1-1/4-inch thick, kiln-dried, pressure-preservative-treated stepping with half- Am round or rounded edge nosing. a. Species and Grade: Hem-fir, C & Btr VG (Vertical Grain) stepping; NLGA, AW WCLIB,or WWPA. AM 2. Risers: 3/4-inch thick,kiln-dried,pressure-preservative-treated finish boards. Amlk� a. Species and Grade: Hem-fir, C & Btr or Superior finish; NLGA, WCLIB, or ow WWPA. low B. Decking: "'w 1. Composite tongue and groove decking, 3/4-inch x 3 1/8-inch face width, pre-drilled for AW fastening. .W Aw EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 A 4 Aft low 4 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. ow Oft 2.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Painted Finish: aW 1. Species and Grade: Eastern white pine, eastern hemlock-balsam fir-tamarack, eastern spruce, or white woods; Premium or 2 Common (Sterling); NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12 percent or less. 3. Finger Jointing: Allowed if made with wet-use adhesive complying with ASTM D 5572. 4. Face Surface: Surfaced(smooth). B. Moldings for Painted Finish: WMMPA WM 4, P-grade wood moldings. Made from kiln-dried stock to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12. 1. Species: Redwood Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar 40 pine. 2. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. C. MDO Trim: Exterior Grade B-B,MDO plywood. 2.3 LUMBER SIDING A. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20. B. Species and Grade: Grade Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) eastern white pine, eastern hemlock-balsam fir-tamarack, eastern spruce, or white woods; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. a w� C. Pattern: Square edge, smooth-faced tongue-and-groove pattern, actual face width (coverage) and thickness of 3-1/8 by 23/32 inch,measured at 19 percent moisture content. s�► EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 3 Aft AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ""'' Northampton, MA Ak 1. For exterior wood columns, include details of cap, base, and plinth. Include profiles of ,M trim proposed to match existing profiles. Am E. Compliance Certificates: AM I. For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. low 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Aft A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, A, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Aft Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AM AW A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather ... conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. Aft Am 1. For exterior ornamental wood columns, comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. AM AW B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. Am 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, Aft discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. A* 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. ,Mk, 1.7 WARRANTY Am A. Special Warranty for Composite Siding: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Ak manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding 1^ that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but AM are not limited to,deformation or deterioration beyond normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period for Siding (Excluding Finish): 25 years from date of Substantial 'M Completion. ,W B. Special Warranty for Composite Deck: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Aft Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that fails in *m materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not AM limited to, deformation or deterioration beyond normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period for Deck: Life of Installation. A .w, AW AW EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 Am 2 A Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 062013 -EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Lumber and Composite siding. 3. Wood soffits. 4. Exterior composite porch decking. 5. Exterior ornamental wood columns built-up from standard profiles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Division 06 Section "Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for shop-fabricated exterior woodwork. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. Oft 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component �w. materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application 4M details. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of siding and decking indicated. C. Shop Drawings: 4ft D. EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 1 Am Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA AM 2. Wall and Roof Sheathing: AM a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels. b. Space panels 1 /8 inch apart at edges and ends. low END OF SECTION 061600 Aw .► A0, .M I. low A AW Aft AM AM A Aft. Aa ..w .k AW AM SHEATHING 061600 AM 4 AM A.. am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA o, 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Ak A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION Ak a 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. �.► C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1 . Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's "BOCA National Building Code." D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION �w A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1 . Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. 4% b. Space panels 1 /8 inch apart at edges and ends. Ak SHEATHING 061600 3 A•• AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Aw Northampton, MA Alk B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less ► than thickness indicated. „W C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.2 ROOF SHEATHING , A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1 . Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. 2.3 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT All A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1 , Exposure 1 , Am Structural I, Underlayment single-floor panels. AM 1 . Span Rating: Not less than 16 o.c. AM 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. AM 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. 4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face. B. Underlayment, General: Provide 3-ply poplar underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1 /4 inch. .� 1 . Product: Multi-ply. 2.4 FASTENERS ,M A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with .a requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. AM B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. • AM C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. Aw D. Wood Screws: ASME 1318.6.1 . 'M AO.. AW SHEATHING 061600 2 , AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS `k A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and w� Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A, 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Roof sheathing. 2. Subflooring. 3. Underlayment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1 .4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. ,ww PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. SHEATHING 061600 1 Alk Aak Ank Alk 4m Aok ARW Alm Alb wm► AW .■e 40 Am AM AW AM AM j.w .lk AM w* ANk AW Aow Am AW AM Alk AW Am AM Aft .lk ANk low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8- inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. 3.5 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches. "* B. Do not notch engineered lumber joists. .w C. Inspect existing framing for cuts, notches or rot. Sister new framing members Ak to existing where structural integrity of original member has been compromised. D. Replacement of unsound joists discovered after demolition of finishes constitute a change in the work. END OF SECTION 061000 Ak ! ► ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 9 Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College "" Northampton, MA Aw 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION ,W Aft A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. om Coordinate locations with other work involved. Aw AW B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION "'� .w A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with ,,,W wood as required for tolerance of finish work. AW B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1 -by-3-inch nominal- size furring ` horizontally at 24 inches o.c. A C. Furring to Receive Veneer Plaster Board: Install 1 -by-3-inch nominal- size to furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. „W AW 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- size Aft wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. A 2. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more 'a than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of 'ft same width as wall or partitions. "k Ak B. Construct corners and intersections to provide support for finishes. Ak C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header AW members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb AM studs. .r AM AW AM ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 4M 8 Im Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 ,k Smith College Northampton, MA F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1 . Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible ►, materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- thickness. H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1 . NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's BOCA National Building Code. +�w J. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. ►, K. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of Aw, members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1 . Use finishing nails, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 7 AM AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Am Northampton, MA low 2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS .f► A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by AM one of the following: AW 1 . Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. Aft 2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. AW 3. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. .k 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. ,. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with .k ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. 4M Aw. l . Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. .M A PART 3 - EXECUTION '" AW A 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Im A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to a* line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope AW as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. �** AW B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . In addition to framing new floor openings for chases, provide laminated- AM veneer lumber as replacement joists in locations where existing joists are AW rotted, cut or notched to compromise structural integrity. ,W D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 's` A E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. AW Aft ,m ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 AM 6 low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1 , Exposure 1 , C- '"" " D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. a� 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. *" C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1 . E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 . F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1 . Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 5 .wk- Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College A Northampton, MA Al 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ,•w products by one of the following: „m a. Boise Cascade Corporation. A b. Georgia-Pacific. AM C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. Ak d. Weyerhaeuser Company. A% Im 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi for 12-inch , 41 nominal- depth members. Aw 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi. „W AW 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER AW A. A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or AM attachment of other construction, including the following: Im 1 . Blocking. AM 2. Nailers. .0 3. Furring. A. AM B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade AM lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture `m content and the following species and grades: AM mk 1 . Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Aw Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For concealed boards, provide Standard grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species. A' Am E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or Im No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and , selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and , purpose. .W ASR A Im ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 Aft 4 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College 4ft Northampton, MA B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1 . Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness. B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade and the following species: 1 . Hem-fir (north); NLGA. , ► 2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. C. joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1 . Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. D. Exterior joists: Treated No. 2 grade and the following species: 1 . Southern pine; SPIB. 2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. Oft ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 3 AM Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA .. 4. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 144 1 .4 SUBMITTALS AIM AM A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum ,,W allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and ,M design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. AW B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with AM building code in effect for Project: Aw 1 . Engineered wood products. Im Aak 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .m ,m, A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of A. engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 4M AW A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Am, Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. A* Im PART 2 - PRODUCTS AM 4M 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL Awk low A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no AM, grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable AM rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. AM Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to Aft inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 4M 1 . Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. Mb, 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by Am DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are oft, indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. **k 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Aft- Ak ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 AW 2 AW 4M oft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Ak Smith College ,f, Northampton, MA sk SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY ak Ak PART 1 - GENERAL "` 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and �w Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. „ ., 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Framing with dimension lumber. *+ 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking and nailers. 4. Wood furring. 5. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Sheathing." 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. ,eA► D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1 . NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 1 Ok Aft AW Aw Aw AM wW AM AW m AW AM w AW APW Im Aw AM AW AM Aft Awb AIM AW AW AM AIM A Aw AM 40W AM, .O A A 4 AM AIM AW wm Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Ak Smith College Northampton, MA C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage,use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 3.6 CLEANING 'k A. Clean wood rails by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry. A► Ak B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. Ak 4ft C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. Oft 3.7 PROTECTION 4w 4% A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make required M alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. Ak AM END OF SECTION 057300 A► Oft w Am Ak Ak Aft Aft DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 9 Aft Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College 4W Northampton, MA Ak 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or .e finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. ,m 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. o AW C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. AW D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for .m securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. AW AM 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS Aft A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing Aft components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. AM Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. I*"^ B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint .+ within 6 inches of post. Am .w. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS Am A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for 4** installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space „k between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. A B. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch Am buildup, sloped away from post. Aft AW C. Anchor steel posts to steel with flanges, angle or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to wood supporting members where indicated. Im AW D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces. AM Aft 3.5 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 2-inch clearance from Aft inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Aw Am DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS ' 057300 Ak 8 Ak ,.k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 40 Smith College ok Northampton, MA ak 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes,by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. C. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed railings: Am 1. Exterior Railings (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast ,ft Cleaning." 2. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, 'Brush-off Blast Oft Cleaning." Ak F. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. Am 2. Stripe paint corners,crevices,bolts,welds, and sharp edges. G. Painted Finish: Comply with Division 09 painting Sections. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify ''t that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate 4% reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. �w B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 7 low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA AMk 2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. AVW K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature Aft for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire AW bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. AM Ak L. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. AW M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends AM of returns,unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. AM N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, Aft and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work,unless otherwise indicated. ..t 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers AW made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall AM finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. .ft Aft O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. AM Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside AM dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate AM forming bottom closure. AW Am 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL AM A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for AW recommendations for applying and designating finishes. A B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, "" temporary protective covering before shipment. A C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are '' acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations A in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable wM if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. Aak ,w 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Am A. Galvanized Railings: AM M 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. Am a. Provide galvanizing with architectural finish. b. "Colorgaly"by Duncan Galvanizing. 4M A DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 Aft 6 AW AW oU Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College 4 Northampton, MA Ak G. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. a 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage,but not less than that required to support structural loads. ' B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with fittings machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for dimensional adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes. Tag wire-rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and orientations for coordinated installation. D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. E. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. F. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. G. Cut,reinforce,drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. Aft Aft 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. �w 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 1. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth,rigid,hairline joints. „ 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J. Form changes in direction as follows: "f" 1. As detailed. wr► DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS ' 057300 5 Ak Am A". Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College 19W Northampton, MA low 1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30,unless another class is indicated or required by AW structural loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.3 FASTENERS Am A. General: Provide the following: AW AM B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and AM, class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of AM construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. A C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to Aft other work,unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable. AM 1. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless , otherwise indicated. A 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Wood Rails: Hardwood rails of species and profile indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, with manufacturer's standard transparent finish, and secured to recessed metal subrail. '"" AM 1. Species and Finish: Maple with clear conversion varnish finish. 2. Profile: Round shape, 1 1/2-inch diameter. Aft AW B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy w. welded. C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer „f, complying with MPI#79. 4M 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according Mk to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). A D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc- .W coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5. A AIM. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, AW m com p 1 Y g with SSPC-Paint 20. AM F. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,nonstaining,noncorrosive,nongaseous grout A** complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. AM A AM DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 AM 4 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 ok Smith College k Northampton, MA 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING Aft A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. A►. B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support Ak railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. Aft PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS,GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks,rolled trade names, stains, discolorations,or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise , ► indicated. I. Provide cast-metal brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Provide either formed- or cast-metal brackets with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 3. Provide formed-steel brackets with predrilled hole for bolted anchorage and with snap-on cover that matches rail finish and conceals bracket base and bolt head. 4. Provide extruded-aluminum brackets with interlocking pieces that conceal anchorage. Locate set screws on bottom of bracket. Aft 2.2 STEEL AND IRON Ak A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed)or ASTM A 513,Type 5 (mandrel drawn). Ak B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Ak A► D. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. Am Aft DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS OS7300 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College low Northampton, MA Aft b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. 141� C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from AM, the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other AM detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to Aft both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. AM 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. wW, D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. Am 1.5 SUBMITTALS Aft A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products AM furnished comply with requirements. AM C. Welding certificates. .. w. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer. A AM B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for AM system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate Aml to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are AM by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including structural analysis,preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size,profiles,and dimensional requirements of railings and AW are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product AM" Requirements." Aft, 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with 'W Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory AW data to Architect for review. AM D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." Apk Aak AM Ak DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 'W 2 Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 057300 -DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 40 PART 1 -GENERAL Am Ak 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS �a A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 4% 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel and iron ornamental railings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division OS Section"Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings included with metal stairs. 2. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railings fabricated from pipe and tube Ak components. 3. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 4. Division 06 Section " Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood railings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ww► A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor areas,pedestrian guidance and support,visual separation, or wall protection. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. Aft B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 4k 1. Handrails: 4^ a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. Aft C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. Ok 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with 100 lbf/ ft. applied vertically downward. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 s 1 AMI AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 4^ Smith College Northampton, MA low 1 . Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. Am ,.. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: low 1 . For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing *W between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing A* members. "` A 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING to AW A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted AM connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with „M same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for AM touching up shop-painted surfaces. AM A END OF SECTION 055213 om .. .M AW AW A ASK AAW .M A A 4. A Im AM AW ,a. AW low to PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 8 .w AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ok Northampton, MA , ® 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1 /4 inch in 12 feet. C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in- place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently �w connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. "^ B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting #ft railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS �. A. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1 . For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. B. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete. 3.5 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1 /2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. **!► PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 7 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AW Smith College Northampton, MA Im N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, AM miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other to work, unless otherwise indicated. Am AM 1 . At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, AM provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. O. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe low whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without AW lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. ,Ak Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged. AM AW PART 3 - EXECUTION low low 3.1 EXAMINATION lw AM. A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive , anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly ,,,, marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already AW done. Am ..► 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL .,.. .oft A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings Am accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established A lines and levels and free of rack. "W 1 . Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have AM been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field AM connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. ..w 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1 /16 inch in 3 feet. Ak AW AW PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 6 .• Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak, Northampton, MA E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded connections, ow unless otherwise indicated. Ak Ak H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or Au use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, Ak including at fittings. !k 1 . Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. ,, h 1 . Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J. Form changes in direction as follows: 1 . By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. w K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce Ok uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall „ is 1 /4 inch or less. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM, Northampton, MA w* railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding AM design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1 . Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are AW unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. AW Aft 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AW A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for Im metal alloy welded. Awl AW B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal ,W modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. Im Am 2.5 FABRICATION . ., AIM A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, Aft dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage and as Am follows: 1 . Horizontal rails, cornerposts and intermediates for spans greater than 60 4, inches (1500mm): 1 1 /4 inch nominal diameter AW 2. Vertical Balusters: 5/8 inch diameter bars @ 4 1 /2 inches center to AW center. Am 3. Flat vertical base plates: 1 /4 inch thick plate for anchoring to face of 'AM stringers and openings. ml B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and Ift handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated AW installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. AMI C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease .a edges to a radius of approximately 1 /32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. ..41 Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. aw D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. Im Ak PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 "m 4 AM AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural Ak performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL 4W A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. Ok B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1 . Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1 . Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA A. a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act A concurrently. AW AM 1 .4 SUBMITTALS Ak .ft A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments AW to other work. 4W .k 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AW Aaw A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: .w. 1 . AWS D1 .1 , "Structural Welding Code--Steel." A* AW 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AM lak A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction AM contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate AM measurements on Shop Drawings. AW 1 . Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with lak fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and 'Aw other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions 4ft, correspond to established dimensions. Im 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. AM AW 1 .7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING .W Ak A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete A inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for „11 installation. 1W PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 AM 2 M low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and ,k Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this ,w Section. A► o 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Steel pipe railings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the Ak following: 1 . Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under *� conditions indicated: alA�, w 1 . Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 1 Ak AW Aft AW AM .MW A Aft AIM. Aft AM. wW APW IS AM AM AM AOW ,.w Am 4m Aa* Aft AM AM AM AW Am .W*- AO ,M. ,I,. 4w .M AOW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, 'Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. " 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices,bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and Aft masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. #k B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. yes► D. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 5. Maintain a fire watch for four hours after field welding is completed E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section "Cast- in-Place Concrete." 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. END OF SECTION 055100 METAL STAIRS 055100 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 low Smith College Northampton, MA ... 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL low A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets, ""! bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on ..k supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding,unless otherwise indicated. AW 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. AM B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units . only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. AOW C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of AM approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. " D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. AW F. Weld connections to comply with the following: Air 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion AM resistance of base metals. Am 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Am 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no AM roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent „A, surface. ,Mw G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners A^ where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. ..w AM H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep AW holes where water may accumulate. Aft 2.6 FINISHES .w. A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for ,,M recommendations for applying and designating finishes. oft B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. A C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with ft minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: AW 1. Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." Aw METAL STAIRS 055100 Ak 4 .b Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 0% 2.3 FASTENERS '!t A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, A% Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select AK fasteners for type, grade, and class required. Ak B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and,where indicated,flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. D. Machine Screws: ASME B 18.6.3. aw E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. F. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B 18.22.1. G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type,ASME B 18.21.1. Aft H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times ' " the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.)or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). ++ C. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,nonstaining,noncorrosive,nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Am D. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in- Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi,unless otherwise indicated. Aft Am E. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches--W 1.4 by W 1.4,unless otherwise indicated. A• METAL STAIRS 055100 , , 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AM Smith College Northampton, MA AM 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .ow A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. AM Am B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Aft Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. A 40 1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. ... C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: lam� 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." Im 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." Am A 1.6 COORDINATION Am A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and AA directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. AM B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. "' AM Aw, PART 2 -PRODUCTS AM Aft 2.1 METALS, GENERAL Am A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks,roller marks,rolled trade names, or blemishes. `w° A 2.2 FERROUS METALS A Ak A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with A ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. AW C. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, s or structural steel, Grade 30,unless another grade is required by design loads. Am ,w. A A METAL STAIRS 055100 AM 2 Aft 40% Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 055100 -METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL s�► 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. +A+ 1.2 SUMMARY ,Aw► A. This Section includes the following: 4' 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. Aft A"k B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and Ak platforms. 2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal treads and nosings not installed in +fa metal stairs. 3. Division 05 Section"Decorative Metal Railings" for ornamental metal railings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 1001bf/sq. ft.. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Welding certificates. C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. METAL STAIRS 055100 1 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Aft 3.5 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL Aw loft A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials AW are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Im Project site. oft too END OF SECTION 042000 AW Ask AOk AW 4M A* AW Aft A& Am .h Aft aw Aft 0M A Alm ow .w Ak UNIT MASONRY 042000 10 Aw Aw 4k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless otherwise indicated. D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows: "* 1 . Provide individual metal ties not more than 8 inches o.c. 3.3 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 112 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. w� 1 . Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 3.4 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING ' A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or " otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1 . Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and 4M nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. UNIT MASONRY 042000 9 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA Aw PART 3 - EXECUTION .. low 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL "` A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction A* to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry A*,, units, using units of widths indicated. .ow B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide Aw a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor- driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before """ laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces low and, where possible, cut edges concealed. A Aft C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1 . Mix units as they are placed. D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of ,w existing masonry. AW E. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 4M 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb 'W water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. AW JIM 3.2 COMPOSITE MASONRY om A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following A* methods: 4 , AW 1 . Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. Aw a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type A reinforcement extending across both wythes. Aw Awl B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid AW and shoving units of other wythe into place. AW Ak AW UNIT MASONRY 042000 A 8 Aft .M Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1 ; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion 4ft pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1 . Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight. „f, E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored ow aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1 . Mix to match existing. UNIT MASONRY 042000 7 Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College '" ' Northampton, MA 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS low Aw A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with AW ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. "m AS' B. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 Aw inches wide. lift 1 . Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. A" Oak 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS AW A. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, om Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot- AW dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions AW indicated. A B. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. ,® 1 . Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors. low 2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS 4W Am A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly AM exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: Am 1 . Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or HO1 , cold-rolled copper sheet, 10- oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0135 inch thick for fully concealed flashing; 16- "M oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0216 inch thick elsewhere. AW AW Ak UNIT MASONRY 042000 6 ,, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Ak Northampton, MA E. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime masonry cement or mortar cement and mortar pigments, all complying ,,k with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1 . Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. ok 2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 3. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar Ok cement by weight. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1 . Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color �► necessary to produce required mortar color. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. Aft H. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951 . 1 . Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter. * 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1 .7 or 0.148-inch diameter. + ► 4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches AM 0.C. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: 1 . Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with 1 side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. UNIT MASONRY 042000 5 ••R Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when ..� tested per ASTM C 67. 3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 , and is rated "not effloresced." 4. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-1 /2 inches wide by 2-1 /4 inches high by 7- , 112 inches long or 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1 /4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. AW 5. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Where shown to "match existing," provide face brick matching color range, texture, and size of existing adjacent brickwork. .» 7. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect. C. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C 62, Grade MW or SW. Aft 1 . Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net- area compressive strength of 3000 psi. "" 2. Size: Match size of face brick. lm� 3. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-1 /2 inches wide by 2-1 /4 inches high by 7- 1 /2 inches long or 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1 /4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. 004 4. Application: Use where brick is indicated for concealed locations. Face AM brick complying with requirements for grade, compressive strength, and 1 size indicated for building brick may be substituted for building brick. AM AM 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS • Aft A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for lm. cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. *W Aw C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with AM ASTM C 207, Type S. A D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 . A. .. UNIT MASONRY 042000 Aw 4 ,,,, A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more 4W than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1 . Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net- �w area compressive strength of 2150 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Lightweight, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 2.4 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1 . For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade MW or SW . 1 . Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net- area compressive strength of 3000 psi. + ► UNIT MASONRY 042000 3 I gill .gip A**, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 oft Smith College Northampton, MA AW B. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: AV 1 . Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. ow 2. Colored mortar. *04 Ak 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING AW Am A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not AW stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof ow sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. am B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. Ak 4^ C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be ow maintained and contamination avoided. 4W D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. A AW 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS .y. A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially AW completed masonry when construction is not in progress. .ft B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. .� C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602. • PART 2 - PRODUCTS low low 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AW A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following A, requirements apply to product selection: UNIT MASONRY 042000 AM 2 ,m Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY Aft A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: ^ " 1 . Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. A, 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. 2. Division 07 Section "point Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS ,ft A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. * UNIT MASONRY 042000 -IM WWII 1 AWE A .. A A Aft Aft AOk AM AW Aft Ad . Am fow. AIWI ow AOW AW ARW Alb. AIW 4m AM .,, AW Aft A►. AW A®w M ASW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College 4k Northampton, MA 4*4 at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial , ► application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301. 1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd.,plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. 3.10 REPAIRS A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. END OF SECTION 033053 4W 40 moo oft MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 7 A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A% A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for Ask concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. Oft B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or Aft darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater AW appears on surface. AM 1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. AW C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to .w floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, fluid-applied or .w direct-to-deck-applied membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. 1010, D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces "M exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a A cleavage membrane,paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. JM E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior ,.w concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. A 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING Aft AM A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot AIM temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot- weather protection during curing. . , A B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing Oft operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and A bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. AM C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete A* surface. Aw D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a AW combination of the following methods: .*^ 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the Am following materials: AM, a. Water. AM b. Continuous water-fog spray. l,, C. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. low A 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 ° 6 ow, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- '! '" fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when Aft cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints: Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface,unless otherwise indicated. 4M 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT Am A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring,batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. Ak D. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. 3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view,. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 5 4W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College "f Northampton, MA 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING AW A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to A ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. A,,% 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F,reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. Aft B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. AAW Ak 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not AW more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer,before any part of batch is released. 2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each am additional 1 cu. yd.. Aft 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water AW added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. ,W Am PART 3 - EXECUTION 4W aw 3.1 FORMWORK 4W A. Design, construct, erect,brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. '"ft AW 3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. AW 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape. Aw .0w 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT w., A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting '"'"' reinforcement. A* 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. A A. 3.4 JOINTS ,,f, A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. ""k Am B. Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, .. at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. AW MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 4 AM. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College wr Northampton, MA 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. Ak 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder: Multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet,ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Aft B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd.when dry. 4w C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne,Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,Type 1, Class B. F. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES Ak 4* A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 4 inches,plus or minus 1 inch. +� 3. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent. C. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate but not less than a rate of 1.5 lb/cu.yd.. 4^!► MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 3 4M Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA low D. Comply with ACI117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and lm, Materials." Aft AW PART 2 -PRODUCTS AW AM 2.1 FORMWORK Aft A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT ... A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire Aft into flat sheets. .. D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. ,.k 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS ..e A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. Ak C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable. Im Aft D. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for Aft use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long. 4W 2.4 ADMIXTURES AW AW A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. AW B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with ow other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those AM permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. ""' Aft 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. low 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type D. ..t 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type F. AW MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 AW 2 „W w M."• 40 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 033053 -MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Ak Ow 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for noncritical applications of concrete and for projects using small quantities of concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: In addition to the following,comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. D. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following sections,unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: Aft 4W 1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." O"' 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." Aft- 4. "Concrete Mixtures." Am 5. "Handling,Placing,and Constructing." 6. "Lightweight Concrete." 4^ MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 1 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College a Northampton, MA Aw D. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and ,,f„ so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 07 for new roofing requirements. AW 1. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS low A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or m otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site Aak and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. *f 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces Aft, and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that Aft will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. AW 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." AW d B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. aw C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. Ab Im 3.7 CLEANING A A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition ""., operations began. Aft� AW END OF SECTION 024119 A"Ok Aft .*R .,t SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 A 6 Im low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches. 5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 6. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 7. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result reuse of building elements. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area off-site. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Aft D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Aft 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials ' ' necessary to make item functional for use indicated. 4M E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations 4ft after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other AWA parts of building. 2. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. ,e a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed ANN, with removal of the wall. Aft low 3.3 PREPARATION .Ak A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal low operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other am adjacent occupied and used facilities. A"k I. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section AM "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Aft B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent Aft injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. O 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and am to and from occupied portions of building. ,M 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of AM existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. A 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are , exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." AW C. Temporary nShorin g� Provide and maintain shorin g,bracin g, and structural su pp orts as required AW to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes AW to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. AW 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL .w A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: .lm 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete low selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use AW cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. AW Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and low SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 AW 4 „M Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. ' PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. ate• B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. AM D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. .e� E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings preconstruction photographs and templates. 1. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials,and construction details required to make exact reproduction. F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 4W 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them 4% against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 01 Section"Summary." B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 3 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA '" 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AM A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before AW beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities Alk having jurisdiction. CAI►. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Ate` Division 01 Section 'Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures AM related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: AW 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. •� 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as Aft far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: AW. a. Furnishings b. Artwork C. Kitchen equipment. d. Disconnected emergency generator. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. o► C. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively A demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. AW Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 4 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. Am* 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; low immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. AW M AW SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 Aft 2 A. low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY , ► A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. Aft 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. ► B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 2. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal" for disposal of demolished materials. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed,removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP Ak A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 1 awe, AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of ` submitted as Record Product Data. A* 5. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data to submittal. am 1 . Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. AW 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. `f 3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. A*, 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS AW A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for 'W miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual Mk performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ,,k, ready for continued use and reference. AM A PART 3 - EXECUTION A* 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications , to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. *�^ B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction • purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, .� legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. low .W END OF SECTION 017839 „w PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 AW 4 Im Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA ok 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1 . Format: DWG, AutoCad 2004 Version , operating in Microsoft Windows operating system. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract k Drawings for use in recording information. `'& a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of CAD Drawings as they relate to the Contract Drawings. *? C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation 'PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1 . Layer assignments: Assign layers for record drawing notations with the prefix CTR. Add suffix designations for dimensions, notes and categories of work so modifications can be readily identified from original CAD file. 2. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 3. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1 . Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Oft Northampton, MA �. B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. 1 . Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in Aft manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. . 1k Aw PART 2 - PRODUCTS AIM 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. ..� 1 . Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. At Ao a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. AW C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. '" Aw 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited ow to, the following: 4W a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. ,W b. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. C. Revisions to electrical circuitry. .w d. Actual equipment locations. A,,, e. Duct size and routing. f. Locations of concealed internal utilities. "" g. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. h. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable 'o` of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop low Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record plots with colored high-lighter marker or clouded with color Ao. pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. .� 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. AW PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 Im 2 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ,W A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1 . Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project & Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 4W 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1 . Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: 4% a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set(s) of plots from corrected Record CAD Drawings and one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each plot and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return plots and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. ®w b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of Record CAD Drawing files, one set(s) of Record CAD Drawing plots, and one copy printed from record plots. Plot and print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. 1) Electronic Media: CD-R. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 1 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark AM each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. AW If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using ,ak appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 4M Aft 1 . Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are Aft not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. low. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to A illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. '" low 1 . Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in AW Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents." Aft G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for `W submitting operation and maintenance documentation. AW END OF SECTION 017823 lak lak .k AM low lft AW ,0k, A Ak Aw OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 M, 8 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1 . Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' 4ft maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1 . Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. �w D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, �*► subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1 . Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. �w ^+ * OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 7 A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 A*^ Smith College Northampton, MA '" .W 5. Repair instructions. ,M E. Repair Materials and Sources: include lists of materials and local sources of AM materials and related services. 4W F. Warranties and Bonds: include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. low 1 . Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL �. Aft- A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, „k, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and .k warranty and bond information, as described below. Ak B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment AON, included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and *' telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and „,k cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. Ask C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance Mm documentation including the following information for each component part or AW, piece of equipment: look 1 . Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. "" 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. �• D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that A» detail essential maintenance procedures: , 1 . Test and inspection instructions. ""_ 2. Troubleshooting guide. low 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and Am reassembly instructions. AW 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. low 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication „b, requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 6 4W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1 . Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. ** 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where *�+ required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance Oft procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and 4w maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1 . Product name and model number. " 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1 . Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ` Northampton, MA low IAW b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, ' and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for .► multiple-volume sets. AW 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. A'* Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and loft major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. AM 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-1 1-inch white bond paper. ,. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place AM drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. low Im 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data lak required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: A* Aw 1 . System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design AW responsibility. , 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. low 6. Wiring diagrams. ow 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. Aw 9. Precautions against improper use. AW 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. im B. Descriptions: Include the following: AW 1 . Product name and model number. o 2. Manufacturer's name. om 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. • 7. Performance curves. , OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 'W 4 AW .. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1 . Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the AM following information: 1 . Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. 4w C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1 . If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1 . Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-1 1- """"" inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 ,� 3 .w Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA .R. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS AW A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before .m requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete AM operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. AW A B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 "~ days after final inspection. to 1 . Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. .» Submit final copy of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of M. Architect's comments. AW 1 .5 COORDINATION Aft A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on AW installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, Ask assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare lak manuals. 4M PART 2 - PRODUCTS 0M AM 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: ,W 1 . List of documents. AW 2. List of systems. Aft 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in ' separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, AW and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 2 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 'ft PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1 . Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes, systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS Oft A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. �n OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 ,� 1 Aw .... AM# 4w A .w AW Am AIM Alk Alw Aft AM Aw Awk .m. 4w low AM A. AIM AM Ask Aow ,.w Aw ,.k AM 4ow AW AW A �R Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AN Northampton, MA Ah �n► vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, + � taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of Aft repair or restoration. 04. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. A" n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do ►, not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge 44 volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 017700 Aft CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 4% 5 AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 AM Smith College Northampton, MA AW PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning ,M agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. A AM PART 3 - EXECUTION AM AW 3.1 FINAL CLEANING AW A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal Am operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. "' B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average " commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with �» manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection Am for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a Ak portion of Project: ,a a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by Im construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even- textured surface. A. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus ,M material from Project site. AW e. Clean exposed interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Im Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore Aft reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, Im including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, .M manholes, attics, and similar spaces. .k g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. AW i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, A CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 low 4 low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must ° be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1 . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. a�1► 1 .5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) ,gin► A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by ►� Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1 . Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior staging areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. Aft 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. * b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1 .6 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. ,w. 1 . Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1 1 -inch paper. �n► 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title ' 'WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 0% CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 4ft 3 gin► AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Am Smith College Northampton, MA lak AW 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and Aew maintenance manuals, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model Wk number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. oft Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. Aft 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. "�' 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with I mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. Im 11 . Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. low 12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. M 13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to AM eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. Im On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of AM Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, Am either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. "" AW 1 . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous AM inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for A Final Completion. ,m 1 .4 FINAL COMPLETION Im A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining Ak date of Final Completion, complete the following: AM 1 . Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section A "Payment Procedures." Ak 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify *� Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate Aw CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 2 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Alta Oft PART 1 - GENERAL 'Aft ah 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ARIA, A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY Oh A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract ' closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: A +w► 1 . Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. Aft 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1► 1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. ►, 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1 .3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1 . Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 1 AM AMW Am low AM A AIM AM Am .,w AIM Im Aft Aft A. AOk A AM AM .w. ,aw► AMW . W AW AM Ak AMk A AM Alk AIW ANIN, AW AM AOW ..W .., A 4w A. Am, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Oft Northampton, MA 1 . Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. w► 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on �. adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 017419 �n CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 7 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA lak. 1 . Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. low D. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. AW 1 . Separate suspension system, trim, and other metals from panels and the ow and sort with other metals. Am E. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. F. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size. Aw G. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. Aft H. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, .m meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. � I. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size. Ak AM 3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE 144 AW A. Packaging: 1 . Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle .* and store in a dry location. AW 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove 4 pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. Aw B. Wood Materials: Aft AM 1 . Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Salvage pieces greater than 16 inches long for re-use as blocking. Bag or crate cut-offs too short for use. A 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated AM. wood. , 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise ** reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them Im in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 0174'" 6 .f Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site. 5. Protect items from damage. 3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL "^ A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. Am B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only; available recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited w► to, the following: C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 1 . Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. Ak 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling "f" receiver or processor. 3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals. 1 . Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets. 4"` B. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Oft Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials. C. Metals: Separate metals by type. +!t CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA A^ ,.w PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) lak AW PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION AM A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect and 4W Owner. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and AW other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. """ 1 . Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation, termination, and removal requirements. B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste ,a management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 1 . Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, AW recycling, and disposal. AW C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations JW to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and ,M other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1 . Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating ,f materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for AW controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. Ahl 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE AW A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: A' AW 1 . Clean salvaged items. ,W, 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. W 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. AW 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new AM materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use AW indicated. , B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site. C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: 1 . Clean salvaged items. AW. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01741m 4 „m 4k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA o► ok 5) Plastic pails. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste Management Coordinator. w� 2. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 3. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 4. Review waste management requirements for each trade. Aft 1 .6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and on site procedures. B. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill. 1 . Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work. w� 2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold, transport materials off-site. 3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations arrange for receipt. 4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. 5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 3 Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AW Northampton, MA AW AW F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. AW Aw 1 .4 PERFORMANCE GOALS AM ,1ft A. General: Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates AW for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total waste generated by the Work. 1 . Demolition Waste: a. Brick. '" b. Wood studs. .W C. Wood paneling. AW d. Wood trim. e. Doors and frames. AM f. Door hardware. AW g. Windows. h. Glazing. ,.. i. Carpet. Aw j. Cabinets. Oft k. Piping. I. Supports and hangers. AM% m. Copper wiring. Aw n. Lighting fixtures. AW o. Ballasts. p. Electrical devices. Am q. Switchgear and panelboards. AW 2. Construction Waste: A. a. Site-clearing waste. b. Masonry and CMU. C. Lumber. ,o d. Wood sheet materials. e. Wood trim. f. Metals. g. Carpet and pad. Aft h. Gypsum board. i. Piping. j. Electrical conduit. Aw k. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: A 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. AW 3) Boxes. A 4) Wood crates. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 0174' 2 Ak low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ok Northampton, MA 4% 4% SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 'ft PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1 . Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for environmental- protection measures during construction. 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste. 3. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. +m D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or ok reuse in another facility. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 1 low Aft Aw .l Am AW AM Aft AM AM AW 4w am .m AM AM .IW Oak .iw. .w ..k ..k .k AOIW AM A ow ..► AW AW AOW AIW Aft AW Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable w� seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1 . Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying p aint or * other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the w. new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to w provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. S. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores !' enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ow Northampton, MA to , 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to Aft prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for lak portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching Aak operations. AM C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption IMK of free passage to adjoining areas. low D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing Aft services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. AW 3.3 PERFORMANCE AW A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without AM delay. A* 1 . Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. , B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1 . In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. M 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. AW 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. *s► 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or r. partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 low 4 ,W low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1 . Notify Architect 24 hours prior to preparation of test patch mock-ups and w 48 hours prior to commencing with patching operations. 4% 1 .6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the ak fullest extent possible. A 1 . If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials Ok that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of *ft in-place materials. '"""' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1 . Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA -w AMI 1 .4 SUBMITTALS ,,w A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: AW 1 . Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, Am and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include °" changes to structural elements and operating components as well as .•k changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. low 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. AW 4. Test Samples: For each patch required to meet visual requirements „k, perform test patch as mock up of intended results. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems Aw that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List AW services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later to require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. AW o 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Aft A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner 1W that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related Ak components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as Aft intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following: o 1 . Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. Aft 3. Fire-suppression systems. ow 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. „„ 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. Im 7. Electrical wiring systems. AW C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or low related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, AM that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 1 . Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 Aw 2 A, Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA sk SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING oft 'Ak PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 4W A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 4W 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Hazardous Materials: The Owner has surveyed existing construction and Ak determined the existence of hazardous materials on site in the areas associated with the Work. These include, but are not limited to: 1 . .Joint Compound 2. Linoleum Flooring 3. Mudded fittings 4. Ceiling Tile Adhesive C. Removal of Hazardous Materials: The Owner will engage under separate contract a firm specialized in the abatement of hazardous materials for removal of hazardous materials. The Contractor is responsible for training workers in procedures if suspected hazardous materials are uncovered during cutting and patching operations. D. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. Ak B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 Aft 1 A Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College "" Northampton, MA A AW 1 . Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. ,ak B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. 406 AW C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. "" ,1., D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. ow ,W END OF SECTION 017300 Aft Aw. ,. Im. Im 4M AW AW 1W EXECUTION 017300 AW 6 „W ow Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the * construction period. 3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. 4ft C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and Ak equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is 4,, without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged !* substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section „ "Cutting and Patching." % EXECUTION 017300 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA Aft to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. AM ..a 3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. look AM 1 . Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. Am 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. ow 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, "°° according to regulations. -M B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. Jft C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1 . Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous As to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. Aw F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as „m necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. ""' G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be AW permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. IM EXECUTION 017300 4 .. 4^ Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 4. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed ,ft allowable tolerances. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1 . Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 7 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling. 4 B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for A% installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. sk F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1 . Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are EXECUTION 017300 3 A** Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 10% lak beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. k B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with ,,w Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. AM 1 . Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. Ak b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 10* C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. �" AW 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. A,► Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. AW 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT AM A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information AW shown on Drawings, in relation existing conditions. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. 1 . Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings Aw to obtain required dimensions. left 2. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. EXECUTION 017300 2 .. low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY Ak A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 4ft 1 . Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Progress cleaning. 4. Starting and adjusting. 5. Protection of installed construction. 6. Correction of the Work. +fw B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. �► 3. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before !► EXECUTION 017300 1 Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA AM 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested Awr substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is AW acceptable to all contractors involved. „v^ 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record AM noncompliance with these requirements: A 1 . Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. A 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes "" such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific 0M features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and '''w addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if «W requested. 5. Samples, if requested. I" PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) AM END OF SECTION 016000 Aft ,0� AW PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 Aw 8 Aw Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. ' 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will bw select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line Ok that includes both standard and premium items. "f` 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS Ok A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. Ak B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1 . Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities Ak having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Ak 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 7 tea. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA .W, 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. Aw 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to AW be matched is Architect's. A 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. Im .0 B. Product Selection Procedures: Aw 1 . Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Aw 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that AW complies with requirements. AW 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with AM requirements. AW 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. ""* 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both Aw products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with �"" provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or Aw system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. low 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other „% characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an AW unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. .. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an .� established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. Aw PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 6 ,,, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 .7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve " *► Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. AL 1 . Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1 . Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. ,M 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form Ok properly executed. Ak 3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content k requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. a�. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS �w 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1 . Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AW Northampton, MA 00,. .W. 1 . Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction low methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. lak 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but Alk incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. low A. 1 .6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING "° A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's " " written instructions. .w B. Delivery and Handling: 1 . Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, AW protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract AM Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. Aft, C. Storage: 1 . Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. Aft 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. "' 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, +» humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. AW PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 4 AW A* Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. '!! I. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 7 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1 . Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional +ft information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 Oft days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 4' 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE oft A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA A Aw B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by "" Contractor. A low C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities ., related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. low 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. AW A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include AM Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. A 1 . Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: AW a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be , provided. Aw b. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the 4W Contract Sum. C. Coordination information, including a list of changes or AN* modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. d. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. e. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and A fabrication and installation procedures. AW f. Samples, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 2 A AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ► Northampton, MA SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL *W 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS % A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1 . Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in " manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled- content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, 40 to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 1 Ask ww lw 4 AW .. Ak 4 4w AW AW #M AM Aow Aw- A ook Am, A. .w. A" A. AIM A* AMW a Aw oft, AM 4 4w . 4w A AW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. ' Comply with NFPA 241 . 1 . Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL ok A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To 4w minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. Oft B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. O. 1 . Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity g'"► control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1 . At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 "! TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 7 Aft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Ak Q.O. 1 . Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures "�"� to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. .� F. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted as indicated, as long as stairs are protected, cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. At 1 . Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. low 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION om to A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental IN& regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil Aw contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. AW 1 . Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other **� construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1 . Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not .. , complete, insulate temporary enclosures. AM C. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust .*. and dirt migration and to separate Work areas from dust, fumes and noise. ,,k 1 . Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with 2 layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, Oft extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length .A of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant plywood. 2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and `W security locks. AM 3. Protect air-handling equipment. ,w 4. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. D. Temporary Fire Protection: Maintain existing fire-suppression systems during construction. When shut-down of system is necessary notify Owner in advance. Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 6 �, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and ' computer in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. I. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities. , w 1 . Provide [DSL] [T-1 line] in primary field office. 4W *w 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: Ok 1 . Provide incombustible construction for sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241 . Ak 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. �w B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." D. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. Ok 1 . Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. A& E. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, as long as elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life. + TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 5 M., Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA all 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. .ak 1 . Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when or service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for A01 temporary services. lak B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. Aft ..0, C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition Ak acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to snt condition existing before initial use. „k, 1 . Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or Ar. leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Ak Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. Mk D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking ..p water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. AW .k. E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for '"' protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select .0k equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. M, M�, F. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Ak Owner. Aaw 1 . Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. "'•" Oak G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides Ak adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. Ak Aft 1 . Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. At H. Telephone Service: The Owner will provide access to temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. 1 . Provide additional telephone lines for the following: M TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 ft, 4 ,n, .w. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1 . Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Drinking water and private toilet. 3. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1 . Store combustible materials apart from building. 2. Seek Owner's approval before mobilizing any storage sheds to the project site. Ak Ak 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1 . Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College w Northampton, MA ..1k. C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide """ connections and extensions of services as required for construction .w operations. Ake .4k, 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .P* A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations "° for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. .k B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. .k, Mk 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AW, A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service Mhl shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each Mh permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. �" .k PART 2 - PRODUCTS MR All Ink, 2.1 MATERIALS Aw A. Fencing: Six foot high chain link fence with traffic and pedestrian gates at locations indicated supported with steel posts in ballasted bases. 1 . Snow Fence: At tree perimeters an for the entire length of the slope facing the Student Center, provide a four foot high wood slat, natural MR, finish snow fence supported by 3x3 wood stakes five feet long driven into .b the ground at eight foot centers B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough AW Carpentry." Mk C. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum 'W available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. M° D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. E. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections. un TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 2 �.a Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 ` Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART ] - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply '! to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1 .4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 1 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) Ao@ Ak PART 3 - EXECUTION Awl. 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1 . Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. AN, 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. Aww 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. "` Alm B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. A„k Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 014000 Ads+ AAt .AR Alt Ask. �P- ASR �R Ap QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 6 s. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to ' comply with the Contract Documents. D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1 . Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1 . Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. aw 1 . Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 5 mole ABM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 4" F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, '� as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications .k specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1 . NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to ,► 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. 1 .7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services., 1 . Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of Mr. testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. AC 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents A"' will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by 1W Change Order. A*0? B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's A responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services Mk specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having "° jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1 . Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless ..M agreed to in writing by Owner. AW. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work 40. that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. Aft, I Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, .�. submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. "` QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 AW 4 oft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 4. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: Ak 1 . Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. Ak 10. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. "` 11 . Name and signature of laboratory inspector. Am 12. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. " 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Aft 1.1% B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products "'� incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with Ak requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities Ak performed by Architect. Ab C. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site AIN for installation of the Work and for completed Work. D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or .k both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. i1. E. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Alh Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a .w, particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. '" Ass F. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and "�'� scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and 44K having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. „r 400. 1 .4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS MIN A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the AN, standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum .•N, quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. .k. .AIR. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation Aki may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may 'Ok, exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these Ask: requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect IANI for a decision before proceeding. 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of .•k qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 AW 2 ,�., Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Ak 4W 1 .2 SUMMARY M A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1 . Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. �w► 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 1 _ Ask AD- Ak Alk A. _ Alk _ ASK _ _ Al*. _ Amok ak _ A _ A40k Apt _ _ _ Alk _ A _ Al. _ _ _ _ A _ Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1 . Approved: No exceptions taken. 2. Approved as Noted: Make corrections noted. 3. Not Approved: Submission is insufficient, does not meet project requirements or unacceptable. 4. Revise and Resubmit: Resubmission required C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 11 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Ah. O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other ' performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load ,, diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. AR P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that .a, documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and 'm, name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. include the following, MO. as applicable: OR, 1 . Preparation of substrates. '44, 2. Required substrate tolerances. Al 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. '�"� 5. Required adjustments. Al, 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. Alk Q. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating All current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity .w, covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. '" Alm PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW ,ally,: A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to *� Architect. • B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title Al„ and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. •k ,AM 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. Aft B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 10 *� .n. 4ft Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA A D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents "* and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's ! ' letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on Ok testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." M. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. ak N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 �w 9 Ak Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA .,� A F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action. .w Ak G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." "kk H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." AW .41 I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." .a Ak J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms Ak proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following All information in tabular form: Ak 1 . Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract .k or supplying products. Ak,, 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by ..a subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by "" subcontract. ,ak 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one copy. � ' MR" a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record .k Document. ,No, A.1, 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other A011 Specification Sections. 10k 1 . Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. *'k Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." ..�R. B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." *� �w C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." ` SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 AW 8 'M 4► Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 """ Smith College Northampton, MA activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will ww► return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for- use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1 . Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 4ft 7 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA .k ..k 1 . Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: �" ,.a a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. "w d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. .W e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. �" f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. lab g. Templates and patterns. look h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. Ak j. Compliance with specified standards. 'Ak k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. "� m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. Ak.. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. .k o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 104 /R 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger '� than 24 by 36 inches. .a 3. Number of Copies: Submit 4 opaque copies of each submittal, unless .k copies are required for concurrent review or operation and maintenance manuals. Submit 5 copies where copies are required for concurrent '"k review or operation and maintenance manuals. Submit 6 copies where A copies are required for concurrent review and operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain one copy; remainder will be returned. Retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. �* D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1 . Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as A� accessories together in one submittal package. k 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: ANN, a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. "` C. Sample source. ,Ma d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. ,ah 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 6 „�, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4. Contractor shall not use the files for determining quantities or dimensions related to any portion of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of + ► construction and type of product or equipment. 1 . If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options ``W are applicable. w► 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. * b: Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. I. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit 4 copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings are otherwise permitted. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 5 low .k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA .b Ak a. Project name. b. Date. "" C. Destination (To:). .W d. Source (From:). .IK e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. AW, g. Submittal purpose and description. Ak h. Specification Section number and title. .k i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. *� k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. I. Remarks. m. Signature of transmitter. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from .t, requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and A* limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. l.k I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial Ak submittal. l.k 1 . Note date and content of previous submittal. .rk 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly ell. indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Approved " or "Approved as . 4� Noted" unless indicated to also "Revise and Resubmit." Ak J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, Ah, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Ak, K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating " Approved " or "Approved as Noted " taken by Architect. All lak, 1 .5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES Ak A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be 'Wk, provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject Mk to the following conditions: 1 . Format: Drawing will furnished in AutoCad 2004. 10w, Ink 2. Contractor shall create layers identified with the prefix "CTR" for all modifications to files. 3. If drawing entities are modified from original file, revisions shall be clouded and noted. "' SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 4 AM* A., Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ok Northampton, MA E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. *w► 1 . Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. +" 2. Provide a space approximately 3 by 4 inches on label or beside title block Ak to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. * b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01 .A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1 . Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to 'Aft specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1 . Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 3 MW ..M,. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College " Northampton, MA ^� B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. w . Alk 1 .4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Ak A A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. "" Alk B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. '" 1 . Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, Ak other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of "" the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review Ak submittals concurrently for coordination. Ak a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. .b C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section „b "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. Ak Alk D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's Alk receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized .k because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to Alm permit processing, including resubmittals. 1 . Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow .# additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must Alk. be delayed for coordination. Alk 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in Alk same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal. Alk, AW, 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Al, Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. ..k. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to ,l, Contractor. AP a. xxxxxxxx .a ,O. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 "a 2 Ale it Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College 4% Northampton, MA SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Ak 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. ark at► B. Related Sections include the following: *! 1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction """'► Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. 5. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 6. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record �w Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 7. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 8. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting rk videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. ak, 9. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals a� in those Sections. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. ark SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 � 1 �k w. Allk ..A wk Ak wp .,p. ..k ww Ak wk, ..k ..k Mw wb� AS' Ak Ank, Aak 40. w1k 4at 4W AW AM AF An, AM, 00, Am, mF A�1. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 �w Ak CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 9 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA lak A. 1 . Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. AM 3. Principal events of activity. AW 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. AM 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. AM 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. Aw F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare A„ tabulated reports showing the following: OW 1 . Identification of activities that have changed. Aft 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. lak 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. .. S. Changes in the critical path. .� 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 2.5 REPORTS AW A A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed °lk report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description A of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the AM, Contract Documents. AM A PART 3 - EXECUTION A AM 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AW A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update .M schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. 1 . Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 2. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. ..> 1 . Post copies in temporary field offices. AA CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 0132(A" 8 ..e Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 4% Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it ' '' can be accepted for use no later than 15 days after date established for commencement of the Work. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this * Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete ' the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network ,► to identify probable critical paths. ' 1 . Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. C. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's 4ft activities. i. Testing and commissioning. w 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and Aft reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 7 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA A lak F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, Aak indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. I AW 1 . Refer to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. "' 2. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM low schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with Architect's approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be under required principal Aw subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and „* maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent '" of the Contract Sum. ,. 3. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by Architect. 4. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. * G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets Aw to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project AW schedule. AM AW 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AW A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Aah B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify low first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant AM, construction activities for first 30 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction "ft based on indicated activities. Am 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A° A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. Im B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the duration of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a "" computerized, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. AW CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 0132('` 6 AW A A% Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College +tw Northampton, MA submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than seven days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial a� Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1 . Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 2. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Uninterruptible services. C. Use of premises restrictions. d. Environmental control. 4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. aw d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. I. Startup and placement into final use and operation. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 5 AW- Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College """ Northampton, MA No Aw PART 2 - PRODUCTS Aw Aft 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. low 1 . Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary network diagram. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. `'w a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. " 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of low Contractor's Construction Schedule. AM 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Aw Planning & Scheduling." AW B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the AW Work to date of Substantial Completion. .M 1 . Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a �° schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. AW C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity Awl for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: lak 1 . Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, AW unless specifically allowed by Architect. AM 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than AW 30 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities AM include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. Im AW 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate 4M CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 0132C` 4 ,o Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 ' Smith College Northampton, MA Ak D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. E. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction s Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 2. Discuss constraints, including work stages, area separations, interim milestones and partial Owner occupancy. 3. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 4. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 5. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 6. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 7. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in w► schedule. 8. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 9. Review procedures for updating schedule. 4ft 1 .6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. "'"► 1 . Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. 4M CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 Ak 3 �. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College " Northampton, MA low B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a Aft construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be Aft performed and the critical path of Project. AAK C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through AW the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration ... and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1 . Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. "" F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. low G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar OK significant construction element. .,w H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. low I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing '"' activities and activity relationships. low J. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for `M the completion of an activity as scheduled. AW 1 .4 SUBMITTALS low A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. B. Submittals Schedule: Submit two copies of schedule. Arrange the following AW& information in a tabular format: lak 1 . Scheduled date for first submittal. AW 2. Specification Section number and title. AW 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. .. 5. Description of the Work covered. „k 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. AW C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies. A 1 . Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not Aft constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities. .m CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320'"' 2 low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College MA Northampton, MA SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ok 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1 . Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Field condition reports. Ak B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. ok 4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of Am tests and inspections. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1 . Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the ^ ► network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 1 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA .* 3. RFI description. Aft 4. Date the RFI was submitted. 5. Date Architect's response was received. Am 6. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Aw Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. AM PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) A PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 Im A AW *01 ..e ,m 4W low A Aft AW low AM A AM.. A low PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131 (w^ 8 ,� Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. C. Hard-Copy RFls: . 1 . Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above. E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow two working days for Architect's response for each RFI. „�► RFIs received after 1 :00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1 . The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFls with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute 4% the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within two days if Contractor disagrees with response. G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the ok RFI number. Review log weekly. 1 . Name and address of Architect and Contractor. 2. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. ++ PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 7 W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Aw Smith College Northampton, MA Oft 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. AR, AW a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been '" made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the AW report of each meeting. AM E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings concurrent ..., with regular project meetungs. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. Im 1 . Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with 4 current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of ,.► future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants AM at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous AVW coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of "" Project. AW a. Review present and future needs of each contractor present. Im 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from ,m, each meeting. .00, AW 1 .8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the . . Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project low meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 0 1 . RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than ,f Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in AM, Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. laft B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: low 1 . Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Architect and Contractor. Aw 4. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 5. Schedule sensitivity 'M PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131 C'` 6 low ,00, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4k 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and "' disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. ± 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1 . Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each ,,k contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Status of submittals. 2) Off-site fabrication. 3) Access. 4) Site utilization. 5) Temporary facilities and controls. 6) Hazards and risks. „ 7) Progress cleaning. 8) Status of correction of deficient items. 9) Field observations. 4% 10) RFIs. 1 1) Status of proposal requests. 12) Pending changes. 13) Status of Change Orders. 14) Pending claims and disputes. + ! PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 5 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College AM Northampton, MA A, low j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Use of the premises and existing building. " I. Work restrictions. .w, m. Owner's occupancy requirements. W n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Construction waste management and recycling. '"" p. Parking availability. AW q. Office, work, and storage areas. r. Equipment deliveries and priorities. " S. First aid. t. Security. „,, U. Progress cleaning. V. Working hours. AM Aw 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. low C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conferences at weekly Im progress meetings followed by visits to the site before each construction „W activity that requires coordination with other construction. A 1 . Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators AM involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled 4W meeting dates. A. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including '"'� requirements for the following: a. Related RFIs. b. Related Change Orders. ' C. Deliveries. AW d. Submittals. e. Review of mockups. .w f. Possible conflicts. "' g. Compatibility problems. „W h. Time schedules. i. Weather limitations. "W j. Manufacturer's written recommendations. AW, k. Warranty requirements. , I. Compatibility of materials. m. Acceptability of substrates. n. Temporary facilities and controls. ,.,. o. Space and access limitations. p. Testing and inspecting requirements. AM q. Required performance results. Mh r. Protection of adjacent work. Aw S. Protection of construction and personnel. Aw Aw PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131(" 4 ft, Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 . Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 4k 1 .6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1 . Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with �w other contractors. Ok 1 .7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. Ak 1 . Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within seven days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, Construction Manager, u► and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. ,w. 1 . Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. C. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Im ..t 1 . Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation AN of other components, before or after its own installation. low 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to 10W ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later lob installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different A. components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for Awk required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the M Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. low 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. „., 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. " 5. Progress meetings. *w- 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Startup and adjustment of systems. 8. Project closeout activities. Alm C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and ""�" materials. A . 1 . Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not ,w actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for o disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's AM property. Aw Aw 1 .5 SUBMITTALS oft A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, A submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and ,f other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including ""11 home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and ,f telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. '"l, Aw PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131 P"' 2 1W, MRW Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4 Ak SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Ak PART 1 - GENERAL w 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 4k 1 .2 SUMMARY sk A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: ok 1 . Administrative and supervisory personnel. 2. Project meetings. 3. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. ' 1 .4 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 1 Amok A Afth Am lak ..b ,«® A. AIM low AI oak AIW AIW A .w►, low A ..w, A.. .w. A AW Aw AIN AM Ak AN* Im .f,. .W. Am .w A Amw o ARW +rA Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 4► PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 a�► Ak PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 5 ,.w� A*� Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College '"" Northampton, MA A& lob G. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include Aw waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. Am AM H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With Final Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's Aw lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the ,W payment. 1 . Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work AW must submit waivers. Aft 2. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. A I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that AM must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment AW include the following: am 1 . List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. `W 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. List of Contractor's principal consultants. "" 7. Copies of building permits. Aw. 8. Initial progress report. AW 9. Report of preconstruction conference. 10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. low low �. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment AW showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as lak substantially complete. A. 1 . Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially AM complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. K. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1 . Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. Am 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract A Sum. .f PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 Am 4 low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 9. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before ok the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1 .5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT ok A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1 . Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of + ► Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Pencil Copies: Submit draft Applications for Payment to the Architect seven days prior to the date established for progress payments. D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. E. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included at end of this Section. F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. w 1 . Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 3 A., Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ""' Northampton, MA Aw AM 3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring law separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. look AM B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item "' for each Specification Section. ,.w 1 . Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule AM of Values: low a. Project name and location. Im low b. Name of Owner Am C. Name of Architect. d. Architect's project number. 'A e. Contractor's name and address. .w, f. Date of submittal. low 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. AM 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to , indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. Aw d. Dollar value. .w 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. AW AW 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line •m items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. "'R Aw a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. lob A 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of AW materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for , . each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 2 low Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. ok 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for " ^ reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1 .4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1 . Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: ok a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 1 Aw .0p, .k A AM Aft Aft AOW .W, A Am Aft AIM Aft low low o.► AM w■ .f,. AW Am Aow Amk ..» AM AdW Aw AIW AN., AM AOW AM ,.a .,a Proj. No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 1 .5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 . 1 .6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1 . Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1 . After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3 Am. lw. Proj. No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 low Smith College Am Northampton, MA ,o„ 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal lak Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract AW Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. Aw a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. Aw If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. low b. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts law of trade discounts. ,,., C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the „ti change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that „w indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, .� changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Aft. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting low a request for a change to Architect. ,, .M 1 . Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed Aft change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit AW costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If t requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. "l 3. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of AW trade discounts. 4M 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Aw 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the Ak effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity AM duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. „m 6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" ,m if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. AW CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 AW low Proj. No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling '* and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. k 1 .3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1 .4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1 . Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 AWX .,' AM ..t AM Aow .w 40k. m AIW low low Alk AwAk A .w Am A Ank AOW M AAW AM AW 4w w AW A!. AM.. ,.A, Ab AW ..k .M .M AM Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA Aft 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES 4W A. Allowance No. 1: Carpeting—First Floor Areas. I. $40.00 per sq.yd. B. Allowance No. 2: Carpeting—Second and Third Floor Areas. 4, 1. $35.00 per sq.yd. C. Allowance No. 3: Entrance Mats. 1. $40.00 per sq.yd. D. Allowance No.4: Student Room Light Fixtures. w 1. $250.00 per sq.yd. END OF SECTION 012100 Ak Ak 4M ALLOWANCES 012100 a 3 Aft Am Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College '"`' Northampton, MA C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of AM the Work. .. Aft 1.5 COORDINATION low A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to AM coordinate installation. AW Aft 1.6 UNIT-COST ALLOWANCES Am A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner AM under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. .s. B. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and 4 profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance ,,,W shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. 1.7 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to AM Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. Aw 1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility. Aw .w PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) .w AW, PART 3 -EXECUTION AM Ak 3.1 EXAMINATION A AW A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 4W 4m, 3.2 PREPARATION AW AW A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with `ft related work. AM A. 1. I, ALLOWANCES 012100 AW 2 .ok Aft. Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 012100 -ALLOWANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ok 1.2 SUMMARY �w A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Unit-cost allowances. ek► C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders for allowances. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE- A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. Am C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. ALLOWANCES 01 2100 1 Aft M* Alft A AMW AM A ow 4M AW AOW .. AM AIW Ak .w Aw Am Am AO AM .■. Alk A. 4w lak AM A .w wk� Am Aw AW Ab Ak A Aft A Am Ak 4W Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College 4% Northampton, MA 4k 2. Division 01 : Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: dk 1 . Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive ► mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. Ak a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. Ak "k 1 .1 1 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) Aft END OF SECTION 011000 ak SUMMARY 011000 5 Afft 1."k Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College ""�" Northampton, MA AM operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Am 1 . Maintain access to existing walkways and other adjacent occupied or Im used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and lmk authorities having jurisdiction. I, 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. .01. low B. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the low right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not AM interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and lm. partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. AM Aw 1 .9 WORK RESTRICTIONS AW A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing Ak building during normal business working hours of 7 a.m. to 10 p.m., Monday AM through Friday, except otherwise indicated. 1 . Weekend Hours: As necessary to meet schedule. 2. Early Morning Hours: Limit noisy activities to after 9 a.m. except by permission of Owner. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner's requirements. Ak B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities Aft occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions "" and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to Am requirements indicated: 1 . Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility 4 interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's permission. '" AW 1 .10 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS AM A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and AW Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. ""t AM 1 . Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult AW the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. SUMMARY 011000 4 w4 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 9. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work. B. Owner-Furnished Products: 1 . Shower bases for Toilets 1 OOT2, 200T1 , 200T2, 300T1 and 300T2. a. Note: Shower bases for suite baths are part of this contract and specified in Division 6 section "Interior Architectural Woodwork." 2. Vinyl Wall Coverings. 3. Selected toilet accessories, listed in Division 10 section "Bath and Toilet Accessories." 1 .7 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1 . Limits: Confine constructions operations to limit impact on the site to the greatest extent possible. 2. Owner reserves the right to approve location of temporary facilities on site within the Contract Limits. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1 .8 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent buildings during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction SUMMARY 011000 3 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 'w law existing rooms, new interior stairs and completely renovated fire protection, plumbing, heating, ventilating and electrical systems. "" Am Aok 1 .4 TYPE OF CONTRACT l A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. ,M, 1 .5 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE A. General: Owner has negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and Aft equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these Purchase A Orders to Contractor. Costs for receiving, handling, storage if required, and Aft installation of material and equipment are included in the Contract Sum. 1 . Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated , Purchase Orders, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final Purchase-Order agreements. A B. List of Products Ordered in Advance: .0.. 1 . Heat Recovery Unit A» ... 1 .6 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and AM electrical connections. 00, 1 . Owner will arrange for and deliver Product Data to Contractor. AW 2. Contactor will arrange for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to A Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor "M shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection. low 4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will AM, arrange for replacement. 5. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for 4W Owner-furnished products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner- .� furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner- 19" furnished items at Project site. ow 7. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. A"K 8. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's ,M, operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. ,.f. SUMMARY 011000 Aw 2 Project No. S-1 10 Renovations to Haven House March 14, 2007 Smith College Northampton, MA 4^ SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 'k 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ,w► 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Products ordered in advance. 4W 4. Owner-furnished products. 5. Use of premises. 6. Owner's occupancy requirements. " " 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification formats and conventions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. Ak 1 .3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Renovations to Haven House 1 . Project Location: Elm Street, Smith College Campus, Northampton, MA. B. Owner: Trustees of Smith College 1 . Owner's Representative: Charlie Conant. C. Architect: Archimetrics Design Studio D. The Work consists of the following: 1 . The Work includes exterior Improvements to building access, new building entrances, reconstructed porches, roof replacement, complete AM refurbishment and renovation to interiors including new suites, new public spaces, new student rooms, new bathrooms, refurbishment of SUMMARY 011000 1 .N AM A Am Ask AM .ek lok A AIW Alk .►W AWA AOW AM 4. AM AM& AWK Oak AAW low 4m Aft A A. w. Ail AJW- .• . low S.C. Approved Subcontractor Bid List---------May 2006 Site Elevator Contractors Warner Bros. Sunderland, MA Schindler Hartford, CT T&M Equipment Corp. Springfield, MA Bay State Chicopee, MA Palmer Paving Palmer, MA Otis W. Springfield, MA Marion Excavating S. Hadley, MA Associated Elevator S.Yarmouth, MA Duffy/Willard Northampton, MA 4r► Dietz Const. Corporation Easthampton, MA Mechanical Contractors Truehart Paving&Lands. Southampton, MA Harry Grodsky Co. Springfield, MA Karl's Excavating, Inc. Hadley, MA M.J. Moran Haydenville, MA JC&Company Northampton, MA T.J. Conway Springfield, MA B-G Mechanical Chicopee, MA Landscape Statewide Mechanical Springfield, MA Duffy/Willard Northampton, MA K.R. Longtin Northampton, MA Sheet Metal Fabricators Truehart Paving&Lands. Southampton, MA Kleeberg Sheet Metal Ludlow, MA ,ft Mt.View Landscapes& Chicopee, MA Fisher Sheet Metal Springfield, MA Berkshire Air W. Springfield, MA " ` Miscellaneous Metals Custom Sheet metal Haydenville, MA Accufab Goshen, MA Hurley and David Air Springfield, MA Arrow Welding Hatfield, MA ` ' ARC Welding Hadley, MA Automatic Temperature Control 4a Ralph's Welding Northampton, MA Yankee Technology Ludlow, MA SWE Springfield, MA Fire Protection Millwork Allied Fire Protection Springfield, MA Westek Westfield, MA. M.J. Moran Haydenville, MA Amherst Woodworking Northampton, MA H.F.P_ Westfield ' John Carlo Woodworking Westfield, MA Warehouse Mechanical S. Hadley, MA Wright Architectural Northampton, MA Haydenville Woodworking Amherst, MA Laurel Hill(Peter Dellert) Holyoke, MA Electrical Contractors ft Bradford Woodworking Florence, MA Collins Electric Chicopee, MA David R. Northup Electric Agawam, MA Haas Electric South Hadley, MA 4, Roofing Contractors M.L. Schmitt, Inc. Springfield, MA Moms Springfield, MA Orchard Electric Northampton, MA Rivet Springfield, MA M&S Electric Hatfield, MA Titan Chicopee, MA Coghlin Electrical, Inc. Westborough, MA Maheu, Joe-Sm. proj. Granby, MA-467-9581 Easthampton Electric Easthampton, MA Pelletier,All-Sm. Proj. Westfield, MA-532-6346 Ernest Peterson Inc. Hartford, Ct Allied Restoration-flats East Hartford,Ct Communication Contractors Alk Painting Contractors Lococo, Owen Northampton, MA Hogan Communications Holyoke, MA Northeast Northampton, MA CoUghlin Electrical, Inc. Springfield, MA �w► Coffey&Heady Northampton,MA Callahan,Joe Pelham, MA Environmental Contractors Novotny Northampton,MA Abide East Longmeadow ATC Associates West Springfield Flooring Contractors Mercier Carpet W. Springfield, MA Landmark Flooring Concept Albany, NY M. Frank Higgins&Co. Newington, CT Ayotte&King Chicopee, MA Dion A&Son Flooring Hadley, MA AMW 4 Excess Liability 1,000,000 Each Occurrence Aw 1,000,000 Aggregate Umbrella Form required unless otherwise agreed. You may substitute a higher amount of general liability coverage in lieu of a follow form umbrella, as long as the sum meets or exceeds the amount of general liability �► coverage as requested. You must indicate on your certificate the full amount of insurance carried, even if it is less than the amount requested. look PLEASE NOTE: The following wording must appear on every insurance certificate "° submitted: .w The Trustees of Smith College and any present or former trustee, director, officer, administer, employee, student, volunteer worker or Agent, is added as an additional low insured to the General Liability, Auto, Employers, Liability and Excess Policies, as their interests may appear. This insurance shall not terminate without at least twenty- *� (20) day's prior written notice to the college. low Please add the college to all applicable policies as additional insured and instruct your lak insurance agent(s) to forward original insurance certificates directly to: "w Smith College 4M Purchasing Department Am 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01063 "M 4M And a Copy To: Ak Charlie Conant Aok Smith College 126 West Street AM Northampton, MA 01063-you may fax to (413)585-2398. Aft AW You will be required to maintain adequate insurance coverage throughout the entire period of your contract or supplier relationship with the college. The insurance agent must provide new original certificates directly to the college whenever new policies are issued or policies are changed or updated. Failure to have or maintain coverage or to provide original certificates may be cause for cancellation or non-renewal or your contract. Aftt l low 2 IM MOIR SMITH COLLEGE LIABILITY INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS All contractors who routinely transact business on the Smith College Campus must meet the following insurance requirements: General Liability: 2,000,000 General Aggregate 1,000,000 Product/Completed Operations 1,000,000 Personal & Advertising Injury Ak 50,000 Fire Damage Legal Liability 5,000 Medical Expense Coverage is to include Broad Form Property Damage, XCU hazard (if appropriate), Contractual Liability and be Occurrence Form unless otherwise agreed. Auto Liability 1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Coverage is to include All Owned Autos or Scheduled Autos and Hired Autos and Non- Owned Autos. Worker's Compensation WA Statutory Worker's Compensation Worker's Liability ► 1,000,000 Disease - Policy Limit 500,000 Disease - Each Employee 500,000 Each Accident (Not required of proprietorships and partnerships, which have no employees, if any employees are subcontracted, coverage will be required, even if the employees are considered "independent contractors". A statement via letter must be provided with the certificates or policy copies stating that the firm has no employees other than the proprietor or partners. A certificate showing coverage of Health Insurance is required 4W of all-sole proprietor or partners. A certificate showing coverage of health insurance is required of all-sole proprietors and partners.) 1 .. Aw Aw ,.b AIW AOW Aft. w AM AW Ak ww .sp .r* ,AW Aft. Am AW .., ..I A AMW AM .,. Aw 4AW Aft A A Aft .w A, §14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE §14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. §14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall: +lR .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts ' and purchase orders. §14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. Aft alA1► a�l►t► AIA Document A201"'—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American 9! institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 39 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03116/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. 4% User Notes: (831634912) A• .. 'Am, by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of A days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. Aft, §14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days' .sw, written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery, A, including reasonable overhead,profit and damages. §14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Oft Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract A Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional ,rW days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. AW .w §14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE §14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .. .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective Am agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances,or rules,regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. §14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any,seven days' written notice,terminate employment of the Contractor A and may,subject to any prior rights of the surety: Ab .1 take possession of the site and of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; Alh .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon request of the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by AM the Owner in finishing the Work. M §14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Contractor shall Alm not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. AM §14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, low the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be,shall be certified by the Architect,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive A termination of the Contract. Al §14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE Aft, §14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in ,W whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. .w §14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by AM suspension,delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1.Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .0w .1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or 4w, .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. Am ANK. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Mow Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 0311612007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12110/2007,acrd is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) ..0 §13.5.3 If such procedures for testing,inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary + + by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. §13.5.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. AM §13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing. 4, §13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. §13.6 INTEREST §13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. §13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD §13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; �. .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment;and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to Aw run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later oft than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Section 3.5,the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2,or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner,whichever occurs last. 1► ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT §14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR §14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,for '' any of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to be stopped; .2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be stopped; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly,upon the Contractor's request,reasonable „ evidence as required by Section 2.2.1. §14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA$Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 37 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order No.1000274148_I which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) .,. Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. §12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK „ §12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has Aftk been made. Ak ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS §13.1 GOVERNING LAW `k §13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. , §13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS §13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.Except as provided in Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the ..� other.If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. §13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing 'IM construction financing for the Project.In such event,the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations oft, under the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. 'f AN* §13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE §13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member fait of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended,or if delivered at or sent by ..a registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. ,ego. §13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES §13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available , . by law. a., §13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty .40*1 afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed in writing. A §13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS AM §13.5.1 Tests,inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ..k ordinances,rules,regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections and approvals with an AM independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall bear all related costs of tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.The Ak Owner shall bear costs of tests,inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are AMt. received or negotiations concluded. AW §13.5.2 If the Architect,Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require ,lk additional testing,inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.Such costs,except as provided in Section 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. .. ... AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 3 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order am No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) .rw §11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK §12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK §12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents,it must,if required in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the aw#IR Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. §12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor.If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate Change Order,be at the Owner's expense.If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. §12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK §12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the Aqk requirements of the Contract Documents,whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,installed or completed.Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and ok inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractor's expense. ok ,f, §12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties Ak established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor Ak shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.During the one-year period for correction of Work,if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. AM §12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. ow §12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. §12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the ' requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. §12.24 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,whether completed or partially completed,of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §1225 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents.Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 35 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 1211012007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) §11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other .. special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy,the Owner shall,if possible,include such insurance,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. "W §11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment AW property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring A* the Project during the construction period,the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. AW §11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that ,.. includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.4.Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions,definitions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire,and that its limits will not be reduced,until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. Aft §11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their AM subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the other,and(2)the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors, +m agents and employees,for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,except such rights as they ` have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary.The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall ww require of the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and the subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees of any of them,by appropriate agreements,written where Oft legally required for validity,similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein.The policies shall A provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or A otherwise,did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly,and whether or not the person or entity had an low insurable interest in the property damaged. w0 §11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made Aft payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.4.10.The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of , insurance proceeds received by the Contractor,and by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity,shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. om §11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties.The cost of required bonds shall be charged against .w proceeds received as fiduciary.The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received,which the „W Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Section 4.6.If after such loss no other Am special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience,replacement of damaged AM property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. A §11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in Alk interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power;if such AWK objection is made,the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Sections 4.5 and 4.6.The Owner as fiduciary shall,in the case of arbitration,make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators.If distribution Aft of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution. ow §11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND low §11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. AM .W ALA Document A201 Tu—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIO Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. x' 34® Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order AW, No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) AM 4* §11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance,the Owner, Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages,except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance.The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. §11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner,Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Section 11.1. §11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE §11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided,the Owner shall purchase and maintain,in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located,property insurance written on a builder's p risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum,plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles.Such property insurance shall be maintained,unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.4 to be covered, whichever is later.This insurance shall include interests of the Owner,the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors in the Project. §11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an"all-risk"or equivalent policy form and shall include,without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage)and physical loss or damage including,without duplication of coverage,theft,vandalism,malicious mischief,collapse,earthquake,flood,windstorm,falsework, testing and startup,temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements,and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services 4% and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. §11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of Aft the coverages in the amount described above,the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof Alft shall be charged to the Owner.If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above,without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all 4W reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. §11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles,the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. §11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also portions of the Work in transit. Aft §11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise.The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall,without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance. §11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law,which shall specifically cover such insured objects during ! " installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;this insurance shall include interests of the Owner,Contractor, Ar Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. §11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance.The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property,including o, consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915, 1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 33 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 1211012007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) §10.5 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of AM a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. AM AW §10.6 EMERGENCIES §10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's ..R, discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Section 4.3 and Article 7. Ak ANK ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS §11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Ak §11.1.1 The Contractor shall Purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do 100. business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which AM the Contractor may be legally liable,whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by AW anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers' compensation,disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; AM .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's employees; 0W .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; A .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; ,4W .5 claims for damages,other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of tangible property,including loss of use resulting therefrom; Al .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury,death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and .8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. §11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law,whichever coverage is greater.Coverages,whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work ,,,,,,,. until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. AM. §11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of A the Work.These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written Ak notice has been given to the Owner.If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after AW final payment and are reasonably available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2.Information concerning reduction o of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate,or both,shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. AM Ak §11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. AM §11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.3.1 Optionally,the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Aft Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's,Contractor's and Am Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of •W purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage,and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner.The minimum limits of liability purchased with AW such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under AW Sections 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5. AM AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 3 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) ,M 41- A^ §10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. §10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. §10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. §10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. §10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. §10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS §10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall,upon recognizing the condition,immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. §10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to verify Ak that it has been rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish in Ak writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner.If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. §10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys'fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself)and provided that such damage,loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. §10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Section 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. Aft AIA Document A201"'—1997.Copyright 0 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American 1111 Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Al a Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 31 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03116/2007 under Order No_1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. 4ft User Notes: (831634912) the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further ,..�. representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. AOW §9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected AW with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts Aft withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)a written statement that the AW Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,(4)consent of surety,if any,to final payment and(5),if required by the Owner,other data .., establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts,releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the A Owner.If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a AW, bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien.If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in 4M discharging such lien,including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. .M §9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confirms,the AW Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.If the AM remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that low portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to A certification of such payment.Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. Am §9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: AW .1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; Am .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. "' AM §9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ,,W ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS §10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. » §10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Aw §10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to AW prevent damage,injury or loss to: .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; AM .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the AW site,under care,custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub- subcontractors;and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees,shrubs,lawns,walks,pavements, roadways,structures and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course of construction. ..� §10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful AW orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. .., AIA Document A201 n—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 3 ' Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03116/2007 under Order A No.1000274148-1 which expires on 12/1012007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) lot,, §9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof 4R is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. !R §9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately,is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete.If the Architect's inspection discloses any item,whether or not included on the Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor shall,before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect.In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. §9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. §9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.Upon such acceptance and consent of surety,if Ak any,the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof.Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE §9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work.Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage,if any,security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract +�11► Documents.When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. §9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. Milk §9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT §9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment,the Architect will promptly make such inspection and,when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue '! a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in AIA Document A201*m—1997.Copyright 01911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and International Treaties. 29 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03116/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/1012007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) Aw 4.. .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless Am security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or equipment; W .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; AS .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the low unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or ,.w .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ,.. §9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. I §9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS AM §9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect. a §9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor,upon receipt of payment from the Owner,out of the AW amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work,the amount to which said A Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. AM §9.6.3 The Architect will,on request,furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable,information regarding percentages of . completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on Am account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. AW §9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. "� Am §9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. Aft, A, §9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. "'*b §9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, loft payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by .M the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both,under AW contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,shall create any Alm fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. §9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT §9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration,then the Contractor may,upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect,stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and .� start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. AM AW AWI AIA Document A201 TN—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA8 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 2F'ft' Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order AM No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/1012007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) -AW payment as the Owner or Architect may require,such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers,and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. §9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.8,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the Architect,but not yet included in Change Orders. §9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. §9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing.Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such ,Mlle materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable insurance,storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. §9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the 4ft Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,material suppliers,or other persons or r entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor,materials and equipment relating to the Work. §9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 111► §9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. §9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment,that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1)made exhaustive or continuous on site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work,(2)reviewed construction means,methods,techniques, sequences or procedures,(3)reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment,or(4)made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. §9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION §9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made.If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount,the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible,including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2,because of. .1 defective Work not remedied; AIA Document A2o1TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915, 1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 27 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03116/2007 under Order No.1000274148_I which expires on 1211012007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) gin nil I AW AW ,.� ARTICLE 8 TIME §8.1 DEFINITIONS §8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. A §8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. ,w §8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. AW §8.1.4 The term"day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically Aw defined. AW §8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION AM §8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.By executing the Agreement Mk the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. §8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be AM furnished by the Contractor and Owner.The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the .W effective date of such insurance.Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given by the Owner,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages,mechanic's liens and other security interests. ..b, §8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion 4 within the Contract Time. Ak §8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME §8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of AM the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner,or by AW changes ordered in the Work,or by labor disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control,or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration,or Aft by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by Ahl Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. wf §8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 4.3. §8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of Aft the Contract Documents. ..b ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION AM §9.1 CONTRACT SUM §9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. ,s §9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES §9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work,prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. Aw §9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT Aw §9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized,if required,and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to Aw AIA Document A201 Tr—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA8 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 2 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03116/2007 under Order A No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) AW §7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or ! " .4 as provided in Section 7.3.6. §7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method,if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. §7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith,including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them.Such AU, agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. §7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit.In such case,and also under Section 7.3.3.3,the Contractor shall keep and present,in such form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor,including social security,old age and unemployment insurance,fringe benefits required by agreement or custom,and workers'compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials,supplies and equipment,including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed; .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor Aft or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar taxes related to Alla the Work;and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. aR §7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect.When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. §7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties'agreement with part or all of such costs.For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute,the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs.That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. §7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments,such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. §7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK §7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. AIA Document A2017m—1997.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 25 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) §6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable AM for such proper execution and results.Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the AW Contractor's Work,except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. AW §6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a A separate contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor.The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. A §6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially Aw*" completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. ,.. §6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. A §6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP AW §6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, AM the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. Ak ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK §7.1 GENERAL §7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidating the Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. AW §7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor and Architect;a Construction A Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. AW .M, §7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents,and the Contractor shall proceed promptly,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. ,m §7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 4M §7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor and low Architect,stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 change in the Work; . . .2 the amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and .3 the extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time. 10* Am §7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Section 7.3.3. ,M- §7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES ow §7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum or Contract AVM Time,or both.The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes AW in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions or other revisions,the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. AW §7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change '" Order. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. .2 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order , No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) .., §5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS §5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work,which the Contractor,by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect.Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where appropriate,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. §5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS §5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract. §5.4.2 Upon such assignment,if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS §6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS §6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation.If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Section 4.3. Ok §6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations ok on the site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes # each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. 4W §6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate Ak contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so.The 4k Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement.The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate am contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. OL §6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,when the Owner performs construction or operations Ak related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract,including,without excluding others,those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. §6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY §6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201Tm—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 23 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) §4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include, ..�. by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,the Architect,the Architect's employees or consultants,except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect,Owner,Contractor Aw and any other person or entity sought to be joined.No arbitration shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any 'low, other manner,parties other than the Owner,Contractor,a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is ww to be accorded in arbitration.No person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose ..� interest or responsibility is insubstantial.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not M, constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein.The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity AW duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court 101, having jurisdiction thereof. Aft §4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. §4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final,and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. Aw ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS §5.1 DEFINITIONS A §5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Am Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term"Subcontractor" AM does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. §5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract ' Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub- subcontractor. §5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK A §5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements,the Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work.The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect,after due investigation,has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity.Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. ,w §5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made *ft reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. §5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection.If the proposed but AVk rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall AM be increased or decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change,and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work.However,no increase in the Contract AWA Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. AM §5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. '" Aft AM AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order ws N0.1 0002741481 which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) AW §4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision,which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. a §4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1)the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and(2)a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision,then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor.If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated,such decision may 4111'' be entered as evidence,but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties 04 concerned. 44 §4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and IIA request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. §4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect,by mediation or by arbitration. §4.5 MEDIATION §4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall,after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. Milk §4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association.The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but,in such event,mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. §4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §4.6 ARBITRATION §4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5,shall,after decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to arbitration.Prior to arbitration,the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.5. §4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association,and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. §4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Sections 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable,and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen,and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Section 13.7. ok AIA Document A2017N—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 21 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) .�4 low §4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time §4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,written notice as provided herein shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. §4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have been reasonably low anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. AA §4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible,written notice of such injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within ,,r„ a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery.The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. AM §4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that 4W application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or AM Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. A,A. §4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract.This mutual waiver includes: AW .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use,income,profit,financing, 4" business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and AM .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there,for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Section 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages,when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. AM §4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES AW §4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims,including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Sections 10.3 through 10.5,shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision.An initial Am, decision by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation,arbitration or litigation of all ,,,r, Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due,unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect.The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. §4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the 140 following actions:(1)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party,(2)reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise,or(5) A' advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to .w. evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that,in the Architect's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. .M, AOW §4.4.3 In evaluating Claims,the Architect may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a A.. decision.The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. §4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of such request,and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data,advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will be furnished.Upon receipt of the response or supporting data,if any,the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. AIA Document AMM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 2C w Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order AW N0.1000274148_1 which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) §4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of,the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests Aw will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.If no 4ft agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Section 4.2,then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. §4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations and initial decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. §4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. §4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES §4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms,payment of money,extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term"Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract.Claims must be initiated by written notice.The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. §4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims.Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. §4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance.Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7.1 and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. §4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions.If conditions are encountered at the site which are(1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract 4% Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature,which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents,then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for,performance of any part of the Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons.Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision.If the conditions encountered are materially different,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, ' but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Section 4.4. §4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work.Prior notice is not required ICI+ for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.6. §4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to(1)a written interpretation from the Architect,(2)an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect,(4)failure of payment by the Owner,(5) " termination of the Contract by the Owner,(6)Owner's suspension or(7)other reasonable grounds,Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Section 4.3. AIA Document A201 n—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American 40K Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 19 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. U (831634912) User Notes: deficiencies in the Work,and(3)to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work,when fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.However,the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of,nor be responsible for,the construction means,methods, techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents,except as provided in Aek Section 3.3.1. AW §4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the ,,,, requirements of the Contract Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor,Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. .w §4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Aw Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized,the Owner and Contractor shall AM endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract.Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect.Communications A by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and with Am separate contractors shall be through the Owner. A* §4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. AM, AW §4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of lak the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3,whether or not such Work is fabricated,installed or ,Mw. completed.However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, ewe Subcontractors,material and equipment suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. AW .A, §4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with AOM information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken Am, with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner,Contractor or separate contractors,while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate AW review.Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of AW other details such as dimensions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract AM Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3,3.5 and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or,unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect,of any construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or IAW procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. AW A* §4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives,and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. low Aft §4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion,will receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records,written warranties lft. and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor,and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. �"�"' .w. §4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site.The duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of Aw such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. ,w Aft. AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03116/2007 under Order ww No.1000274148_1 which expires on 1211012007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) w §3.16 ACCESS TO WORK §3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. ' §3.17 ROYALTIES,PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS §3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof,but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings,Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect.However,if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design,process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a AW patent,the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. ph 46 §3.18 INDEMNIFICATION §3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims,damages,losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Section 11.3, Ark the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to Oki attorneys'fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property Allk (other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a ate► Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Alk Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. +! §3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, ok a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers'compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT §4.1 ARCHITECT §4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The term"Architect"means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. §4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. §4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect. 4^ §4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT §4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents,and will be an Owner's representative(1)during construction,(2)until final payment is due and(3)with the Owner's concurrence,from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Section 12.2.The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. §4.2.2 The Architect,as a representative of the Owner,will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations(1)to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,(2)to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and AIA Document A2017u—1997.Copyright 01911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 17 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. U (831634912) User Notes: AW §3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2)a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. .,k. §3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.In the Ak# absence of such written notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. AW §3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of .40 architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of AW the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures.The Contractor shall not be AW required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.If professional design services or .10 certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria AW that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design P rofessional,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations, AM specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional.Shop Drawings AM and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others,shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled AW to rely upon the adequacy,accuracy and completeness of the services,certifications or approvals performed by such .wk design professionals,provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review,approve or take ..F other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. .m, §3.13 USE OF SITE AVW §3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law,ordinances,permits and the A% Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. §3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING §3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting,fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. e §3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting,patching or otherwise altering such construction,or by �. excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall not be unreasonably AM withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. §3.15 CLEANING UP §3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the Work,the Contractor shall remove from and AM about the Project waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery and surplus Aft materials. .w §3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. '®" AW AM AIA Document A201n—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. w Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 13:01:30 on 031162007 under Order AW No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) A communications shall be confirmed in writing.Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. §3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES §3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and IIA1► Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project,shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents,and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. §3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current,for the Architect's approval,a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. §3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. 4th 4% §3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE §3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings,Specifications, Addenda,Change Orders and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction,and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and AW similar required submittals.These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for Aft submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. + §3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES §3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. §3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. §3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. §3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. 40th Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. §3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors.Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. §3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials,field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so,and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. §3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. AIA Document A201'r'—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 155 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/1612007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 1211 012 0 07,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) AIM. AOft §3.5 WARRANTY At. §3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents,that the AW Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted,and that the Work will conform to AAk the requirements of the Contract Documents.Work not conforming to these requirements,including substitutions not properly approved and authorized,may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for AW damage or defect caused by abuse,modifications not executed by the Contractor,improper or insufficient AW maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.If required by the Architect,the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. §3.6 TAXES AM §3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor Im which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. A §3.7 PERMITS,FEES AND NOTICES §3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building Aw permit and other permits and governmental fees,licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. A §3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful lm orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. ,M §3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations.However,if the Contractor observes lok that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith,the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing,and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. A. §3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and A rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner,the Contractor shall assume appropriate ,,w responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. A §3.8 ALLOWANCES AW §3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, •""" but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable Aft objection. AW §3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and "� all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; AW .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs,overhead,profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but AM not in the allowances; OAK .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section 4ft 3.8.2.2. Am §3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. A §3.9 SUPERINTENDENT §3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance AW at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor,and A communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.Important AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. J ew Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03116/2007 under Order wm No.1000274148-1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) AW Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3,shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,any errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. §3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by th e Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the AK Architect,but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes, ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations,but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. §3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7.If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors,inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error,inconsistency,omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. §3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES §3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract,unless the Contract Documents Ak give other specific instructions concerning these matters.If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below,shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.If the Contractor determines that such means,methods, techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner AIM and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect.If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor,the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. §3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, d% Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. §3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. §3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS §3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, !f► materials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,water,heat,utilities,transportation,and other 40 facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. Ah §3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,after evaluation by the Architect ' and in accordance with a Change Order. 00 §3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other '1111111', persons carrying out the Contract.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not Ak skilled in tasks assigned to them. ok AIA Document A201"'—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American oft Institute of Architects. All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 13 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/1612007 under Order No.100027414"which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) continuation of the Work.After such evidence has been furnished,the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. AM §2.2.2 Except for permits and fees,including those required under Section 3.7.1,which are the responsibility of the 01111. Contractor under the Contract Documents,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements, assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent low . changes in existing facilities. §2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility locations for ow the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the '" Work. law §2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness.Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the ..e Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. §2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor will be furnished,free of charge,such low copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. AW §2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK An, §2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. §2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK AW §2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and AW fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness,the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Am Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period.If the Contractor within AW such three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may,without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,correct such deficiencies.In such case an 41M appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default,neglect or failure.Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect.If payments then or thereafter due the .�. Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. w. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR §3.1 GENERAL §3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The term"Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. Ago, §3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. AM §3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract AM Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. AW §3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 40. §3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary,before starting each portion of the Work,the Contractor „w, shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the ..t AIA Document A201*m—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order w. No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) Aft : §1.3 CAPITALIZATION §1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are(1)specifically defined, (2)the titles +! ► of numbered articles or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. §1.4 INTERPRETATION 04 §1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all" and"any" and articles such as"the" and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. §1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS " ^ §1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor.If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents,the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. §1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. Ok Ak §1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE §1.6.1 The Drawings,Specifications and other documents,including those in electronic form,prepared by the oft Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described.The Contractor may retain one record set.Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants,and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights,in addition to the copyrights.All copies of Instruments of Service,except the ,k Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect,on request,upon completion of the Work.The Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants,and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor,are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect and the Architect's consultants.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice,if any,shown on the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants.Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 2 OWNER §2.1 GENERAL §2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The term"Owner"means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. §2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request,information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights.Such + information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein. �IMIp §2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER §2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Contractor,prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American a A Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Al a Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 1 211 0120 07,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) Aft ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS §1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS §1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings,Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after A execution of the Contract.A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements(advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements). "�' §1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agreements,either written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind(1)between the Architect and Contractor,(2)between the low Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor,(3)between the Owner and Architect or(4)between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. .ow §1.1.3 THE WORK The term"Work"means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,whether completed or 4 partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. AM §1.1.4 THE PROJECT Aft, The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. §1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS AM The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,location and dimensions of the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules and diagrams. ` §1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. §1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL .... The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements,sample Aft forms,Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. Aft, §1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS §1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by A. one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. AM §1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not AM control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be .M performed by any trade. AW §1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. AW AW Aw AIA Document A2011m—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIO Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 1 QAw Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 13:01:30 on 03/1612007 under Order wwa No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) AW 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, Written Interpretations 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3, 14 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Written Orders Written Notice 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 4k A Ak Ak AR Ally AIA Document A201"u—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 9 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/162007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) low 5 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE Subcontractors,Work by CONTRACT 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2, 14 '"° 9.6.7 Tests and Inspections Am Subcontractual Relations 3.1.3,3.3.3,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2, 5.3,5A,93.1.2,9.6,9.10 10al,11.4.7,11.4.8,14.1, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1,135 14.2.1,143.2 TIME Submittals 8 1.6,3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2, Time,Delays and Extensions of 9.3,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, Subrogation,Waivers of 7.4.1,83,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 Time Limits Substantial Completion 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, 4.2,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3,5.4, 6.2.4,7.3,7.4, 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9, Substantial Completion,Definition of 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 9.8.1 13.7, 14 *W Substitution of Subcontractors Time Limits on Claims Aft 5.2.3,5.2.4 43.2,43.4,43.8,4.4,4.5,4.6 Substitution of Architect Title to Work AM 4.1.3 9.3.2,9.3.3 Substitutions of Materials UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF AW 3.4.2,3.5.1,7.3.7 WORK ,,M Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 12 5.1.2 Uncovering of Work AW Subsurface Conditions 12.1 „w, 4.3.4 Unforeseen Conditions Successors and Assigns 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3 AON 13.2 Unit Prices Superintendent 4.3.9,7.3.3.2 AM 3.9,10.2.6 Use of Documents AW Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3 1.2.2,33,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, Use of Site 6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Surety Values,Schedule of 4.4.7,5.4.1.2,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3, 14.2.2 9.2,93.1 " Surety,Consent of Waiver of Claims by the Architect Aft,, 9.10.2,9.10.3 13.4.2 Surveys Waiver of Claims by the Contractor .. 2.2.3 4.3.10,9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Claims by the Owner 14.4 4.3.10,9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 11.4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, AW Suspension of the Work 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4 5.4.2, 14.3 Waiver of Consequential Damages ft. Suspension or Termination of the Contract 43.10,14.2.4 A, 4.3.6,5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 Waiver of Liens Taxes 9.10.2,9.10.4 w , 3.6,3.8.2.1,73.6.4 Waivers of Subrogation „n Termination by the Contractor 6.1.1, 11.4.5,11.4.7 4.3.10, 14.1 Warranty AM, Termination by the Owner for Cause 3.5,4.2.9,4.3.5.3,9.3-3,9.&4,9.9.1,9.10.4,12.2.2, AM 4.3.10,5.4.1.1, 14.2 13.7.13 Termination of the Architect Weather Delays AW 4.1.3 4.3.7.2 Termination of the Contractor Work,Definition of Ajk- 14.2.2 1.1.3 AW Written Consent owl AIA Document A201 n—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIO Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be Eom prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03116/2007 under Order A No.1000274148_I which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) �,. Performance Bond and Payment Bond Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9,11.5 Architect Permits,Fees and Notices 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION Samples by Contractor Oft OF 3.12 10 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2,4.2.6,4.3.4,4.5,4.6,5.3, Polychlorinated Biphenyl 5.4,6.1,6.3,7.3.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 10.3.1 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.4, 14 Product Data,Definition of Royalties,Patents and Copyrights 3.12.2 3.17 Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings Rules and Notices for Arbitration 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 4.6.2 Progress and Completion Safety of Persons and Property 4.2.2,4.3.3,8.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.1.4 10.2,10.6 Progress Payments Safety Precautions and Programs 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3.1,10.1, 10.2, 10.6 Project,Definition of the Samples,Definition of 1.1.4 3.12.3 Project Management Protective Liability Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and Insurance 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 40 11.3 Samples at the Site,Documents and Project Manual,Definition of the 3.11 1.1.7 Schedule of Values 0111k Project Manuals 9.2,9.3.1 2.2.5 Schedules, ,tf, Project Representatives 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.Construction12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2, 4.2.10 6.1.3 Property Insurance Separate Contracts and Contractors 10.2.5,11.4 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,4.6.4,6,8.3.1, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5 10 Shop Drawings,Definition of Regulations and Laws 3.12.1 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples *k 9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Site,Use of Rejection of Work 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.2.1 Site Inspections Releases and Waivers of Liens 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.5 ` 9.10.2 Site Visits,Architect's Representations 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, Special Inspections and Testing 9.8.2,9.10.1 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Representatives Specifications,Definition of the 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 1.1.6 13.2.1 Specifications,The Resolution of Claims and Disputes 1.1.1,1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.2, 1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17 4.4,4S,4.6 Statute of Limitations 11111i► Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, Stopping the Work 10 2.3,4.3.6,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Retainage Stored Materials 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4 Review of Contract Documents and Field Subcontractor,Definition of Conditions by Contractor 5.1.1 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS AIA Document A2011"—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 7 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) e A. AM low Materials,Labor,Equipment and 1.6,2.1.1,2.3,2.4,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2,4.1.2, .W 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.6.1,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.23,3.12,3.13, 4.1.3,4.2.4,4.2.9,4.3.6,4.4.7, 5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1, 3.15.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 6.1,6.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.2.2,8.3.1,9.3.1,9.3.2,9.5.1, " 9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.4.3, 11.4.10, o Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4 Procedures of Construction Owner's Financial Capability """`' 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 AW Mechanic's Lien Owner's Liability Insurance 4.4.8 11.2 Aft Mediation Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 4.4.1,4.4.5,4.4.6,4.4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2, 8.3.1, 10.5 11.4.3 Minor Changes in the Work Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors Aft 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.6,7.1,7.4 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2, 14.2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work "" ` 13 2.4,12.2.4.14.2.2.2 .+,• Modifications,Definition of Owner's Right to Clean Up 1.1.1 6.3 Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to .w 1.1.1, 1.1.2,3.7.3,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8.3.1, Award Separate Contracts 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1 6.1 dow Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Stop the Work Aw 6.2 2.3 Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Owner's Right to Suspend the Work AM 9.6.6,9.9.3,123 14.3 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 14.2 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications Notice and Other Instruments of Service 2.2.1,2.3,2.4,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.7.2,3.7.4,3.12.9,4.3, 1.1.1,1.6,2.2.5,3.2.1,3.11.1,3.17.1,4.2.12,5.3 4.4.8,4.6.5,5.2.1, 8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, Partial Occupancy or Use 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2 9.6.6,9.9, 11.4.1.5 AM Notice,Written Patching,Cutting and „,^ 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, 3.14,6.25 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, Patents law 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 133, 14 3.17 .. Notice of Testing and Inspections Payment,Applications for 13.5.1, 13.5.2 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,93,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, ,W Notice to Proceed 9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.5, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 8.2.2 Payment,Certificates for Notices,Permits,Fees and 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1, „,w 2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Observations,Contractor's Payment,Failure of AW 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,4.3.4 4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 AW Occupancy Payment,Final 2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8, 11.4.1.5 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, Orders,Written 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, Payment Bond,Performance Bond and 13.5.2, 14.3.1 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9,11.5 AW OWNER Payments,Progress 2 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 "" Owner,Definition of PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Aft 2.1 9 Owner,Information and Services Required of the Payments to Subcontractors 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7, 11.4.8, 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 14.2.1.2 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 PCB Owner's Authority 10.3.1 M. AIA Document A20l ym—1997.Copyright 01911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,196l,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Aft Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/16/2007 under Order 'W No.1000274148_I which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) AW Ilk 111% ok IR 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.5,3.1,3.3,3.4,3.5,3.7, Insurance,Project Management Protective 3.10,3.12,3.14,4.2.2,4.2.3,4.3.3,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.4, Liability Ilk 8.2,9.5,9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3 11.3 ok Extensions of Time Insurance,Property 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4.1, 10.2.5,11.4 9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 Insurance,Stored Materials O ► Failure of Payment 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4 4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 INSURANCE AND BONDS Faulty Work 11 (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy Final Completion and Final Payment 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, Insurance Companies,Settlement with 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 11.4.10 ► Financial Arrangements,Owner's Intent of the Contract Documents 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Interest 11.4 13.6 GENERAL PROVISIONS Interpretation 1 1.2.3,1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4 Governing Law Interpretations,Written 13.1 4.2.11,42.12,4.3.6 Guarantees(See Warranty) Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required Hazardous Materials 4.6.4 10.2.4,10.3, 10.5 Judgment on Final Award Identification of Contract Documents 4.6.6 w► 1.5.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 5.2.1 42.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, Indemnification 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4.1.2, 11.43 Labor Disputes Information and Services Required of the Owner 8.3.1 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, Laws and Regulations 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, Injury or Damage to Person or Property 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 43.8,10.2,10.6 Liens Inspections 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.2, Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 4.6.4 Instructions to Bidders Limitations,Statutes of " 1.1.1 4.6.3, 122.6,13.7 Instructions to the Contractor Limitations of Liability 3.2.3,3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7, 12,8.2.2, 13.5.2 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8,3.12.10,3.17,3.18, + ►► Insurance 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4, 9.6.7,9.10.4, 3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.6,8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 9.10.5, 11 Limitations of Time Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, A% 11.4.2 4.2.7,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3, 5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4, Insurance,Contractor's Liability 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9, 11.1 9.10, 11.1.3,11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, Insurance,Effective Date of 13.7, 14 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Loss of Use Insurance Insurance,Loss of Use 11.43 11.4.3 Material Suppliers 41%- Insurance,Owner's Liability 1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,9.10.5 11.2 Materials,Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 AIA Document A201"'—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03116/2007 under Order No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10 12007,and is not for resale. (831634912) User Notes: -OW 0 AOW 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 6.2.5,3.14 a"° 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate .wr Contractor's Liability Insurance Contractors 11.1 3.14.2,6.2.4,9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.1, A Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 11.4, 12.2.4 and Owner's Forces Damage to the Work .rfl 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.4, 12.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Damages,Claims for 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, 3.2.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7, 11.4.8 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect Damages for Delay 1.1.2, 1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2 *" 3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18, 4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2, Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of Aw 4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4, 8.1.2 9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of A 13.4.2, 13.5 8.1.3 AM Contractor's Representations Day,Definition of 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2, 8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 8.1.4 Aft Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Decisions of the Architect Work 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5, "AK 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4, A, 10 9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Decisions to Withhold Certification Aw 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3 Aw Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, 9,7 Rejection and Correction of .ft Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.5.2,9.6.6,9.8.2, 4.3.10, 14.1 9.9.3,9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 Contractor's Submittals Defective Work,Definition of 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2,9.3, 3.5.1 9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.5.2 Definitions Contractor's Superintendent 1.1,2.1.1, 3.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, 3.9, 10.2.6 4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,8.1, 9.1,9.8.1 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Delays and Extensions of Time .w, Procedures 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3A,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, AM 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 7.4.1,83,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.4,7.3.6,8.2, 10, 12, 14 Disputes Contractual Liability Insurance 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.3,7.3.8 11.1.1.8, 11.2, 11.3 Documents and Samples at the Site Coordination and Correlation 3.11 Aft 1.2, 1.5.2,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 Drawings,Definition of Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.1.5 "�' 1.6,2.2.5,3.11 Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of Am Copyrights 1.1.1, 1.3,2.2.5,3.11,5.3 1.6,3.17 Effective Date of Insurance A Correction of Work 8.2.2, 11.1.2 2.3,2.4,3.7.4,4.2.1,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2, Emergencies 12.2, 13.7.1.3 4.3.5,10.6, 14.1.1.2 .� Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents Employees,Contractor's 1.2 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, " ' Cost,Definition of 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 A 7.3.6 Equipment,Labor,Materials and Costs 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, AM 2.4,3.2.3,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,4.3,5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.t, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, Aw 7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3.7,7.3.8,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 11.4, 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work Ak Cutting and Patching low AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 4 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03(16!2007 under Order Aft N0.1000274148_I which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) AW. 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 1.6.1,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6.4, Certificates for Payment 4.6.6,9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3 13.5.4 Conditions of the Contract Certificates of Insurance 1.1.1, 1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4 9.10.2, 11.1.3 Consent,Written + + Change Orders 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 04 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.8.2.3,3.11.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.4, 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 4.3.9,5.2.3,7.1,7.2,7.3,8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 11.4.1.2, 11.4.4, 11.4.9, 12.1.2 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Change Orders,Definition of 1.1.4,6 7.2.1 Construction Change Directive,Definition of CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.1 3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 Construction Change Directives Claim,Defmition of 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 4.3.1 Construction Schedules,Contractor's Claims and Disputes 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.1.1,6.3,7.3.8,9.3.3,9.10.4, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 10.3.3 5.4,14.2.2.2 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Continuing Contract Performance 4.6.5 4.3.3 Am Claims for Additional Cost Contract,Definition of 3.2.3,4.3.4,435,4.3.6,6.1.1,7.3.8, 10.3.2 1.1.2 4ft Claims for Additional Time CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR 3.2.3,4.3.4,43.7,6.1.1,8.3.2, 10.3.2 SUSPENSION OF THE q'k Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9,14 43.4 Contract Administration Claims for Damages 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 [► 3.2.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 to Claims Subject to Arbitration 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 11.5.1 4.4.1,4.5.1,4.6.1 Contract Documents,The Cleaning Up 3.15,6.3 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 1.6,2.2.5,5.3 13.7 Contract Documents,Definition of Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to 1.1.1 2.2.1,3.2.1,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,4.3.5,5.2.1, Contract Sum 5.2.3,6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.4.1, 11.4.6, 3.8,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2,7.3,7.4,9.1,9.4.2, 11.5.1 9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2 Commencement of the Work,Definition of Contract Sum,Definition of 8.1.2 9.1 eAt► Communications Facilitating Contract Contract Time Administration 4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1.3,7.3,7.4, 8.1.1,8.2, 3.9.1,4.2.4 8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2 Am Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time,Definition of 1.6.1,3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8, 8.1.1 Am 9.9.1,9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 CONTRACTOR ak COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 3 9 Contractor,Definition of 40 Completion,Substantial 3.1,6.1.2 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, Contractor's Construction Schedules 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 Compliance with Laws Contractor's Employees AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1956,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 3 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AJA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/1612007 under Order No.1 00 02741 48-1 which expires on 12110/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) look Aft AMW INDEX 3.1.3,4.2,4.3.4,4.4,9.4,9.5 .f. (Numbers and Topics in Bold are Section Headings) Architect's Approvals Am 2.4,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7 AW Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect's Authority to Reject Work 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 A Acceptance of Work Architect's Copyright 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 1.6 AM Access to Work Architect's Decisions ww 3.16,6.2.1,12.1 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5, Accident Prevention 4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4, 4.2.3, 10 9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Acts and Omissions Architect's Inspections 3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,4.4.1,8.3.1, 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 Architect's Instructions Addenda 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2 dit 1.1.1,3.11 Architect's Interpretations Additional Costs,Claims for 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1, 10.3 Architect's Project Representative lak Additional Inspections and Testing 4.2.10 Am 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 Architect's Relationship with Contractor Additional Time,Claims for 1.1.2, 1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, "' 4.3.4,4.3.7,8.3.2 3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2, ,,,,,,, ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4, 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, low Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 13.4.2, 13.5 .�. 1.1.1 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors Aesthetic Effect 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.4.7 4.2.13,4.5.1 Architect's Representations Allowances 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 3.8 Architect's Site Visits Aft All-risk Insurance 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 11.4.1.1 13.5 AM, Applications for Payment Asbestos ,,,t 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,93,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, 10.3.1 9.10, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Attorneys' Fees low Approvals 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3 Alm 2.4,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12,4.2.7,9.3.2, 13.4.2, 13.5 Award of Separate Contracts Arbitration 6.1.1,6.1.2 Aw 4.3.3,4.4,4.5.1,4.5.2,4.6,8.3.1,9.7.1, 11.4.9, Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for 11.4.10 Portions of the Work AW Architect 5,2 A 4.1 Basic Definitions Architect,Definition of 1.1 AM 4.1.1 Bidding Requirements AW Architect,Extent of Authority L 1.1, 1.1.7,5.2.1, 11.5.1 2.4,3.12.7,4.2,4.3.6,4.4,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.6,7.4, Boiler and Machinery Insurance low 9.2,9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.8.3,9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 11.4.2 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Bonds,Lien Am Architect,Limitations of Authority and 9.10.2 Aw Responsibility Bonds,Performance,and Payment 2.1.1,3.3.3,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1, 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 Aft 4.2.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.4, Building Permit 5.2.1,7.4,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6 3.7.1 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses Capitalization 2.4, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 1.3 Architect's Administration of the Contract Certificate of Substantial Completion Am AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA8 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. .+ak Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be A prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 13:01:30 on 03116/2007 under Order ,w,, No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (831634912) ,*Ak AIA AIA Document A201 - 199 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction O.► 4r^ for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address): ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: IRenovations to Haven House The author of this document has Elm Street,Northampton,MA 01060 added information needed for its Oft completion.The author may also THE OWNER: have revised the text of the original Al► (Name and address): AIA standard form.An Additions and Trustees of Smith College Deletions Report that notes added 126 West Street information as well as revisions to 4W Northampton,MA 01060 the standard form text is available from the author and should be A6 THE ARCHITECT: reviewed.A vertical line in the left (Name and address): margin of this document indicates Archimetrics Design Studio where the author has added Mailing Address: 180 Strong Street necessary information and where (Studio located at 13 Railroad Street) the author has added to or deleted 1► Amherst,MA 01002 from the original AIA text. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an TABLE OF ARTICLES attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated 2 OWNER General Contractors of America AM 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT AIA Document A201Tu—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:01:30 on 03/1612007 under Omer No.1000274148_1 which expires on 12/10/2007,and is not for resale. U (831634912) User Notes: AIW AMW Aft Alk ,.W Ask Aft AW Aw Akw Im ow d Ift- AM A AW A"K. AW ARW AMW Aft AW Am A Aft Alk .,w Alk AM ANk Oak AW AIW AM Aw .k omw AIW Aft AOW w RENOVATION TO HAVEN HOUSE DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE dk DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122413 .... ROLLER WINDOW SHADES......................................... ................................... 3 123530 .... RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 124813 .... ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES...................... ................................... 2 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE Facility Services Subgroup oft DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 215300 .... FIRE PROTECTION..................................................... ................................... 23 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 225400 .... PLUMBING................................................................ ................................... 39 DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 235500 .... HVAC .................................. 75 ok DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 266100 .... ELECTRICAL.............................................................. ...................................42 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS NOT APPLICABLE a DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY NOT APPLICABLE Site and Infrastructure Subgroup DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS NOT APPLICABLE 4w DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES NOT APPLICABLE T.O.C. 3 4w AM A. RENOVATION TO HAVEN HOUSE DIVISION 05 - METALS A 055100 .... METAL STAIRS.......................................................... ................................... 5 ... 055213 .... PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS.......................................... ................................... 8 057300 .... DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS.................................. ................................... 9 Aft 4 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061000 .... ROUGH CARPENTRY ................................................. ................................... 9 061600 .... SHEATHING.............................................................. ................................... 4 062013 .... EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY................................... ................................... 7 A, 064013 .... EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK .................. ................................... 7 064023 .... INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK................... ................................... 1 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 073126 .... SLATE SHINGLES....................................................... ................................... 9 075323 .... ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING............................ 9 low 076100 ....SHEET METAL ROOFING............................................ ................................... 12 low 077100 .... ROOF SPECIALTIES.................................................... ................................... 6 077200 .... ROOF ACCESSORIES.................................................. ................................... 4 low 079200 --..JOINT SEALANTS....................................................... ................................... 7 Aw DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS ow 081113 .... HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ...................... ................................... 9 081416 .... FLUSH WOOD DOORS ............................................... ................................... 4 A. 081433 .... STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS................................. ................................... 6 085200 ....WOOD WINDOWS...................................................... ................................... 10 4w 087100 .... DOOR HARDWARE.................................................... ................................... 16 AM DIVISION 09 - FINISHES . ` 092116.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES ................ ................................... 6 A% 092216 .... NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING......................... ................................... 4 ,ow 092613 .... GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING................................... ................................... 10 095113 .... ... ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS................................... ................................... 8 . 096400 ....WOOD FLOORING..................................................... ................................... 5 Alk 096516 .... RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING...................................... ................................... 6 ,w 096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING ............................................... ................................... 6 096519 .... RESILIENT TILE FLOORING................... 096816 .... SHEET CARPETING.................................................... ................................... 6 Aw 097200 ....WALL COVERINGS..................................................... ................................... 5 097500 .... PVC WALL COVERINGS.............................................. ................................... 4 099113 .... EXTERIOR PAINTING ................................................. ................................... 5 099123 .... INTERIOR PAINTING.................................................. ................................... 9 , DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Am 102113 ....TOILET COMPARTMENTS .......................................... ................................... 5 AM 102800 ....TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES ............ ................................... 7 , T.O.C. 2 Al Aw low RENOVATION TO HAVEN HOUSE Table of Contents Division.... Section Title............................................................. ................................... Pa es CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS AIA-A201 ..GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT............... ................................... 39 INSURANCEREQUIREMENTS ....................................................... ................................... 2 SMITH COLLEGE APPROVED SUB-CONTRACTOR LIST................... ................................... 1 SPECIFICATIONS GROUP General Requirements Subgroup Am 'Am DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ox011000 .... SUMMARY ................................................................ ................................... 5 012100 ....ALLOWANCES........................................................... ................................... 3 Oft 012600 .... CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ................. ................................... 3 Aft 012900 .... PAYMENT PROCEDURES............................................ ................................... 5 013100 .... PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION .......... ................................... 8 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.......... 013300 .... SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.......................................... ................................... 11 014000 .... QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.......................................... ................................... 6 015000 ....TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .................. ................................... 7 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ........................................ ................................... 8 017300 .... EXECUTION .............................................................. ................................... 6 017329 .... CUTTING AND PATCHING ......................................... ................................... 5 017419 .... CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL................................. 7 sk 017700 .... CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES .......................................... ................................... 5 017823 .... OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA..................... ................................... 8 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ................................ ................................... 4 Am Facility Construction Subgroup DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 ....SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION......................... ................................... 6 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 033053 .... MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE............. ................................... 7 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 042000 .... UNIT MASONRY........................................................ ................................... 10 a� T.O.C. 1 AM omw A ,w Aw A AOM Aw Aw A AM AMW AM AIW 4w ..O AM AM .I. A A AOW Awk .W AW low Alm s,,, Project No. S-1 10 March 14, 2007 O PROJECT MANUAL RENOVATIONS to HAVEN HOUSE SMITH COLLEGE NORTHAMPTON, MA o 0 w ® cb 6 ti �D E� Olk ok Architect ARCHIMETRICS DESIGN STUDIO 180 STRONG STREET,AMHERST, MA O 1 002 PH 413-548-9955 FAx 413-253-7825 Consulting Engineers Structural Engineer A k LINDGREN &SHARPIES GIBBIE NORDEN CHAMPION BROWN 435 COTTAGE STREET 130 ELM STREET P.O.BOX 802 SPRINGFIELD, MAO 1 104-4005 OLD SAYBROOK, CT 06475 PH 413-732-4336 PH 860-388-1224 FAx 413-731-0786 FAX 860-388-4613 Ak oft mk oft Am r s',:� F " ' , t r AN` ,I �4kp�MM 07.r ":« ' r _ .+ N".:cog yc � i ,��,,�, '', ,/ �,- - I - , , - � - , , , ,]",. -, �,�,, I I , , " , : -1 ,W� 11 11 I 1: - - � , �' - � "",- ��, " :,, �,� , ,,,��, 11 rte A ykr �� e k v ! I / p'r f fl r 1 , M1, W t > { �'< .v' r, e , ,. 3 4 1 t IA AW/ k J aIW,11� 11 a f a i r s � x� K i, k ,} � s +Y< ' r A tr s " a .F S �} x� �ll r I - T , x r } , F. _ . f �� s l t h Y L. iM j 1 :..�. t is'�,yle� A Y? � k .L 1 _ s P > �fi& '' - - d 4s .r d a t 0. Y i , 1 w a i r '.♦ }. q -3 t �Z" 1 t r i �M15 4 eT 4µi3 r - L 7 F t 1 ` .. It .. - i l " 5-f f t , f.t l i .'v t-' -k�.,, I x + t s'r' Ne t t" ! �� g, F ! .1 1 - , most r _ - r a.. } r e '�*x,. E k 1_y '�y A,' +Af .,I 4 t %� at t � � " a �' w f} Y F, r s` ..fi t --fir , '> _ y t �t X a` a X A eM, .. t k - } jK t -I ,i f 4 k S ♦ t p v..yy. � F "'"'k l Y•'1' t' 3 ,` „11 " I *, j 5 { - 'fit :4 I ' r 4 ' �, 'L t J l 'su ; F � r �. l f - Z ° .u t Y i t�� } c a l ,r ;� �'�� ,x } a Y 4" � =a� s �. s ` to ` , z �`i'"i, �q' _ # 5 z ,, "'t . , Y, � pry, l r r w ;,K,,-,,L,,__� 11 Qj M 5�:.tfiAr. f ! r-_ S fNyz•' rf } - t -:i s r I s a} "v R�"'t f .fir tr x _ 4 a='t r '" ,�s. ''`q ,^ w - S� 1 R � ti'. # �.MI's$ "E 21-1 � s �'r K`i i f as ," l t ilk.. + s ,,,, ° � } ' ai,, t ..� ems' �� "� x x,- bmod= ,.. " r'?. - - . 11 4k I } �f '? Project No. S=110 _ March 14, 2007 PROJECT MANUAL t , RENOVATIONS to HAVEN HOUSE SMITH COLLEGE MA . ' 'NORTHAMPTON, Co 0 - 14L6. .�. Architect ARcHmETRfc&DESIGN:Sruoifl R PH 41.3-548-9955 FAX 413=253-7825 CA►nsulting i=nginers Structural Engineer LIN06flItN tr SH,��s GlBBUE NORDEN.CHAMPION BROWN 438 d-OTTA�E a_M 7 i�3 i L S174EEr'"P:C).Bax 802 SPRI14GF{EL D, MA O'1104r4005 PLD SAYBR©OkC,CT 06475 PH 418-732 4�36 PH 9§0f 1 224 FAX 413-7 1'-4786 FAX 860.3881461� OF CHAjtLES` �y P. N 0. L NGEN; °w SAARip f5 y 4' 1R.,P.E. y .o� pF28940 4 No. 22425 mw